JP2019154543A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease of motivation for a game while a player stays in the state not advantageous to the player.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko slot, a set difference is provided for winning probability of a winning combination ("F_BB2") with which "BB" wins alone, and winning probability with which a winning combination ("F_BB2+ special winning combination") "BB" wins at the same time with other combinations is made common regardless of set value. The main control board performs common processing in both "F_BB2" or "F_BB2+ special winning combination" when one of them is won while in the advantageous section; when "F_BB2+ special winning combination" is won while in the normal section, it performs processing more advantageous to a player than when "F_BB2" is won. Thus, a period in the normal section can be a period in which processing advantageous to the player can be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 163

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine having a plurality of modes for determining the probability of transition to AT.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-104425

  According to such a gaming machine, since there is a difference in the transition probability for each mode, the transition expectation to the AT will change according to the current mode, and the interest of the game will improve, but the transition to the AT In a situation where a mode with a low probability is suggested, there is a risk that the willingness to play will be lost and the interest of the game will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation when staying in an unfavorable state for a player. And

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player can perform a stop operation corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R), a variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of the start condition, An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of stop operation means. A stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the stop operation via , The game state in which the technique is performed has a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state, and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. As the internal winning combination, a bonus winning combination and a specific winning combination are determined as an internal winning combination (for example, “F_BB2 + special combination”), and at least the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. And a second winning combination (for example, “F_BB2”) that is different from the first winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means includes the first winning combination or the One of the second winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of a plurality of setting values, and the other is different in at least a part of the plurality of setting values. If the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, the first privilege (e.g., common bonus) is determined regardless of the type of the internal winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. A common processing means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of giving a privilege based on the processing, and a role having no setting difference (for example, “F_BB2 +” between the first winning combination and the second winning combination in the normal state) And a special processing means (for example, main control board 71) capable of giving a second privilege (for example, a privilege based on special processing) A 2nd privilege is a big privilege compared with the said 1st privilege, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to such a gaming machine, the privilege given according to the gaming state when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination is different. Specifically, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the first privilege is granted regardless of the type of bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus combination is displayed during the normal state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, the second privilege is granted only when the determined combination is a combination having no setting difference. At this time, since the 2nd privilege is a big privilege compared with the 1st privilege, according to the gaming machine concerning the present invention, during a relatively unfavorable normal state, a larger 2nd privilege is received. Can do. As a result, even if the player is staying in a normal state that is not advantageous to the player, there is a chance of a large privilege (second privilege) that cannot be received during the advantageous state, so the willingness to play during the normal state Can be suppressed. Note that the second privilege that can be granted during the normal state is given when the combination with no setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the setting is low (easily staying in the normal state). Since it is possible to receive the second privilege without changing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation from the setting situation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means includes a case where a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the second winning combination. In the game where the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the plurality of variable display means stop changing. .

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the first winning combination is won and when the second winning combination is won. In the advantageous state, even if a combination having no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination having a setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether a combination having no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, a role having no setting difference has a greater privilege given to a player who is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal state than in an advantageous state. Therefore, by controlling like the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling down and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, when staying in the state which is not advantageous for a player, it can suppress that a game willingness falls.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a whole front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the sub control board of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of the alerting | reporting of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table | surface of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped-displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviated name of the winning combination in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachi-slot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode up lottery table in CZ1 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point up lottery table in CZ2 memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in normal ART in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium high probability lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows CT CT lottery table during ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the top lottery table during normal ART memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table in CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the number of sets during CT memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine, and shows a lottery table. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus classification lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table on the number of bonus ART games memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus end time CT lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the non-ART flag conversion lottery table memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the alerting | reporting performed by the main side in the said pachislot machine, and the alerting | reporting performed by the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the normal start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ1 (CZ2) of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process in CZ3 of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start during normal ART of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of CT start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of BB start of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the CZ * ART completion | finish of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub side navigation control process of the said pachi-slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the log | history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio display of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the lighting timing of the status indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting method of the presence or absence of winning of the lottery to transfer to a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of each game state which the said pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and transfer lottery table which are memorize | stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ in the case of performing transfer lottery to ART game state with the probability defined uniquely. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the number of limit games in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit process of the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee process at the time of the end of the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of a pattern of the signal output timing to the external apparatus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation cooperated with the external apparatus performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using the specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the navigation frequency in the case of performing the specific area of the navigation frequency management in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the case of managing separately Lip Navi and Bell Navi during a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game in the case of managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ from which an end period differs in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific area in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of the control at the time of the setting change in the said pachislot machine. It is a transition flow of the ball appearance state of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process in MB operation | movement among the appearing ball states. It is a figure which puts together the outline | summary of a game appearance state and a game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the game state of the pachi-slot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows a symbol arrangement | positioning table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows an internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of an internal winning combination and a symbol combination. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows a normal_advantageous area transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows a normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows a normal advantage_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ mode transfer lottery table at the time of normal advantageous_prescribed game number arrival. It is a figure which shows a normal advantageous_SCZ mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows a normal advantageous_SCZ lottery table. It is a figure which shows a SCZ_ART lottery table. It is a figure which shows the SCZ mode lottery table at the time of SCZ_SCZ end. It is a figure which shows a normal advantage_advantage area end lottery table. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in "ART" in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an ART_ART mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows MB operation_ART mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows ART_ normal addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which carries the number of MB action_ART games. It is a figure which shows an ART_history classification lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_addition specialization zone lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_initial high probability lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_ chance mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_ chance mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_ chance mode transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows the extra lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the extra lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows the extra lottery table for ART_chance mode. It is a figure which shows a common_higher addition game number lottery table. It is a figure which shows an ART_last freeze lottery table. It is a figure which shows a common_end time advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous area which concerns on the example 1 of a specification. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous area which concerns on the example 1 of a specification. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous area which concerns on the example 1 of a specification. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous area which concerns on Example 1. FIG. It is a figure for comparing the amount of payout in the advantageous section with the example 1 of specification, and Example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the time of the advantageous section end which concerns on the example 2 of a specification. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the time of the end of the advantageous area which concerns on Example 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining after power-on when there is no setting change and after power-on when a setting change is made as Example 3. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of progress games and benefits which are normally advantageous. It is a figure which shows the method of the history lottery in ART. It is a figure which shows another example of the history lottery in ART. It is a figure which shows the addition notification method in ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage in ART. It is a figure which shows the production stage in ART. It is a figure which shows the ending control in ART. It is a transition flow of the game state which concerns on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state of the advantageous area and advantageous area lamp which concern on the modification of another embodiment in a list. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the addition control in an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the privilege at the time of ART transfer. It is a figure which shows re-recognition of a state reset. It is a figure which shows the arbitrary reset of an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the number-of-games ceiling using an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the game property using an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the game property by the bonus without a setting difference in a normal area. It is a figure which shows another example of the transfer lottery method to an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the transfer lottery table of the advantageous area used in the said another example. It is a figure which shows the transfer lottery table of the advantageous area used in the said another example. It is a figure which shows the calculation method of an accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows another structural example of an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows another example of an advantageous area transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lighting timing of an advantageous area lamp. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of an advantageous area. It is a figure which shows the control method of a number limiter. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of a number limiter.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachislot machine showing an embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as game media. In addition, the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out game media, but is applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as a game ball and grants benefits as electronic data such as earned points when a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, a function in which the replay probability is higher than normal between the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and the specific number of plays. A pachi-slot having a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) in which RT is simultaneously operated will be described.

[Function flow of pachislot machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, the pachislot machine 1 is set to a single value (from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535)). Hereinafter, random numbers) are extracted.

  The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means determines a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on detection of a unit game start operation on the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 4) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). The internal winning combination is determined.

  By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which benefits such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), bonusing, etc. are given to the player, and so-called “losing”. Such a thing is provided.

  Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated, when the player presses the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, reel stop control means (a main CPU 31 described later, a motor drive circuit described later). 39, stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, which will be described later, perform control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

  Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. . In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is the number of four symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). ).

  The reel stop control means, when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined, uses the specified time, and the symbol combination is displayed as a winning line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

  On the other hand, for combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols so that they are not displayed along the effective line using the specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R.

  In this way, when all the rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the active line is related to winning. Determine whether or not.

  That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the combination based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, based on the fact that the change of the symbols is stopped by the reel stop control means.

  When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is performed first when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating is the first stop operation, the first The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, various effects are produced by using the output of light (video) performed by the display unit 100, the output of sound performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof in the above-described series of flows. Done.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is performed by a sub-control board described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effects in conjunction with the respective triggers such as the start of reel rotation, the stop of rotation of each reel, and the determination of the presence or absence of a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination is a game. It is provided to the player and the player's interest can be improved.

[Pachislot machine structure]
The functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG.2 and FIG.3, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 in this Embodiment is demonstrated.

  FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

A housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62 a disposed at the upper front of the cabinet 61, and a lower front of the cabinet 61. And a lower door 62b. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment (for example, reels) used for games. The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so that the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member that fixes the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

  The upper door 62a has the display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that performs effects according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but a so-called projection mapping device is used in this embodiment.

  A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R described later. In the display window 4, an upper right diagonal cross-up line, an upper top line, a middle center line, a lower bottom line, and a lower right diagonal cross down line are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays 3 × 3 symbols. Five lines of the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, the center line of these five lines is an effective line, and a winning determination is made based on a combination of symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for winning determination.

  The activated line (center line) is activated by operating a MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the “number of inserted medals” includes both the BET number by the operation of the MAX bet button 11 and the inserted number actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

  In the cabinet 61, a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band in which a symbol row as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on each outer peripheral surface. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  The symbols drawn on each reel band can be viewed from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol row is displayed in a variable manner.

  A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10, a medal slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1 bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 4) that is lit when a medal can be inserted is provided.

  By depressing this MAX bet button 11, the number (three) of medals used for a unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, every time the 1-bet button is pressed, one medal is inserted. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for a unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

  The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1 bet button, and the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22 (operation of inserting a medal for playing a game) are referred to as “insertion operation”.

  An information display 14 is provided at the approximate center in the horizontal plane of the pedestal 10. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up in accordance with the number of medals inserted in the current game (hereinafter referred to as the inserted number). The information display 14 also has information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits), and the like. A digital display (not shown) for digitally displaying the game to the player is provided.

  In addition, the information display 14 has an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information of a stop operation necessary for displaying a combination of symbols according to the combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. Is provided. The instruction monitor is configured by, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, “push order”, which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the order of the stop operation (push order), is provided. For example, “1” is displayed when the push order “1st (perform the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)” is notified. , “2” is displayed when the push order “2nd (perform the first stop operation to the middle reel 3C)” is notified, and the push order “3rd (first stop operation to the right reel 3R) is displayed. “3” is displayed when “ Details of notification of stop operation information in the instruction monitor will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 4 to be described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, the stop operation information may be notified using other means controlled by the sub-control board 72. For example, Information on the stop operation may be notified in the display unit 100 described above.

  In this case, the notification mode in the instruction monitor may be different from the notification mode in other means. That is, the instruction monitor may be notified in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information about the stop operation (for example, “1” in the instruction monitor). Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, and it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information on the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order “1st” is notified, the instruction monitor displays “1” uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation to the left. It is good also as notifying directly about what is performed with respect to this reel 3L.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not only the control of the sub-control board 72 but also the control of the main control board 71 can notify information on necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the later-described ART gaming state (see FIG. 7) without notifying the stop operation information in the later-described general gaming state (non-ART).

  Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, there is provided a settlement button 13 for switching credit / payout of medals obtained by the player in the game by a push button operation. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout opening 15 at the lower front, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

  On the right side of the checkout button 13, a start lever 6 is provided as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by the player's tilting operation and starting the display of symbols in the display window 4. It is attached so that it can be tilted freely in the angle range.

  Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R as stop operation means for stopping the rotations of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's pressing operation are provided in the approximate center of the front surface portion of the base portion 10, respectively. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) basically starts when the start lever 6 is operated, and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

  A first sub display device 201 and a second sub display device 202 are provided in front of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202 are located on the sides of the front surface of the lower door 62 b that are erected substantially vertically from the horizontal surface of the pedestal unit 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

  In at least one of the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device 202, in this embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is interposed therebetween. The display can be switched according to the received player's operation. The touch sensor 201a operates in accordance with a predetermined operation principle such as an electrostatic capacity method, and when a player's operation is accepted, outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub display device 201 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 5) based on touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

  Speakers 9L and 9R that provide effects such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout opening 15 through which medals are paid out is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. A medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid-out medals is provided at the lowermost part of the lower door 62b.

  The lower panel 62b has a front panel sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R and the medal receiving part 16, and a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the model motif. It is attached. The waist panel 25 is irradiated by a waist panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machine]
This completes the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, with reference to FIG.4 and FIG.5, the structure of the circuit with which the pachislot machine 1 in this Embodiment is provided is demonstrated. The pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, an external concentration terminal board 73 and peripheral devices (actuators) that are electrically connected to these.

<Main control board>
FIG. 4 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 includes the microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 includes a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
The main CPU 31 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses.

  The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the application.

(Peripheral devices and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. The input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39, a hopper drive circuit 41, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external concentration terminal plate 73, and a control circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

  The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes symbol variation means and controls the driving of stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition.

  The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

  The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 31 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).

  Next, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. The payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the medals paid out from the hopper 40 have reached the payout number. .

(External concentration terminal board)
The external concentration terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of inserted / withdrawn medals from the main control board 71, the number of games, information on whether or not bonus is activated, and displays such signals as the number of games and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or game room host computer. The external indicator is installed, for example, above the pachislot machine 1, and updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, or notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

  Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that enables recognition of medal payout or replay, and is output at the time of medal payout (including credit storage) or replay operation.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons and switches and the information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub control board 72 through the sub relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected to the sub relay board 75 so as to be able to transmit information only, and information is not sent from the sub relay board 75. As a result, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are set to one-way communication capable of transmitting information only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72.

  The door relay board 74 is connected to a start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1 bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S.

  The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R is pressed (stop operation) by the player.

  The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. The MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. The 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 validates the active line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, or the MAX bet switch 11S and the 1 bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

  Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, respectively, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the receiving state, and the number of medals and an advantageous stop operation are uniquely defined. Is connected to an information display 14 (instruction monitor) for informing the user.

<Sub control board>
FIG. 5 shows an electrical configuration mainly including the sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. The sub control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

  The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter referred to as sub CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter referred to as sub RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to a control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82 in accordance with a command transmitted from the main control substrate 71. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, a production random number value, and the production content (production data) determination. An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 9R is included.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are connected to the sub control substrate 72 via a predetermined relay substrate. For example, the sub-control board 72 is connected to the display unit 100 through an accessory relay board (not shown), and the first sub display device 201 and the second sub display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). 202 is connected. The display unit 100, the first sub display device 201, and the second sub display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub control board 72.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. The sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. . For example, the sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 to the various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). The sub relay board 75 connects the sub control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and the sub control board 75 via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Pachislot machine game state transition flow]
Next, a gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment and its transition flow will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Basic game state transition flow>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 distinguishes a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state based on whether or not the bonus (F_BB1, 2) is won / actuated. Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state where the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated, and the inter-flag state is a state where the bonus is won and the bonus is not activated, and the bonus state. Is a state in which the bonus is activated.

  Whether or not a bonus is won is managed based on data stored in an internal winning combination storing area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not a bonus is activated is determined by a game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. Management is based on data stored in a storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

  In addition, the main control board 71 provides six types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination related to replay and the winning probability are different from each other. Note that the RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is an internal winning combination related to replay. Is a gaming state in which the probability determined as a medium probability is medium. In addition, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the combination related to replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

  These RT0 gaming state to RT5 gaming state are managed based on data stored in a gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachislot machine 1 has five flags, an RT1 gaming state flag to an RT5 gaming state flag, and manages the RT gaming state by managing on / off of these flags by the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the RT gaming state flag that is on as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT gaming state flags are OFF, the main control board 71 specifies that the current RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 71 (1) when the bonus winning combination (F_BB1, 2) is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state, the game is changed from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state. Transition state. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state when (2) a bonus-related combination is won in the inter-flag state.

  Further, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state when the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number (216) is paid out in (3) bonus state, and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 (4) transitions the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state when 20 games have elapsed, and (5) displays the bell spilling points before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. In the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spillage is displayed.

  In addition, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the (6) RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) the RT4 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, the main control board 71 (8) transitions the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when the bell spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state. When a spill or RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

  Here, the bell spilled eyes are determined for each push order bell type when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) to be described later are determined as internal winning combinations. This is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. In addition, RT2 transition lip is not in the pressing order determined for each type of maintenance lip when a later-described maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, RT3 transition lip is the order of pressing determined for each RT3 lip type when RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. In addition, the RT4 transition lip is determined in the order of pressing determined for each RT4 lip type when an RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Game state transition flow regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of bonus winning / acting, the type of internal winning combination related to replay, and the winning probability thereof, while notifying the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The game state is managed based on whether or not to do so. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a game state transition flow regarding the presence or absence of notification.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 distinguishes the general gaming state and the ART gaming state based on the presence / absence of notification. The general game state is basically a game state (non-ART) in which the content of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a disadvantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, the ART gaming state is a gaming state in which a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player will play a game from the general gaming state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to shift to an ART gaming state that is advantageous to the player. .

  The general gaming state is a gaming state that is not win for ART among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 7, the general gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game state of the transfer destination is different, and in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the CZ, and from CZ to the ART game state. Is done.

  The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the normal gaming state shifts to CZ. Specifically, in the normal gaming state, the lottery for transition to CZ is performed. (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to CZ.

  CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with high expectation for transitioning to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of transitioning from CZ to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, in CZ, a lottery for transitioning to ART is performed. (B) When this transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CZ to the normal gaming state. When winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) through the ART preparation.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an RT is won among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART. As shown in FIG. 6, since the RT4 gaming state transitions from the RT0 to RT2 gaming state via the RT3 gaming state, the ART gaming state is not immediately started even after the ART win. Absent. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the period until the transition to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART is determined as being prepared for ART, and a stop operation necessary for transitioning to the RT4 gaming state is notified during the ART preparation.

  Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically a gaming state in which an ART is won in the RT4 gaming state. As shown in FIG. 7, the ART gaming state is normally configured by ART and CT. Normal ART and CT are game states having different game characteristics, and normal ART displays a stop operation (for example, a combination of symbols having a large number of medals to be paid out) for a predetermined number of games. And a stop operation necessary for maintaining the RT4 gaming state), and the CT notifies the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and adds an additional duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. In addition, during CT, a game is normally performed without digesting the duration of ART.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the normal ART shifts to the CT or the general gaming state. Specifically, in the normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed. (D) When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed, and (E) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Although the normal ART duration management method is arbitrary, the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment manages the duration based on the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals or the number of medals paid out during normal ART, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation) The duration may be managed according to the number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) When this duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from CT to normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, CT is managed by the duration of one set of eight games, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 37).

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 7, there is a possibility that the bonus game state may be shifted from the general game state (normal game state or CZ) and the ART game state (normal ART or CT). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, (2) when a bonus-related role is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

  In the bonus state, a lottery for shifting to ART is performed. (G) If the winning lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the game state has shifted from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state, the main control board 71 does not change from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). ) To shift the gaming state). Further, when (H) the winning lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state is completed, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for the ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via the route.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the twenty symbol positions “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The design types are “White 7”, “Blue 7”, “Chile 1”, “Chile 2”, “Chile”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2”. And “Cactus 3”.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 8 assigns the symbol located at the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions “0” to “19” are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the 3C and 3R rotation directions.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Also, as shown in FIG. 8, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 8 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described above, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “white 7”, “blue 7”, “top 1”, “top 2”, “bottom”, “replay”, “hat” ”,“ Cactus 1 ”,“ Cactus 2 ”and“ Cactus 3 ”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “white 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned to the “Chile top 1” symbol (symbol code 3).

  Similarly, for “Chile top 2”, “Chile bottom”, “Replay”, “Hat”, “Cactus 1”, “Cactus 2” and “Cactus 3” (symbol codes 4 to 10) , “00000100” to “00001010” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In this embodiment, a winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given privileges such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), and bonus game (acting equipment continuous operation device). In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored and a “data (bit corresponding to a symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage region” Data for designating “)” is defined. In the present embodiment, each symbol combination is determined by using 22 1-byte storage areas. For example, “C_BB1” illustrated in FIG. 9 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Each combination is defined with a combination name corresponding to the role of the combination and the type of symbol constituting the combination.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 11, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals are paid out.

  The content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. Referring to FIG. 9, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the active line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 6). ).

  Further, the combination names “R_RT transition A_01” to “R_RT transition B_02” are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the active line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

  The combination names “C_maintenance lip A_01” to “C_maintenance lip G_01” are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on any one of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Further, the combination names “C_RT2 Lip A_01” and “C_RT2 Lip A_02” are RT2 transition Lips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “Replay-Replay-Replay” is displayed on the cross-up line displayed on the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

  Further, the combination name “C_RT3 Lip_01” is an RT3 transition reply. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which “replay-replay-replay” is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

  Further, the combination names “C_RT4 Lip A_01” to “C_RT4 Lip D_02” are RT4 transition Lips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the active line, the re-gaming operation is performed and the RT gaming state transitions to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 6).

  Further, the combination names “C_Chilli Lip A_01” to “C_1 Chilli Lip D_01” are Chile Lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which a chile symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, in this embodiment, the symbol “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chilli bottom” are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chile symbol is a name when the symbol “Chile top 1” and the symbol “Chile bottom” are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the active line, the replay is activated.

  Of the chili lips, the combination name “C_chili lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which the chile symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes referred to as a “single dust”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_chili lip B_01” and “C_chili lip C_01” are combinations of symbols in which chile symbols are displayed on two of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. In the following, it may be referred to as a “two-line chili lip”. Among the chili lips, the combination names “C_chili lip D_01” to “C_1 correct chili lip D_01” are combinations of symbols (or the corresponding ones) in which chile symbols are displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. This is a symbol combination that is displayed when a stop operation for displaying a symbol combination fails (so-called “missing eye”), and may be hereinafter referred to as “triple lip”.

  Further, the combination names “C_reach eye lip A_01” to “C_reach eye lip P_02” are reach eye lips. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a symbol combination in which a special symbol combination is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name “C_reach eye lip A_01” is a combination of symbols in which “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed along the top line. When the reach lip is displayed along the active line, the re-game is activated.

  In addition, the combination names “C_RB combination A_01” to “C_RB combination G_02” are the ninth in the BB. When 9 out of BBs are displayed along the active line, 9 medals are paid out. Of the 9 BB appearances, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names “C_RB role C_01” and “C_RB role C_02” is 7 symbols (designs) on any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. “White 7” or “Blue 7”) is a combination of symbols displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination is failed), Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “seven in BB”. On the other hand, the combination names “C_RB combination C_01” and “C_RB combination C_02” are combinations of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. Sometimes called.

  The combination names “C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04” are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which “hat-hat-hat” is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When a bell is displayed along the active line, nine medals are paid out.

  The combination names “C_1st_A_01” to “C_2nd_B_04” are the first ones. When the first item is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out. Further, the combination names “C_SP1_01” and “C_SP2_01” are the final outcomes. When a confirmed outcome is displayed along the active line, one medal is paid out.

  The combination names “C_3 sheets A_01” to “C_3 sheets F_01” are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the active line, three medals are paid out. Also, the combination names “C_weak 2 sheets A_01” to “C_weak 2 sheets B_03” are weak cherries, and the combination names “C_strong 2 sheets A_01” to “C_strong 2 sheets C_09” are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the active line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 13 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 14 is an internal lottery table referred to in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

  In the present embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the combination to which the lottery is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random values that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 13, it can be seen that the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “F_Chill Lip (No. 25)” to “F_Leach Eye Lip D (No. 31)” are internal winning in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state without being determined as a combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when “F_chililip (No. 25)” to “F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, a specific control (described later) This flag conversion will be described later.

  Even in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, “F_reach eye lip A to D” may be determined as an internal winning combination together with “F_BB1, 2” (No. 3-6, No. 15-18), “F_reach eye lip AD” is not determined as an internal winning combination alone. Therefore, when “F_reach eye lip A to D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state (from the player, the combination of symbols corresponding to “F_reach eye lip A to D” is When displayed, the combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is simultaneously determined as the internal winning combination.

  Further, in the RT5 gaming state, which is an inter-flag state, the bonus-related combination is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. For this reason, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 gaming state shown in FIG. 14, the combination related to the bonus carried over is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIG. 15 to FIG. 20 are comparison tables showing the correspondence relationship between combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. A circle in each correspondence table indicates a combination (combination) of symbols that can be displayed on the active line in the combination determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 changes the stop control according to the internal winning combination and the game state, and when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped so that a combination of symbols can be displayed. In addition, in the correspondence tables shown in FIGS. 16 to 22, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when a combination is determined as an internal winning combination are listed. Even combinations of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1, stop control (for example, a drawing to be preferentially drawn) is made different depending on a combination of symbols that can be stopped and the current gaming state. Even a combination of symbols with a mark may not be displayed. Accordingly, FIG. 21 and FIG. 22 show the correspondence relationship between the type of combination and the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between winning combination during non-flagging and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship (omitted for some of the combinations) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of symbols to be stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, “push order combination”, which is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operation (push order) is different, is provided as a plurality of combinations. The symbol combination associated with “correct push order answer” in FIG. 21 is a symbol combination advantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to “incorrect push order answer”. The attached symbol combination is a symbol combination that is disadvantageous to the player among the symbol combinations displayed according to the pressing order. When a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the correct pressing order is notified, and as a result, a combination of symbols associated with the “pressing correct answer” is displayed. Even in the ART gaming state, the push order that is incorrect may be notified, but details will be described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order represents the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the end “1st” of the name of the combination means that the correct pressing order is that the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L, and the end “2nd” of the name of the combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the middle reel 3C, and the last “3rd” in the name of the combination is the correct push order and the first stop operation is the right reel. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end “123” of the name of the role means that the correct order of pushing is “left, middle, right”, and the end of the name of the role “132” is that where the correct order is “left”. , “Right, middle” means that the end of the name of the role “213” means that the correct answer is “middle, left, right”, and the end of the name of the role “231”. Means that the correct order of pushing is “left, right, middle”.

  As shown in FIG. 21, the combination “F_Chilelip” is a combination in which the combination of symbols displayed differs depending on the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, FIG. 15 of the Chililip (see FIG. 9). When any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 20 is displayed along the effective line, and the pressing order is not correct, the replay (see FIG. 9) in FIG. 15 to FIG. Any of the displayed displayable symbol combinations is displayed along the active line. Referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, the role “F_Chillilip” cannot display the triple chililip (“C_Chillilip D_01” to “C_1 exact chililip D_01”), and can display the single chilelip or the double chililip (“C_Chillilip”). A_01 ”,“ C_Chillilip B_01 ”, and“ C_Chillilip C_01 ”) can be displayed. That is, the combination “F_Chillilip” is a combination that cannot display a triple Chililip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the active line, and the push order is not correct, FIGS. 15 to 15 of the replay (see FIG. 9). One of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 20 is displayed along the active line. Referring to FIGS. 15 to 20, it can be seen that the roles “F_accurate dust” and “F_1 accurate dust” can display triple dust. In other words, the combination “F_acceptance lip” or “F_1 accuracy lip” is a role that can display a triple lip.

  In addition, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip ( If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 15 to FIG. 20 (see FIG. 9 and FIG. 10) is displayed along the active line, and the pressing order is not correct, the replay (FIG. 9), one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the effective line.

  Note that the correct answer push order in the roles “F_Chile Lip”, “F_Challeng Lip”, “F_1 Chilli Lip” and “F_Reach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” may be arbitrary. In the embodiment, the pressing order in which the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L is the correct pressing order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination “F_reach eye lip A” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach lip is displayed. Will be.

  For the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip A” and “F_Maintenance Lip B”, any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is an effective line. It is displayed along. In addition, the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, replay (see FIG. 9). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIG. 15 to FIG. 20 is displayed along the active line and the push order is not correct, RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 9) Any one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 is displayed along the effective line.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT3 Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 Lip_1rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. If the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition Lip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_RT4 Lip_123” to “F_RT4 Lip_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition Lip (see FIG. 9). Is displayed along the effective line, and if the pressing order is not correct, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the replay (see FIG. 9) is displayed on the active line. Displayed along.

  In addition, the combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. If the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 11). Is displayed along the active line, and when the pressing order is not correct, a bell spilled eye (refer to FIG. 9) or a single item (refer to FIGS. 11 and 12) is displayed.

  For the combination “F_common bell”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the bells (see FIG. 11) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. The combinations “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Sabo 2” indicate that any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIG. 15 to FIG. Displayed.

  In addition, for the combination “weak chilli”, any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 among the weak cherries (see FIG. 12) is displayed along the active line regardless of the pressing order. In addition, for the combinations “F_strong dust 1” and “F_strong dust 2”, any of the combinations of symbols that can be displayed shown in FIGS. 15 to 20 in the strong cherry (see FIG. 12) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence relationship between winning combination between flags and combination of symbols to be stopped>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination in the inter-flag state and a combination of symbols to be displayed in a stopped state (some of the combinations are omitted). In particular, BB (“C_BB1” is displayed during the inter-flag state. “C_BB2”) is displayed. 22, “◯” indicates that BB can be displayed, and “X” indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

  In addition, when BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols according to the combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination is displayed. The combinations of symbols displayed according to the combinations other than the combination related to the bonus are as shown in FIG. For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_Chillilip”, BB cannot be displayed, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_Chillilip” in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the correct answer is shown in FIG. 21 may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the incorrect push order is displayed. It may be.

  For example, in the combination “F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st”, since BB cannot be displayed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” in FIG. 21 is displayed. In this case, only the bells that are displayed when the pressing order is correct may be displayed, and the bell spilled or the first sheet that is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may not be displayed. Further, in the case of the combination “F_BB1 + F_RT3 Lip_1st”, only the replay displayed when the pressing order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition lip displayed when the pressing order is correct may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, when any of the combination related to the bonus and “out of”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, or “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation of the winning role>
As described above, the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols to be stopped is described. Subsequently, a data table used when performing various types of lottery in a general gaming state, an ART gaming state, and the like will be described. However, in the following, since the winning combination used when referring to the data table is abbreviated, the data table The abbreviations for the winning combination will be described before the explanation. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing abbreviations for winning combinations.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, in the following, the roles “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are called the role “BB”, and the roles “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” are called the role “push order bell”, The role “F_Common Bell” is called the role “Common Bell”, the roles “F_Sabo 1” and “F_Cabo 2” are called the role “Cactus”, the role “F_Weak Chile” is called the role “Weak Cherry”, and the role “F_Strong” “Chile 1” and “F_Strong Chile 2” are called “Strong Cherry”.

  In addition, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” are called “Triple Chile Lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “Replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are called “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery, and “replay” when not winning the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state, any one of the roles “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chanting Lip”, “F_Leach Eye Lip A” to “F_Reach Eye Lip D” is independently used as an internal winning combination. When determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. And in the pachislot machine 1, when winning this flag conversion lottery, a special privilege (for example, adding the number of ART games or CT winning) is given.

  As shown in FIG. 21, for the combinations “F_Chili Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip”, the combination of “Triple Chili Lip” is displayed at the correct push order, and the “Replay” symbol combination is at the incorrect push order. Is displayed. When the pachislot machine 1 wins the flag conversion lottery, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” are treated as the “Triple Chilli Lip”, and the information for displaying the symbol combination of “Triple Chilli Lip” is displayed. (For example, press down to target the Chile symbol). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combinations “F_Challenged Lip” and “F_1 Chick Lip” are treated as “Replay” and information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” is notified (for example, , The push order other than the forward push is notified).

  Similarly, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed at the correct pressing order and the combination of "replay" at the incorrect pressing order Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when winning the flag conversion lottery, the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” are treated as the role “reach eye lip”, and the combination of the symbols of “reach eye lip” is used. Information to be displayed is notified (for example, the symbol “white 7” is aimed by pressing forward). On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, information for displaying the combination of symbols of “Replay” by treating the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” as the role “replay”. Is notified.

  By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when winning the flag conversion lottery, a combination of symbols of “three-line chili lip” or “reach eye lip” is displayed and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, a special privilege is given in response to winning the flag conversion lottery, but from the player, a special privilege is given by displaying the combination of “triple chili lip” symbols. You will feel granted.

  In order to improve the gameability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state. Since stop control (combination of displayed symbols) varies depending on the type of internal winning combination, as a method of varying the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which a privilege is given depending on the state, the winning probability of the combination is varied. (In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be varied depending on whether the bonus is activated or the RT gaming state. For example, only the RT4 gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. In addition, other game states such as RT6 gaming state and RT7 gaming state may be provided). However, since the opportunity to change the winning combination probability (RT gaming state transition opportunity) is limited, this method lacks flexibility.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the bonus is obtained by performing notification based on the flag conversion lottery and the lottery result in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to be given can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in the state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the symbol combination to which the privilege is given can be increased. On the contrary, in the state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of the symbol to which the privilege is given The appearance frequency of can be lowered.

  In the following description, the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Challenging Lip” will be determined by winning the flag conversion lottery when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination. "Chilip" is sometimes referred to as "converting to Chilelip" (or simply "triple lip"), and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations Winning the flag conversion lottery of “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is converted to “reach eye lip” (or simply converted to “reach eye lip”). There is.

[Flow of game during general game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the normal gaming state is changed from the normal gaming state to the general gaming state CZ, and then the general gaming state CZ is changed to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 7). FIG. 24A is a diagram illustrating a game flow when the normal gaming state in the general gaming state shifts to CZ in the general gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 24A, the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as the lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states having different degrees of expectation for winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state. The low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state wins the CZ lottery. It is easy to do. Note that when the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state is won, the gaming state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the CZ (see FIG. 7).

  The pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZ (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone that must win an ART lottery, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lotteries with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal gaming state, the CZ that shifts from the normal gaming state is lottery among these CZ1 to CZ3.

  Next, FIG. 24 (B) is a diagram showing a game flow when transitioning from the general gaming state CZ1, CZ2 to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half and a second half. The first half is a period in which ranks having different expectations for winning an ART lottery performed during CZ are promoted, and the second half is a period in which a lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by a battle effect.

  During CZ1, a six-level mode is used as the rank, and the higher the mode, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ1 continues for the first number of games (for example, a maximum of 12 games), and performs mode promotion lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ1.

  Also, during CZ2, ten points are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the degree of expectation for winning an ART lottery. The first half of CZ2 continues for the second number of games (for example, a maximum of 15 games), and performs a lottery promotion for points based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ2.

  In the second half of CZ1, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character A battle each other. In the second half of CZ2, a battle effect is played in which the teammate character and the enemy character B battle each other. This battle effect continues for the third number of games (for example, a maximum of 4 games), and wins and losses are managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the player wins the ART lottery, the teammate character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. In the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on each game and an internal winning combination, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during a battle performance, an ART lottery is performed, and the result of the battle performance is rewritten based on the result.

  In CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the latter half battle effect, and basically, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, if CZ1 or CZ2 wins the ART, the player wins in the second half battle effect, and then the gaming state shifts to the normal ART via the ART preparation. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, freezing may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via the ART preparation).

  Next, FIG. 24 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow when transitioning from the general gaming state CZ3 to the ART gaming state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and performs ART lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game through ART preparation. In CZ3, a freeze may occur. In this case, the game state is shifted from the next game to the CT (additional chance zone) via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the fourth game number has passed while the ART lottery in CZ3 has not been won, the game state shifts to normal ART via ART preparation. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during the general gaming state]
Next, a data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Normal medium-to-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 25 is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery in the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CZ lottery state is shifted based on the internal winning combination, and the CZ lottery state is also shifted at the end of the bonus or at the end of CZ or ART. FIG. 25A is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the CZ lottery state based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to for each game during the normal gaming state. FIG. 25B is a normal medium / high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of the CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to when the setting is changed, at the end of the bonus, or at the end of the CZ or ART.

  The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A defines lottery value information regarding the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and winning combination.

  The various data tables shown below conceptually show lottery value information. In the figure, “0” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0%” is defined, and “extremely low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “0% to less than 1%” is set. “Low” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 1% to 10%” is prescribed, and “Low” means a lottery probability “10%”. Means that a lottery value corresponding to “less than 30%” is defined, “medium” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “less than 30% to less than 60%” is defined, “High” means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability “60% to less than 80%” is defined, and “very high” means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability “80% to less than 99%”. Means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability “99% to less than 100%” is prescribed. Means that are "determined" means that the lottery value corresponding to lottery probability "100%" is defined.

  In the various data tables shown below, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). An internal lottery is performed by sequentially subtracting the random number for lottery with the specified lottery value and determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). Is called.

  Referring to the normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. . In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it is understood that any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry is determined as the internal winning combination, thereby maintaining the high probability. .

  The normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25B defines lottery value information regarding the CZ lottery state after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. Referring to the normal medium / high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 25 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 26 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery. FIG. 26A is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal gaming state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery on whether or not to pull back CZ when CZ fails or when ART ends.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26A defines lottery value information related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. Referring to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26A, it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than when the CZ lottery state has a low probability.

  The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26B defines lottery value information related to the winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART gaming state, a CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG.

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 27 is a CZ1 medium mode up lottery table used for CZ1 mode up lottery in the first half of CZ1. The mode up lottery table during CZ1 defines lottery value information on the result of the mode up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29A, which will be described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the mode goes up. The lottery result “mode 1 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 1, and the lottery result “mode 2 UP” means that the CZ1 mode increases by 2. That is, in the situation where the current mode is “2”, when “mode 2 UP” is won, the mode of CZ1 is increased from “2” to “4”. In addition, when a lottery result “Mode 6 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze occurs, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 28 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of CZ2. The point lottery table in CZ2 defines lottery value information about the result of the point up lottery in association with the current point and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 29B, which will be described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning an ART lottery increases as the number of points increases. In addition, “point 2 UP” of the lottery result means that the point of CZ2 is increased by 2, for example, when the current point is “2” and the player wins “point 2 UP”, the point of CZ2 is “ It will rise from “2” to “4”. In addition, when the lottery result “Point 10 UP_Freeze” is won, a freeze is generated, and an ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
FIGS. 29 and 30 are CZ ART lottery tables used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 29A is a CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1) used for the first game in the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 29B is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ2) used for the first game of the second half of CZ2, and FIG. 29C shows CZ used for the second half of CZ1 and CZ2. FIG. 29D is a medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for the ART lottery in CZ3.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) shown in FIG. 29A defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current mode. In addition, the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ2) shown in FIG. 29B defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the current point. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table during CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

  The CZ ART lottery table (for CZ1, CZ2 common during the second half battle) shown in FIG. 29C defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. Referring to the ART lottery table during CZ (CZ1, CZ2 common for the latter half of the battle), if a rare combination (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as an internal winning combination in the latter half of CZ1, CZ2, You can see that you win the ART lottery with a probability.

  The ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3) shown in FIG. 30D defines lottery value information regarding the presence / absence of an ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games and the internal winning combination of CZ3. Referring to the CZ ART lottery table (for CZ3), it can be seen that during CZ3, winning an ART lottery will always win CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the flow of games during normal ART will be described. The pachislot machine 1 has a normal ART and a CT as the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7), and is added as a chance zone during the CT. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the normal ART, a game is played aiming at the transition to CT. FIG. 31A is a diagram showing a flow of lottery for transition to CT during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 31A, the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lotteries performed during normal ART. The ART level is provided in four stages from level 1 to level 4, and is controlled mainly based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. The ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and extremely high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. The CT lottery state affects a CT lottery performed during normal ART and a flag conversion lottery during normal ART described later.

(Normal flag conversion during ART)
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the RT4 gaming state (that is, during the ART gaming state), the roles “F_Challenging Lip”, “F_1 Chanting Lip”, “F_Leaching Lip A” to “F_Leaching” When any one of “Lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination alone, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, the addition of the number of ART games or CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

  As shown in FIG. 31B, the pachislot machine 1 performs flag conversion lottery with reference to the ART level and CT lottery state during normal ART. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given and a notification (for example, in order) is displayed for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and a symbol combination of “reach eye lip”. Notification that a predetermined pattern is aimed at by pressing). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying a combination of symbols of “replay” (for example, notification of a pressing order other than a forward pressing) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, a combination of symbols corresponding to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” or a symbol of “reach eye lip” when winning the flag conversion lottery When the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol combination “Replay” is displayed.

[Data table used during normal ART]
Next, a data table used during normal ART will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 32 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during normal ART. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chicking Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, first, the first stage flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this first stage flag conversion lottery is won, Thereafter, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery of the second stage is won, the combination “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chilli Lip” is converted to “Triple Chile Lip”, and the flag conversion lottery of the first stage or the flag conversion lottery of the second stage is converted. If it is not won, it is treated as “replay” without converting the roles “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” to “triple lip”.

  32A is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 32B is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 32A defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the first-stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles “F_Challenging Lip” and “F_1 Chanting Lip”, and for the roles “F_Leaching Lip A” to “F_Leaching Lip D” Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

  The ART flag conversion lottery table shown in FIG. 32B defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. Until the CT is won once in normal ART, the “first time (until CT wins once)” column of the item “ART level” is referred to.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B), in each of the ART flag conversion lottery tables, random numbers (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-stage flag conversion lottery can be simulated as a lottery performed using random numbers in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, it has been required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to playing balls, which has conventionally been performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without reducing the capacity while reducing the capacity.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention, since the probability denominator 256536 can be lottered by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and CT lottery status for the second stage lottery, flag conversion lottery can be performed not only according to the internal winning combination but also according to the current state. A flag conversion lottery can be performed.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 33 is an ART level determination table used for determining the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of ART winning when the transition to the ART gaming state is determined and during normal ART. FIG. 33A is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level when the ART is won, and FIG. 33B is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

  The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33A defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred when the ART is won (see FIG. 27, etc.), ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33 (B) defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuing games in the normal ART. In addition, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 33B defines lottery value information for the ART level of the transfer destination in association with the current ART level and the number of continuing games in the normal ART at the time of CT entry. . That is, during the normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continued games, and the ART level also shifts at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium-high probability lottery table>
FIG. 34 is a normal ART medium high probability lottery table for lottering the CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium / high probability lottery table defines lottery value information about the CT lottery state of the transfer destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. Referring to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table, the role “3 consecutive chili rips (winning“ F_definite chili lip ”“ F_1 definite chili lip ”wins the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning)” or the “reach eye lip (role“ F_reach eye lip ” In “A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, winning the flag conversion lottery), it can be seen that the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to “low probability”. In the above description, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, contrary to the above description, but FIG. As will be described later, the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” and “reach eye lip” must win the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, a special privilege called CT winning is still given.

<Cart lottery table during ART>
FIG. 35 is a CT lottery table during ART used for CT lottery during normal ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines lottery value information about the lottery result of CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, when “cactus”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “triple chili lip”, “reach eye lip” and “BB” are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using a random value. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as internal winning combinations, CT lottery is performed using random numbers in the range of probability denominator 65536.

  The pachislot machine 1 has “normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” as CT. “Normal CT” and “highly accurate CT” have different expectations of the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and “highly accurate CT” has a larger number of ART games than “normal CT”. Is easily added (see FIG. 40).

<Normal lottery table during ART>
FIG. 36 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games during normal ART. The extra lottery table during the normal ART defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Game flow during CT]
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, the flow of games during CT will be described. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by one set of 8 games. During CT, the lottery of the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination. When the winning lottery is won, the number of games is not subtracted, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Is done. For this reason, a game in which the number of ART games is added does not end during the CT, and is ended when a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is performed eight times.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 37A and 37B, if the winning combination “triple dust lip” is won during CT (that is, if the winning flag conversion lottery is won when winning the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Challenging Lip”). ) One set of 8 games is reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added in the same set is played seven times, the CT will be terminated if a game in which the number of ART games is not added once is performed, but the role “Triple Chile Lip” If the player wins, the CT is reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game is played in which the number of ART games is not added eight times. Therefore, CT becomes easier to continue as the combination “Triple Chile Lip” wins.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 37C is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the “triple chilling”. As described above, if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won during CT, CT will be reset. Therefore, if the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” or “F_1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, CT will be restarted. Will be set.

  On the other hand, for the combinations “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D”, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37C, table 0 has the lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, table 1 has the next lowest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”, and table 2 Has the highest probability of conversion to “reach eye lip”. In addition, if the winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, CT is newly given as shown in FIG. 41 described later.

  As shown in FIG. 37C, in normal CT, a table is determined based on the ART level. In the case of high probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, a data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41.

<Table lottery table during CT>
FIG. 38 is a CT lottery table for determining the table used for flag conversion lottery from the three-stage tables. The intra-CT table lottery table defines lottery value information for a table used for flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed. When the CT lottery table is determined to win the CT lottery and shift to the CT, or is referred to at the start of CT, the table used for flag conversion lottery during CT is determined.

<CT flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 39 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery during CT. The CT flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. Referring to the flag conversion lottery table during CT, it can be seen that during the CT, the winning combination “F_accurate lip” and “F_1 accurate lip” are always converted to the winning “triple chilli lip”.

<Casting lottery table during CT>
FIG. 40 is an extra lottery table during CT used for extra lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that a winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 40 is not won in the extra lottery during CT.

  In addition, in the extra lottery during the normal CT, the number of extra games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive chili lips” is won. Specifically, when the number of winning the “three-line chili lip” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, “10 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and during the same CT When the number of wins for the role “Triple Chile Lip” is “9-16 times”, “20 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games, and the number of times that the “Triple Chile Lip” is won during the same CT Is “17 to 24 times”, it is easy to determine “30 games” as the number of additional games, and when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili rips” during the same CT is “25 times or more” In addition, “50 games” is easily determined as the number of additional games.

  More specifically, in the extra lottery table during CT, if the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” is “1-8 times” during the same CT, The number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” is “10 games”, and the number of added games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely low” is “20 games”. Then, when the number of wins for the “3 consecutive Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “9 times or more”, the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value “extremely high” of the 3 “Chile Repeat” in the figure is “ Promoted to “20 games”. Further, when the number of winning “3 consecutive chili lips” in the same CT becomes “17 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “very high” and “very low” of the “3 consecutive chili lip” in the figure. The number of added games is promoted to “30 games”. Similarly, if the number of wins for the “Triple Chile Lip” in the same CT becomes “25 times or more”, it corresponds to the lottery values “Extremely High” and “Extremely Low” of the “Triple Chile Lip” in the figure. The number of additional games to be promoted is promoted to “50 games”.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination “three consecutive lips” is won during CT. As described above, as long as the number of ART games is added, CT will not end, and CT will be reset if the winning combination “Triple Chile Lip” is won. The more you continue, the more you can expect the additional amount per time to increase, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, the number of times to increase the additional amount per time is more (9 times or more) than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT. Can be prevented, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with additional number of sets during CT>
FIG. 41 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets in CT used for the lottery for adding a new CT during CT. The set number extra lottery table during CT defines lottery value information on the lottery result of the extra lottery in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 41, when a winning combination “reach eye lip” is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is given as a result of adding the number of sets, a new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed ends.

  The number of wins for the above-mentioned “Triple Chile Lip” is counted only during the same CT, but this “In the same CT” is when a lottery is won by adding the number of sets performed during CT. It is good also as including the new CT provided to, and not including it.

[Game flow in bonus state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the bonus state will be described. FIG. 42A is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game state is shifted to the bonus state during the general game state (ART non-winning state), and FIG. 42B is the case where the game state is shifted to the bonus state during the normal ART. FIG. 42 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow when a transition is made to a bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 42A to 42C, the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state transitions. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after completing the bonus state, the process proceeds to CT via the ART preparation. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow differs depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 42A, when the normal gaming state shifts to the normal BB, the ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination during the normal BB. If this ART lottery is won, after the bonus state is ended, the state shifts to normal ART through the ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games is added and lottery is performed during the bonus state.

  Referring to FIG. 42B, when the normal ART is shifted to the normal BB, CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery is won with a probability of 50%, and if it is won, it will shift to CT via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state, and if it is not won, it will transfer to the normal ART via the ART preparation after completion of the bonus state To do. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

  Referring to FIG. 42 (C), when the transition from CT to normal BB or special BB is performed, the transition to CT is made via the preparation of ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state shifted from the normal ART, the number of ART games is added and lottery is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, a data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 43 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Bonus table with bonus ART games added>
FIG. 44 is a bonus lottery table for the number of ART games in bonus used for the lottery and the number of ART games to be added during the bonus state. The bonus ART game number extra lottery table defines the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value information regarding the extra game number in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

  The lottery table added with the number of bonus ART games is used for the ART lottery in the ART non-winning state (until the ART lottery is won in the normal BB shifted from the general gaming state). In other words, when 1 or more (in reality, at least 50 games) are determined as the number of additional games in the ART non-winning state, an ART lottery is won and a corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after the ART win, the bonus ART game number addition lottery table is used for the ART game number addition lottery.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 45 is a bonus lottery CT lottery table used for CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the gaming state before the transition to the bonus state. Referring to the bonus end CT lottery table shown in FIG. 45, for example, if a normal BB is performed during a normal ART, it is found that a CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow in the general gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by performing notification during the RT4 gaming state, and the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of symbols displayed as shown in FIG. is doing. As shown in FIG. 21, since the combination of symbols for shifting the RT gaming state is displayed according to the order of the player's stop operation (pushing order), even when notification is not performed In some cases, the RT4 gaming state may be entered accidentally.

  Further, in the RT4 gaming state, since the roles “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” may be determined as internal winning combinations, even in the general gaming state (non-ART) A reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given can be displayed. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46, when the game mode is changed to the RT4 game state accidentally during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of symbols of “reach eye lip” can be displayed. If it becomes a state, it becomes possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

  More specifically, when the combination “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye lip D” is determined as an internal winning combination during the RT4 gaming state, the flag conversion lottery is performed. When the flag conversion lottery is won, a notice for displaying the symbol combination of “reach eye lip” is given and the ART right is granted. On the other hand, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, a notification for displaying the “replay” symbol combination is performed, and control is performed so that the symbol combination “reach eye lip” is not displayed.

<Non-ART flag conversion lottery table>
FIG. 47 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for flag conversion lottery performed in the general gaming state and the RT4 gaming state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by control on the main side]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, the stop operation information (push order, etc.) is reported under the control of the sub (sub control board 72) side in the ART machine. In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the player's profit. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an instruction monitor for notifying information on the stop operation is provided on the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71, and the information on the stop operation is notified under the control of the main side. I am going to do that.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between notification (navigation) performed on the main side and notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 48, the main control board 71 notifies the stop operation information by displaying numerical values “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values “1” to “11” uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and “1” to “3” indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. “1” means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, and “2” means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and “3”. Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

  Also, “4” to “9” indicate the pressing order to be notified respectively, “4” means that the pressing order is “left, middle, right”, and “5” indicates that the pressing order is “ “6” means “middle, left, right”, and “7” means “middle, right, left”. “8” means that the push order is “right, left, middle”, and “9” means that the push order is “right, middle, left”.

  Further, “10” and “11” notify the bonus-related combination, and “10” means a symbol combination “C_BB1” composed of “white 7-white 7-white 7”, and “11”. Means a symbol combination “C_BB2” composed of “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7”.

  Here, although the numerical values “1” to “11” notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, it is not always possible for all players to clearly understand the notification content. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that the notification content cannot be grasped by some players just by displaying “6” on the instruction monitor on the main side.

  Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 notifies the details of the stop operation on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 that is controlled by the sub-control board 72, and notifies the stop operation information under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is to be performed on the left reel 3L, “1” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the left reel 3L of the display unit 100 is displayed on the sub side. “1” is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when the pressing order “middle, left, right” is notified, “6” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “1” is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pressing order is "middle, left, right". When “F_BB1” is determined as an internal winning combination, “10” is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and “white 7-white 7-white 7” is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed, and a symbol to be aimed at is notified to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, during the ART preparation, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi”, and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. “Bell Navi” informs the roles “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “bell”. Further, “Maintenance Lip Navi” notifies the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_1st” to “F_Maintenance Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the symbol combination “Replay”. In addition, “RT3 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combination “F_RT3 transition Lip_1st” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols “RT3 transition Lip”. In addition, “RT4 transition Lip navigator” notifies the combinations “F_RT4 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT4 transition Lip_3rd” of the pressing order for displaying the combination of symbols of “RT4 transition Lip”.

  Note that the timing of notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, notification on the main side may be performed at the timing when the start operation is received, or notification on the main side may be performed when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation are performed. It is good also as notifying on the main side at the timing which received either. On the other hand, it is preferable that the notification timing on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is received or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start to rotate. Thereby, before the player performs the stop operation, information on the stop operation is notified on both the main-side instruction monitor and the sub-side display unit 100.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48B, during the ART gaming state, “Bell Navi”, “Maintenance Lip Navi”, “RT 3 Transition Lip Navi”, and “RT 4 Transition Lip Navi” are performed under the control of the main side. During the ART gaming state (RT4 gaming state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chilli lip”, “reach eye lip” or “replay” based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side but only on the sub-side.

  As described above, since the combination of the symbols “Triple Chile Lip” and “Reach Eye Lip” is related to the provision of a special privilege, the presence or absence of notification seems to affect the player's profit (out) It can also be considered. However, in the pachislot machine 1, in practice, a special privilege is given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the displayed symbol combination does not affect the given privilege. That is, when winning the flag conversion lottery, even if the symbol combination of “Replay” is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In such a case, even if a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” and “reach eye lip” can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

  In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the player's profit (out of play), the sub monitor does not perform notification on the main instruction monitor. Notification on the display unit 100 is performed only on the side.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48C and 48D, during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is made to aim for a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus carried over as an internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48C, when the role “F_BB1” is carried over, “White 7 Navi” is performed, and as shown in FIG. 48D, the role “F_BB2” is carried over. If so, perform “Blue 7 Navi”. “White 7 Navi” notifies the combination “F_BB1” of the stop operation information for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB1”, and “Blue 7 Navi” displays the combination “F_BB2”. Information on the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination “C_BB2” is notified.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 22, in the inter-flag state, any combination of bonus and “out of”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, or “F_special 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. The combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and when the other combination is determined as an internal winning combination together with the bonus combination, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 48 (C) and 48 (D), when performing control on the main side, the main control board 71 is “displaced”, “F_special role 1”, “F_special role” with the bonus carry-over. “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” is performed only when either “2” or “F_Special Role 3” is determined as the internal winning combination. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing at which the winning combination can be won.

  The main control board 71 may perform “White 7 Navi” or “Blue 7 Navi” only after notifying (bonus notification) that the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying a bonus confirmation screen or lighting a bonus confirmation lamp.

  As an example, when a combination related to a bonus is determined as an internal winning combination, an effect performed over several games (so-called continuous effect) is performed, and a bonus confirmation screen is displayed according to the result of this continuous effect. Generally done. If “white 7 navigation” or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known on the way, which may impair interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 performs “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” only after the bonus notification is made. It should be noted that a method for enabling the main side to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made is arbitrary.

  As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus notification, and after digesting the number of games, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 A method of performing “navigation” can be considered. More specifically, when the number of games required for bonus notification is determined, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games after determining the bonus winning combination as an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, and after the count result reaches a predetermined number When a combination related to the bonus and any one of “out of”, “F_special combination 1”, “F_special combination 2”, and “F_special combination 3” is determined as an internal winning combination, “white 7 navigation” or “blue 7 navigation” I do.

  As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines that the bonus winning combination is an internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus winning combination, the main control board 71 performs an effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed on the display unit 100. Determine and notify the sub-control board 72. The sub-control board 72 executes the notified effect and displays the bonus confirmation screen, whereby the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side can be grasped.

  Of course, it is also possible to make it possible for the main side to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by other methods. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot accept a signal from the sub-control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that can be accepted by the main control board 71. . For example, since the signal associated with the stop operation can be received by the main control board 71, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In the event of a loss, a bonus notification may be given. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “bonus related combination”). In the case of a stop operation “other than forward press”), a bonus notification is made. Since such a bonus notification can be grasped by the main control board 71 as well, the timing at which the bonus notification is performed on the main side can be grasped.

[Description of main control board operation]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 65.

<Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU>
First, the procedure of main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to a flowchart shown in FIG. 49 (hereinafter referred to as main flow).

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed or the setting has been appropriately changed, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a medal acceptance / start check process (S3). In this process, input checks of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S are performed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to an internal lottery table (FIGS. 13 and 14) corresponding to the current gaming state, and lottery is determined from among a plurality of winning combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the winning combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” are determined as internal winning combinations (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 gaming state flag and sets the gaming state to the inter-flag gaming state (S6).

  Subsequent to the processing of S6 or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations “F_BB1” and “F_BB2” have not been determined as internal winning combinations (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to state by state described later in FIG. A game control process is performed (S7).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs main-side navigation control processing (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data corresponding to the current gaming state and internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop initial setting process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 (S9). In this process, reel stop control information used for stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The start command data includes various kinds of information necessary for effects such as an internal winning combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing a wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). It is controlled so that a constant speed is maintained.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 61 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed. The

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the active line, depending on the combination of symbols such as medal payout and re-game operation. Give a profit. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data for a winning action command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning action command data includes various types of information such as combinations of symbols displayed along the active line.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a BB check process which will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and end of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs RT check processing which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs control to shift the RT gaming state based on the displayed symbol combination.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ / ART termination process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 65 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs CZ pull-back lottery. When the CZ / ART end process is performed, the main CPU 31 determines that one game (unit game) has ended and returns the process to S2.

<Control processing by state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the state-specific control processing will be described. In the state-specific control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S31). When it is in the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process described later in FIG. 51 (S32).

  Subsequent to the processing of S32 or when it is determined that the RT4 gaming state is not in S31 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). If it is in the normal game state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal start process described later with reference to FIG. 52 (S34), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ (S35). If it is during CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start process during CZ, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 (S36), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is normal ART (S37). If it is during normal ART (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs normal ART start processing described later with reference to FIG. 57 (S38), and ends the state-specific control processing.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CT (S39). If the CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a start process during CT, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 58 (S40), and ends the control process by state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a BB start-time process, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 (S42), and ends the state-specific control process.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the ART is being prepared, the main CPU 31 performs processing corresponding to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CT start time (S50). When it is time to start CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the CT flag conversion table lottery table (FIG. 38) and lots the table number used for flag conversion lottery during CT. (S51).

  Subsequent to the processing of S51 or when it is not the time of CT start in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table corresponding to the current state (S52). For example, if the current state is a non-ART RT4 gaming state, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 47) is set, and if the current state is a normal ART RT4 gaming state , The flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 32) is set, and if the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the flag conversion lottery table during CT (FIG. 39) is set.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and then determines whether or not it is won (S54). When the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the winning combination “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F — 1 Chilli Lip” is handled as the “Triple Chilli Lip”.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state has been performed accidentally in response to the player's stop operation in a state where the general gaming state (non-ART) notification is not performed. judge. If the current gaming state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), and then sets the next game to be ready for ART (S58), flag The conversion process ends. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not in a non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

  If the flag conversion lottery is not won in S54 (NO), the main CPU 31 performs a flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the winning combination “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, processing is performed so that the winning “F_1 correct Chile Lip” is handled as the winning “Replay”.

<Normal start processing>
Next, normal start processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 26A, and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and internal winning combination (S61).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). If the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won in the CZ game number counter. (S64). Note that the CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ. When the player wins CZ1, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half) If CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

  Following the processing of S64 or when the CZ lottery is not won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium / high probability lottery table of FIG. Based on the winning combination, the CZ lottery state transition lottery is performed (S65), the CZ lottery state is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal start time process is terminated.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the start time process during CZ will be described. In the start process during CZ, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is CZ1 (S71). If it is during CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 (S72), and ends the process during start during CZ.

  On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If it is during CZ2 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a process during CZ1 (CZ2), which will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 (S74), and ends the process during start during CZ. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in ranks (modes or points) having different degrees of expectation for winning an ART lottery, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one process in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the process in CZ3 described later with reference to FIG. 56 (S75), and ends the process at the start in CZ.

<Medium treatment in CZ1 (CZ2)>
Next, processing in CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the middle process of CZ1 (CZ2), first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). If it is the first half (YES), the main CPU 31 moves the process to S82, and if it is not the first half (is the second half) (NO), the main CPU 31 moves the process to S91 of FIG.

  If it is the first half of CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 mode-up lottery table (FIG. 27) and performs mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the point lottery table during CZ2 (FIG. 28) and performs point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or point) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the game is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). When freeze occurs, “ART level 2” is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

  On the other hand, if the freezing is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (first half) by 1 (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 to the next game (S89) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

  Subsequently, referring to FIG. 55, when it is the second half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the second half (S91). If it is the first game of the second half, the ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIGS. 29A and 29B) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

  When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and lots the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94 or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets “4” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning the ART lottery, and “3” in the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning the ART lottery. "Is set.

  Following the processing of S95, or when it is not one game in the second half in S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ ART lottery table (FIG. 29C) and plays an internal winning combination. Based on the ART lottery (S96), it is determined whether or not the ART lottery is won (S97). When the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). And set (S98).

  Subsequent to the processing of S98 or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 decrements the CZ game number counter (second half) by 1 (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). When the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ1 (CZ2) process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the ART set number is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends processing in CZ1 (CZ2). . On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ failure time (S103) and ends the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

<Processing during CZ3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the process in CZ3 will be described. In the process during CZ3, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the ART lottery table during CZ (FIG. 30D), performs an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and has won this ART lottery? It is determined whether or not (S122).

  If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 then adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freezing is won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the game is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the game (S125).

  Following the processing of S125 or when freezing is not won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to extract the ART level by referring to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 processing.

  On the other hand, when the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). When the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the CZ3 in-process.

  On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the ART set number, and also determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33A). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress to the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 processing.

<Normal start processing during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the start processing during normal ART will be described. In the normal ART start process, first, the main CPU 31 increments the ART continuing game number counter by 1 (S141). The ART continued game number counter is a counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART has continued. In this embodiment, in addition to the ART continuing game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that the normal ART can continue is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuing game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, finish.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 35), performs CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). When the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the CT set number and sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S144), and then the type of the type won for the next game. CT is set (S145).

  Following the processing of S145 or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 33 (B)), and continues the ART continued game number counter. Based on this value, the ART level is determined and set (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 34), and lots and sets the destination CT lottery state based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S147). .

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal ART extra lottery table (FIG. 36), performs an extra lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the extra lottery is won. Determination is made (S149). When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

  Subsequent to the processing of S150 or when the extra lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to reach the value of the ART end game number counter in the ART continuing game number counter. It is determined whether or not (S151). When the value of the ART continuing game number counter has not reached the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the normal start processing during ART.

  On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuing game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then determines the ART end time. It is set (S153) and the processing at the start during normal ART is terminated.

<Processing during CT start>
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the start time process during CT will be described. In the start process during CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the extra lottery table during CT (FIG. 40), and performs an extra lottery on the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161). It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). Note that, as described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the additional amount per time increases as the number of times the winning combination “triple chili lip” is won during the same CT.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a combination “three consecutive chips” (that is, whether or not it has been converted into a “three consecutive chips” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 51) (S164). ). If the internal winning combination is a “triple chililip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets the CT game number counter to 8 (S165), and the CT start process ends. On the other hand, when the internal winning combination is not the “three-time chilelip” (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start-time processing during CT.

  If the winning lottery is not won in S162 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the set number adding lottery table during CT (FIG. 41), and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won for this number of CT sets (S167). If it is determined that the number of CT sets has been added and lottery is selected (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the start-up process during CT.

  On the other hand, if the number of CT sets has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and then, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter Whether or not becomes 0 is determined (S170). When the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start time process during CT.

  When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). If the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and the CT start process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets normal ART to the next game (S174), and ends the start time processing during CT.

<Process during start during BB>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the processing at the start during BB will be described. In the BB start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus ART game number extra lottery table (FIG. 44) and performs an extra lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the extra lottery is won (S182). If the winning lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the start-time processing during BB.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the start processing during BB. On the other hand, if the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185), and ends the processing at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to a rotation stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires a rotation stop number based on an internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the spinning cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each piece of information based on the spinning cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various types of information associated with the number for stopping the spinning, such as determination data for each pressing order.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of all symbol code storage areas (excluding unused areas) to “1”. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operating counter is used to determine the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Next, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the reel stop control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. When the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 selects a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 5) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type and order of the pressed stop button. The order of the stop operation (push order) is managed.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

  Next, the main CPU 31 executes a sliding piece number determination process (S206). In this sliding piece number determination process, the number of sliding pieces defined at the stop start position is determined based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the turning stop initial setting table. It is processing.

  Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 33. Generation processing is executed (S167). The reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the sliding piece number determination data, and stores it in the main RAM 33 (S208). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as a search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes a symbol code storing process (S210). In the symbol code storage process, a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel is acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used to stop the reel is updated when the control stop process is in a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S213). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

  When determining that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when determining that the pressed stop button has been released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

  Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, when it is determined that the stop button non-operating counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this drawing priority order storing process, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check processing>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. In the BB check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in a bonus state (S221). If the bonus state is in effect (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently receives a winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 49). In step S222, the payout number of medals paid out in step S222 is subtracted.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout number counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 continues to A bonus end process is performed (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 gaming state flag to ON.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus end CT lottery table (FIG. 45) to perform a CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery is won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets and 1 is also added to the number of ART sets in S227.

  Subsequent to the process of S227 or when the CT lottery is not won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more ( S228). If the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets the next game to be ready for ART (S229), and performs the BB check process. finish.

  On the other hand, if neither the ART set number nor the CT set number is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state to the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal middle / high probability lottery table (FIG. 25B), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S231), and ends the BB check process.

  If the bonus state is not set in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether a BB symbol combination (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). When the BB symbol combination is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

  On the other hand, when the combination of symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 43) and lots and sets the bonus type (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs a bonus start process (S235), and ends the BB check process. In the bonus start process, the main CPU 31 performs various processes such as starting a bonus operation and setting a bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is in the RT5 gaming state (S241). When in the RT5 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while when not in the RT5 gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 continues to be in the RT0 gaming state. It is determined whether or not (S242).

  When the game is in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S243). When “bell spilled eyes” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to ON, the RT0 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). If it is in the RT1 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a symbol combination of “bell spilled eyes” is displayed (S246). When “bell spilling” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 gaming state flag on and also turns the RT1 gaming state flag off, and shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if “bell spill” is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether 20 games have elapsed in the RT1 gaming state (S248). If 20 games have not elapsed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, whereas if 20 games have elapsed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 gaming state flag and RT1. The gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state (S249), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When it is in the RT2 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the symbol combination “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (S251). When “RT3 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “RT3 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT3 gaming state flag is set on and the RT2 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (S252), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the game is in the RT3 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not a symbol combination of “bell spill” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (S262). When “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and turns off the RT3 gaming state flag, and from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. The state is shifted to (S263), and the RT check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither “Bell Spilled Eye” nor “RT2 Transition Lip” is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not a combination of symbols “RT4 Transition Lip” is displayed. (S264). When “RT4 transition lip” is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when “RT4 transition lip” is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 Subsequently, the RT4 gaming state flag is set to ON and the RT3 gaming state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state (S265).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART preparation is set (S266). When the ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the RT check process, while when the ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 determines the number of CT sets. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

  When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, if the CT set number is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets the normal ART in the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state in S261 (NO), since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays the symbol combination of “Bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip”. It is determined whether or not (S270). When neither “bell spilling eyes” nor “RT2 transition lip” is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while “bell spilling eyes” or “RT2 transition lip” is displayed. If displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 gaming state flag to ON and also turns the RT4 gaming state flag off to shift from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<CZ / ART end processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the CZ / ART termination process will be described. In the CZ / ART end process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is a CZ failure time or ART end time (S281). If it is neither CZ failure nor ART termination (NO), the main CPU 31 terminates the CZ / ART termination processing, while if CZ failure or ART termination (YES), Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 26B), performs a CZ pull-back lottery (S282), and determines whether or not this pull-back lottery has been won (S283).

  When the winning lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the type of CZ won for the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the type of CZ won to the CZ game number counter. In step S285, the CZ / ART termination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal gaming state in the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the normal medium / high probability lottery table (FIG. 25B), lotteries the CZ lottery state, sets it (S287), and ends the CZ / ART termination process.

[Description of sub-control board operation]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 using a program will be described.

<Sub navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the processing of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not navigation data is included in the received start command data.

  When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). Referring to FIG. 48, for example, when navigation data “4” is acquired, sub CPU 81 sets navigation data for informing the push order “left, middle, right” as sub navigation data. To do. Thereby, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

  On the other hand, when the navigation data is not acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of the stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to navigate, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. .

  When it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets sub side navigation data corresponding to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub side navigation control processing. For example, the sub-CPU 81 displays navigation data for displaying a combination of symbols of “triple chili lip” when the winning combination “F_Challenging Lip” is determined as the internal winning combination and winning the flag conversion lottery. (For example, navigation data that targets the Chile symbol by pushing forward) is set, and if the combination “F_Challenging Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of “Replay” Navi data for displaying the combination (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than the normal pressing) is set. Thereby, even if it is a case where the content of stop operation is not alert | reported by the main side, the content of stop operation can be alert | reported independently by the sub side.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is received on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is received on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been received. To do.

  When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets a player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen 201 is controlled.

  On the other hand, if the registration operation has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a registration deletion operation has been received (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that a registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation has not been accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

  On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in a situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes the first sub display incapable of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. The display screen of the apparatus 201 is controlled.

<History management processing>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 obtains a game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning action command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination) Whether or not a role has been won can be ascertained. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition state of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from the various command data, the sub CPU 81, for example, includes various information such as the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (the number of games), the number of CZs, the number of successful CZs, Can manage game history.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 99. In addition, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and control similar to the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment. Moreover, the characteristics of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
A control system provided in the pachislo machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub-control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. The pachislot machine 1 includes a reel relay terminal plate 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay substrate 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes an external concentration terminal board 73, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442 connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 440.
In addition, since the structure of the external concentration terminal board 73 and the hopper apparatus 40 was mentioned above, those description is abbreviate | omitted here.

  The reel relay terminal plate 410 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to the stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, and a ratio indicator 422 and a changeover switch 423 connected to the ratio display board 421. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio indicator 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and details of various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting any one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the amount of profit given to the player, or set in the pachislot machine 1 It is used when checking the set value. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

  The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71, the external concentration terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachislot machine 1.

  The power supply device 450 includes a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The pachislot machine 1 includes a door relay terminal plate 460 and a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460. , A start switch 6S, a stop switch board 463, a game operation display board 470, and a sub-relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub relay board 75 have been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The stop switch substrate 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch board 463 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 7L, 7C, 7R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14 and is inserted when the insertion of medals is accepted, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when replaying is performed. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals on the information display 14. The game operation display board 470 is connected to an LED group 471. The LED group 471 is, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a replay based on a signal input from the game operation display board 470. Lights up.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub relay board 75. The pachislot machine 1 includes speakers 9L and 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 75.

  The pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge substrate 82 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 480 connected to the sub-control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 82 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 480 are housed in the sub control board case together with the sub control board 72.

  The ROM cartridge substrate 82 is a substrate for managing production image (video), sound, light and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 480 is a substrate that relays connection wiring between the sub control substrate 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration of the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. FIG. 70 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 70A, the main control circuit is mainly configured by the microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 includes a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32 and a main RAM 33.

  The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. The main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

  The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 31 is connected with a clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36 and a sampling circuit 37. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio display>
Next, the configuration of the ratio display 422 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above with reference to FIG. 69, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the ratio display 422 for displaying various ratios. 71A shows an example of attachment of the ratio display 422, and FIG. 71B shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 71, the ratio indicator 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 71 (B), the upper two digits indicate the type of ratio to be displayed, and the lower two digits. Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio display 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachislot machine 1 because it is used when an administrator (a shop clerk or the like) checks the pachislot machine 1 for unauthorized modification. At this time, in order to prevent fraud with respect to the ratio indicator 422 itself, the ratio indicator 422 is preferably provided inside the main control board case covering the main control board 71.

  As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 71 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and also shown in FIG. 71 (A-2). Thus, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. Also, as shown in FIG. The LED unit may be attached by connecting to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 71A, it is preferable to be provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Normally, a seal seal is affixed to the main control board case, but when the ratio indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the visibility of the ratio indicator 422 may be impaired by the seal sticker. It is preferable to apply a seal seal so that there is no such problem. Further, a caulking recording sticker is also attached to the main control board case. The seal for caulking record is a seal in which a person in charge of opening the caulking record and a date entry column, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used in manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a two-dimensional code seal used at the time of manufacture may be affixed to the main control board case. It is preferable to make the arrangement such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by such a sticking member such as a seal.
The front door (the upper door 62a or the lower door) may also be used by a caulking member or a harness assembled to the main control board, another board in a case where a plurality of boards are arranged in a superimposed manner, or other members in the housing. The door 62b) is preferably designed so that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, thereby improving the efficiency of the administrator's confirmation work of the ratio indicator.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 71 (B), the ratio display unit 422 includes a cumulative specific section ratio, a continuous actor ratio and an actor ratio between the latest 6000 games, and a cumulative consecutive actor ratio and an actor ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, “AU” is displayed in the upper two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, and the consecutive character ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed. In the upper 2 digits, “= r” is displayed, and when the proportion of the last 6000 games is displayed, “= b” is displayed in the upper 2 digits, and the cumulative consecutive proportion is displayed. In this case, “Ar” is displayed in the upper two digits, and “Ab” is displayed in the upper two digits when displaying the cumulative proportion of features. In the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage.

  Here, the “specific section ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of games in a gaming state advantageous to the player to the number of games in all gaming states (that is, the total number of games). In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, a CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state in addition to the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state (see FIG. 7). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games indicating the number of games in all game states and the specific number of games indicating the number of games in a game state advantageous to the player in a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. The specific section ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

  In addition, “Consecutive character ratio” refers to the first type special character or the first type special character with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). This is the ratio of the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operating device.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display a total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of payouts in the first specific game indicating the total number of medals paid out during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to the above is counted, and the continuous character ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts in the first specified game / total number of payouts × 100

  In addition, the “role ratio” refers to the total number of medals paid out during operation of any of the bonuses relative to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (that is, the total payout number). This is the ratio of occupancy. In addition, with any one kind of special feature, the first type special feature, the special feature continuous action device related to the first special feature, the second type special feature, the second type special feature continuous action A device or a regular object. Also, during the ART gaming state or CZ, since it is an advantageous state for the player, it may be included in the state in which any of the objects is operating.

The main control board 71 uses a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33 to display the total payout number indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states, and the medals paid out during the operation of any combination. The number of payouts in the second specific game indicating the total number is counted in advance, and the bonus rate is calculated by the following formula.
Ratio of bonuses = number of payouts in second specified game / total payout number x 100

  Further, “cumulative” refers to the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and “between the latest 6000 games” refers to the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of “cumulative”, the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting results counted over the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of “last 6000 games” The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

  Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured such that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased by power interruption. Specifically, the data is saved in a backup area provided in the main RAM 33 when power is cut off, and the data is read from the backup area and reset when the data is restored. As a result, even when a general operation is performed in which the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be accumulated continuously from the time of installation.

  In addition, the replay right associated with the replay winning can be considered as paying out medals equal to the number of medals used in the game, or can be considered as paying out 0 medals. In the calculation of the ratio described above, the calculation results may differ between calculation method A in which the replay right is considered as a medal payout and calculation method B in which the replay right is not considered as a medal payout. For example, in the calculation of the ratio with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (total number of payouts) such as the ratio of consecutive characters and the rate of bonuses, a calculation method A that considers the right of replaying as the medals are paid out. Then, the total number of payouts is increased by the number of times that the replay is won, and as a result, the ratio is lowered. On the other hand, in the calculation method B in which the replay right is not considered as a medal payout, the replay winning does not affect the total payout number, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Such a separation between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of replay wins increases, and thus increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, the ratio display 422 may display the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier for displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier for displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, when there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both simultaneously.
In addition, on the setting screen that can be displayed by the store manager (so-called hall menu), when displaying the consecutive character ratio and the character ratio, it is possible to display the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods. Good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
In the ratio display 422, various ratios calculated by the main control board 71 are switched and displayed. The method for switching the content displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be switched automatically at a predetermined interval, and according to the operation of the switch 423 (see FIG. 69). Various ratios may be switched manually, or various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of ratio display (when error))
In pachislot machines, rules are made in the industry so as not to increase the gambling ability. For example, the ratio of the gaming state advantageous to the player to all the games does not become too high, In order to be able to play with peace of mind in the normal gaming state, not only during the advantageous gaming state but also in the normal gaming state, the medal is paid out more than a predetermined amount, thereby lowering the normal base (so-called coin holding) There are regulations such as not to be too much. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 make it possible to confirm whether these regulations are satisfied. Although the regulation limit value may be temporarily exceeded due to accidental continuous bonus formation, etc., from a statistical point of view, as the number of games increases, the percentage value shown on the display is in line with the regulation. It converges in a way that approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 times, and a value deviating from the design value is displayed, it can be inferred that an illegal act has been performed. In addition, when a value that greatly deviates from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that an illegal act has been performed on the specific table, such as hanging an illegal board. As described above, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to identify an illegal act.

  Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio indicator 422 exceed the specified value, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-described various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or greater than a specified value set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio display 422 is different depending on whether the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display unit 422 displays the ratio in a blinking manner when it is equal to or greater than a specified value, and displays the ratio in a lighting state when it is less than the specified value. Thereby, the administrator can grasp at a glance whether or not various ratios satisfy the specified value.

  In addition, when there is a ratio that is greater than or equal to the specified value, it may be notified to the external device (for example, hall computer) (for example, notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, the main control board 71 notifies the external device via the external concentration terminal board 73 when the calculated ratio includes a ratio equal to or higher than a specified value. In addition, when there is a limit to the output pins from the external concentrated terminal board 73, it is assumed that notification (that is, error output) is made to the external device using the output pin currently used as the error output. Also good.

  It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is fraudulent. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality that is highly suspected of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormalities, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormalities, internal voltage abnormalities, and roles that have not been won. When a winning abnormality that a symbol related to is displayed on the active line is detected, or when a payout at a timing when the payout cannot be performed is detected, the set value indicates a value other than six levels. Also, abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, hopper empty where the medal of the hopper device 40 bottoms out, detection of a clogged medal at the payout port of the hopper device 40, medal overflow that causes the medal auxiliary storage to become full, medal Doors when the hall clerk opened the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) by replenishing medals when detecting a clogged medal or medal backflow at the time of insertion, or detecting an abnormal number of medals such as 4 For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected during an opening error or a medal replenishment.

  In this way, when a ratio that is equal to or greater than the specified value exists, the administrator performs a predetermined notification to the external device, so that the administrator does not see the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60, Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachislot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, the display modes of various ratios may be changed. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated. For example, the cumulative ratio is displayed in a different manner (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches “17500”, and after the total number of games reaches “17500” While displaying in the normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the most recent 6000 games is displayed in a different mode until the total number of games reaches “6000”, and the total number of games is After reaching “6000 times”, it may be displayed in a normal manner.

  Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if various ratios are equal to or greater than a specified value. Also in this case, the predetermined number of times may be varied depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have a ratio display, in the example of attachment of the ratio display shown in FIG. Therefore, an indicator provided in an existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio indicator that displays various ratios. Specifically, in an existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of stored medals (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (the number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the type of ratio displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) for displaying the number of credits is displayed, and the display unit (described later) for displaying the number of payouts. The display of the indicator may be switched so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

  The special operation is arbitrary, but is preferably an operation using a switch provided in the housing 60. Thereby, it can prevent that a player will perform special operation accidentally.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the configuration of the information display 14 including an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information by the main control board 71 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 72, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, And a limit lamp 148.

  When the insert lamp 141 is lit (or flashes (hereinafter omitted)), the player can be informed that a medal can be inserted, and when the start lamp 142 is lit, the game is accompanied by the operation of the start lever 6. The replay lamp 143 is lit to inform the player that a medal has been automatically inserted by the re-game operation. The bet number lamp 144 is lit to inform the player of the number of medals bet, and the credit lamp 145 is lit to indicate the number of medals (credits) stored in the pachislot machine 1. The payout number lamp 146 is lit to notify the player of the number of medals paid out according to the game result (the number of payouts).

The instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified, so that the necessary stop operation information can be reported to the player. In addition, the status indicator 147b is lit to inform the player that the current gaming state is a gaming state (for example, an ART gaming state) that notifies the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode. .
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. It is good also as notifying the information of stop operation using.

The limit lamp 148 is turned on when a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time. If a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that gambling will be jealous. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, when a gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 is turned on when the ART gaming state is ended by this limit processing, and can inform the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may be blinked when the limit processing is almost activated, and may be turned on when the limit processing is actually performed.
Details of the limit processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80.

  The insert lamp 141 to the limit lamp 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by an LED (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LEDs, so that various information regarding the game can be reported to the player.

<Status indicator>
Next, the status indicator 147b provided in the information indicator 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of lighting timing of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 73, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. At the time of operation, timing T5 is at the time of the third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is at the time of all reels of the game being stopped, timing T7 is at the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game It's time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 73, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), a lottery for shifting to a specific section (for example, an ART gaming state) is won. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when winning the lottery for shifting to a specific section, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in the lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game won for the transition lottery to the specific section (timing T1). In the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the lottery for the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on at the first stop operation (timing T3) of the played game, and in the lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is displayed when all the reels of the game won the lottery for the transition to the specific section are stopped (timing T6). 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game won in the lottery for shifting to the specific section (timing T7).

  Note that the lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 73 is merely an example, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b may be turned on during the game in which a lottery for shifting to a specific section is won. Is optional.

  In this way, by turning on the status indicator 147b during the game winning the lottery for the specific section, the player can grasp that the lottery for the specific section is won. It can be expected and is suitable.

(Improved notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence / absence of winning is simply announced by turning on / off one lamp, the presence / absence of winning is immediately known, but the player should feel that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk that interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like may be lost. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific section is won is reported during the game without becoming monotonous by the following method.

(Device 1 for status indicator)
72B and 72C show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72B has a plurality of lamps “a” to “i” that are lit, blinking, and extinguished. Based on the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing patterns of these lamps. , I can report that I am winning the lottery for the specific section.

  As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, “a”, “c”, “d”, “h”, “i” are lit), When not winning, a plurality of lamps are lit in a pattern other than this specific pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to make a deeper notification than when a single lamp simply lights up, for example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is learned, the detection of the winning becomes faster Can be realized.

  Note that the presence / absence of winning the lottery may be reported based on the number of lamps that are lit, not based on the lighting pattern. For example, when winning the transition lottery, a specific number of lamps among a plurality of lamps are turned on, and when not winning the transition lottery, a number other than the specific number of the plurality of lamps The lamp may be lit. Also, for example, when a lottery is won for the transition lottery, a certain number of lamps (or less than a specific number) among a plurality of lamps are turned on, and when a lottery is not won for the lottery It is also possible to turn on a number of lamps less than a specific number (or more than a specific number).

  In addition, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to produce an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for reporting that the lottery is won is “all lamps are lit”, the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that are turned on in accordance with, for example, when all reels are stopped, it is possible to indicate the expected degree of winning the transition lottery as the game progresses.

(Device 2 for status indicator)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72C is similar to the status indicator 147b in FIG. 72B in that each has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off. The status indicator 147b is not meaningful for a plurality of lamps as a whole, whereas the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C) is different in that it is meaningful as a whole. That is, in the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 72 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name used as the motif of the pachislot machine 1 or the manufacturer, the shape of the character, etc. Characters and shapes that you want to impress players are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly stored for the player, leading to an improvement in brand power.

  Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not the transition lottery is won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps as the game progresses Thus, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the expected degree of winning of the transfer lottery.

  Note that, depending on the pachislot machine, there may be a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as the specific section, and the transition may be made to any specific section based on the result of the transfer lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART gaming state and CZ, a pachislot machine that transitions the gaming state to the ART gaming state or CZ based on the result of the transfer lottery, or the ART gaming state and the initial game with 50 initial games A pachislot machine or the like that has an ART gaming state of 100 games and shifts the gaming state to the ART gaming state of the initial number of games determined in accordance with the transition lottery can be considered.

  Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-described devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off with different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. It is also possible to make it. As an example, if the initial number of games wins the ART gaming state of 50 games, the status indicator 147b is lit with the first lighting pattern, and if the initial number of games wins the ART gaming state of 100 games The status indicator 147b may be lit with a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

  Thereby, since a lighting pattern changes according to the kind of specific area, the variation of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b can be increased. For the player, since the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the contents of each lighting pattern, so that interest in other effects in the liquid crystal display device or the like is not lost.

  Conversely, a plurality of lamps (status indicators 147b) may be turned on or off with the same combination pattern regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transfer lottery. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the specific section won, the type of the specific section won cannot be determined from the lighting pattern. Some skilled players have memorized lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous to the player (for example, a long ART gaming state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not very advantageous to the player (for example, an ART gaming state that ends in one game). By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the specific section that has been won.

  Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the lumbar panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with a large number of beginners, such as low rental ball stores, without displaying the contents of the lighting pattern on the lumbar panel 25 of a design that is generally introduced. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Moreover, you may enable it to order the waist panel 25 which the purchase store side wishes based on a customer's layer from a manufacturer. This makes it possible to report or not report the contents of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the amusement store.

  Changing the design of the lumbar panel 25 does not require testing by a testing institution, and the burden of manufacturing / development costs is not large, so a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply replacing the panel according to the market environment. Can be preferred. Instead of changing the design of the waist panel 25 itself, it is possible to switch whether the contents of the lighting pattern can be reported or not by using a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaced. Moreover, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as the player can recognize it during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Device 3 for status indicator)
Further, in order to avoid the presence or absence of the winning depending on whether one lamp is lit or not, the status indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The position that is difficult to visually recognize may be an arbitrary place such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, the back of the medal slot 22, and the like. Further, the status indicator 147b is covered with an opaque cover, and the status indicator 147b is made visible only from a hole (a peep hole) formed in the cover, thereby making the status indicator 147b difficult to see. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a parking lot use service ticket clip may be provided in the pachislot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Device 4 for status indicator)
In addition, when the status indicator 147b for reporting whether or not the lottery is shifted to a specific section is at the same position, it is easy to understand if only the location is seen. Therefore, the position of the status indicator 147b may be switched. Good. As a specific method, it is conceivable that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachislot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and lamps that report whether or not the transfer lottery is different each time. It is done. As a result, for example, the lamp in the upper right part performs the function of the status indicator 147b at a certain timing, but the lamp in the lower left part performs the function of the status indicator 147b at another timing. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success / failure of the transfer lottery only from the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from game play)
Next, with reference to FIG. 74, a description will be given of the device from the gaming aspect regarding the method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for shifting to a specific section is won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” are provided as pushing orders, and nine medals are paid out when the pushing order is correct. A combination of symbols is displayed), and when the answer is incorrect, the medals are paid out or 0 medals (the bell combination or the combination of the first symbol is displayed). In the ART gaming state, when the push winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order corresponding to the push winning combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART gaming state, by playing the game according to the notification, more medals (for example, 9) than the medals used for the game (for example, 3) are paid out.

As a device from the gaming aspect, first of all, a push order combination is provided in which medals equal to or less than the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 74, as shown in FIG. 74A, push order combinations of “F_3 choice 1 piece combination_1st”, “F_3 choice 1 piece combination_2nd”, and “F_3 choice 1 piece combination_3rd” are provided. For “F_3 choice 1 combination 1st” to “F_3 selection 1 combination 3rd”, when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the first combination of symbols is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the pressing order is invalid. When the answer is correct, a combination of out-of-order symbols is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order does not have to increase the number of medals even at the correct push order, and the number of medals equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game at the correct push order (third quantity) is paid out. Thus, it is sufficient that the number of medals smaller than the number (third quantity) (fourth quantity) is paid out or the medals are not paid out (that is, zero) when the push order is incorrect.

  Further, in terms of game play, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all the push order combinations (“F_3 option 1 player_st” to “F_3 option 1 player_3rd” and “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd”) are determined as internal winning combinations. The ART game state that informs the correct push order when it is played, and the correct answer when "F_3 choice 1 piece combination 1st" to "F_3 choice 1 piece combination 3rd" is determined as an internal winning combination The push order is notified, and when “F_3 choice bell_1st” to “F_3 choice bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-player role ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

  Then, in terms of gaming, the status indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the gaming state is the ART gaming state or the single-player ART gaming state. Note that the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b may be different between the ART gaming state and the single-player ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

  By such a device, it is possible to report that the current game state is a game state in which the push order is notified by the state display 147b, but it is truly advantageous for the player only from the state display 147b. It can be made impossible to grasp whether the game is in the ART game state or the single-player ART game state.

  Note that the transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous to the player is performed by winning the lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-player ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous to the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all games other than the ART game state are set to the single-player ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), in the eleventh game, since the winning lottery for the specific section (that is, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state) is won, the eleventh and subsequent games are played. Is in an ART gaming state. During this ART gaming state, a 3 option 1 player ("F_3 option 1 player_1st" to "F_3 option 1 player_3rd") and an option 3 ("F_3 option bell_1st" to "F_3 option bell_3rd") Regardless of which is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (B), all the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state are set to the single-player ART game state. In the single-player ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-player combination is determined as the internal winning combination (the first game), the correct push order is notified while the three-selective bell is in the internal winning combination. In a game determined as a combination (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

  As described above, when all games other than the ART gaming state are set to the single-player ART gaming state, the status indicator 147b should always be lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the winning lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

  In the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), among games other than the ART game state, only a game in which the three-choice one-player combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-player ART game state, and the other games are used. , It is in a state (normal) that is neither the ART gaming state nor the single-player ART gaming state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), in the eleventh game, since the winning lottery for the specific section (that is, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state) is won, the eleventh and subsequent games are played. Is in an ART gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 74 (C), only the game in which the three-choice one-piece combination is determined as the internal winning combination among the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state is a one-piece combination ART. The game state is set, and other games are set to the normal game state. Specifically, in the first game, the three-choice one-player combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, the gaming state of the first game is set to the one-player ART game state, and the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-piece combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal gaming state and the correct push order is not notified.

  As described above, even if only the game in which the three-choice one-piece combination of the games other than the ART gaming state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-player role ART gaming state, the status indicator 147b has three choices. In a game in which a single winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the player turns on regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is won, so the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to grasp that winning the transition lottery alone. Also, even if it is a single-player ART game state, a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player will be notified, so if it is always in the single-player ART game state as shown in FIG. 74 (B), The notification game state in which the notification of the pressing order is performed continues for a long period of time, and there is a risk that the gambling of the game will be enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), only the game in which the three-choice one-player combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the one-player ART game state, so that the notification game The period of a state can be limited and it can prevent that gambling nature increases suddenly.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, a basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a game state transition flow regarding presence / absence of notification in the pachislot machine 1. In FIG. 75, only the gaming state relating to the presence / absence of the notification is shown, and the transition flow of the gaming state relating to the presence / absence of the bonus operation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that reports the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section refers to, for example, the general game in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 7).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is made by winning the lottery for transition to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the lottery transition to the CZ and the lottery transition to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on information that has no difference in set values. “Information with no difference in set value” means that a combination (non-restricted combination) determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all the set values in the internal lottery process, or all set values when all reels are stopped It includes at least a combination of symbols to be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols having no set difference).

  That is, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a set unquestioned combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery transition to a specific section is performed, and a combination having a setting difference (set differential combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. In the event of a failure, the lottery for the specific section is not performed. Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols with no set difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed and a combination of symbols with a set difference is displayed. In this case, the lottery for the specific section is not performed.

  Further, the lottery for the transition to the specific section is performed based on a complete probability that is determined in advance and does not vary at all. The “predetermined complete probability that does not vary” means a probability that does not vary based on at least the set value (that is, a probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

  In this way, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the transition lottery performed based on the “information having no difference in the set value” is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each setting value, and the difference in the performance of the ball can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference having a setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transfer lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for lottery transfer to a specific section is shown in FIG. FIG. 77 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining an internal winning combination, and FIG. 77 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing transfer lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

  As in the example shown in FIG. 77A, the internal lottery table defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a set difference with a different lottery value depending on a set value and a set unquestioned combination with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 77 (A), the winning combinations “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance Lip A”, etc. are set differences with different lottery values depending on the setting values, and the winning combinations “F_Sabo 1”, “F_Chilli Lip”, “F_BB1 + F_Reach Eye Lip” “, Etc.” are setting unquestioned roles having the same lottery value regardless of the setting value. The pachislot machine 1 does not perform lottery transition to the specific section when the set winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and performs the lottery transition to the specific section when the unquestioned set bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. be able to. Note that not performing the lottery transfer to the specific section includes not only performing the transfer lottery itself, but also necessarily performing the lottery but not winning. In addition, transition lottery to a specific section is not necessarily performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as an internal winning combination. It is good also as providing a combination.

  Subsequently, as in the example shown in FIG. 77 (B), the transition lottery table defines lottery value information regarding the lottery result of the transition lottery for each set unquestioned combination determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, the lottery transfer to the specific section is performed based on a complete probability that is determined in advance and does not vary at all. Therefore, the lottery value information defined in the transfer lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. Value.

  In addition, it is good also as including that it is the probability uniquely defined with respect to "information without a difference in a setting value" as "the predetermined complete probability which does not change at all". In recent pachislot machines, a state where it is easy to win the transition lottery and a state where it is difficult to win may be provided. In such a case, when a transition lottery is performed with a “probability uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values”, for example, in any game state at the time of winning a setting unquestioned role A transfer lottery will be performed with the same probability. On the other hand, when a transfer lottery is performed with a “probability that is not uniquely determined for information that does not have a difference in setting values (that is, a probability that fluctuates)”, for example, Transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state In this case, a transition lottery that wins with a low probability is performed.

(Realization method of CZ when performing transfer lottery with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, in the case where the transition lottery is performed with such a uniquely determined probability, the transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed in any gaming state, and therefore, as in CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state where it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to devise. Subsequently, an example of a method of realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 78A shows an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, the correct push order of the push order with no setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination during CZ is notified, and the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state is determined at the time of the push forward win with no set difference. It will be performed based on the combination of the displayed symbols. Specifically, as shown in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 When the combination of symbols in the display is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is not performed.

  When comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of pushing forward is the same, but since the correct pushing order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. In contrast, during CZ, the correct push order is notified, and therefore a combination of symbols to be subjected to transition lottery is easily displayed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance of easy transition to the ART gaming state) Zone).

  FIG. 78 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the combination (replay) related to the replay can be changed by shifting the RT gaming state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the combinations (replays) related to replaying different in the RT gaming state, the ART game is different between one RT gaming state and another RT gaming state. The frequency of lottery transition to the state can be varied.

  Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the combination “F_Chilelip” is a setting unquestioned combination with no setting difference. Like the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), this combination When “F_Chilelip” is determined as an internal winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 78 (B), the winning combination “F_Chilelip” has a difference in setting depending on the RT gaming state, but the RT2 gaming state is more than the RT1 gaming state. It is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability.

  Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of transition lottery is increased compared to the RT1 gaming state, and even if the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ is likely to transition to the ART gaming state. (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as CZ.

(Another example of a method for realizing CZ when a transfer lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Next, FIG. 78C is a diagram illustrating another example of a method for realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 78 (C), CZ is realized using MB (an accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory). The pachislot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter referred to as “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) as the features that are also drawn in the MB, and the MB end condition is (A) (B) SB is established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination or winning), (C) RB is established during MB (determined as internal winning combination, One of the three conditions of winning a prize) is satisfied. Then, the pachislot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the end of MB according to the satisfied end condition. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of the RB, the state shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, the MB enters the ART gaming state after the MB ends. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the RB is established before receiving the MB end (so-called puncture) due to the establishment of the SB or the payout of the prescribed number of medals, the transition to the ART gaming state is made. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control in MB, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols with medals paid out even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination. The game in which there is a game and the game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination may be the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to enter the ART gaming state assuming that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 78 (C), (1) when an MB is won in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is CZ. Then, (2) when a medal exceeding the prescribed number is paid out in the MB, or when SB is established, the MB which is CZ is ended, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) When RB is determined as an internal winning combination during MB, MB which is CZ is terminated, and the gaming state shifts between RB flags. (4) When an RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to RB. After that, (5) When the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at a high RT generated when the RB ends. . Note that when an RB wins in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game after the MB ends without passing through between the RB flags.

In such a pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (which functions as CZ) in the normal section and the winning probability of RB (which triggers the transition to the ART gaming state) in the MB are common to all the set values. However, the winning probability of the SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in the MB may be a common probability for all the set values, or may be a different probability depending on the set value. For example, in the case where the winning probability of SB in MB is made different according to the set value, the higher the setting is, the lower the winning probability of SB is, and the longer the MB is, the easier it is to continue the ART gaming state in CZ (MB). It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the transition to, and to enrich the variation of the ball appearance specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of the RB that becomes a trigger for the transition to the ART gaming state can be arbitrarily set depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but the game balance is better if the probability that the winning can be actually expected is set. Therefore, it is preferable that the prescribed number is reduced to a small number such as 10 to 30, and RB is determined as an internal winning combination in MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table are executed in the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, the lottery variation becomes monotonous when the transfer lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery. Therefore, a method for improving the main control board 71 will be described below.

  FIG. 70B is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 70B, the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication is possible by serial communication or the like. Note that the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as those shown in FIG.

  As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards. For example, internal lottery using an internal lottery table is performed on the first main control board 71a, and second main control boards are provided. By performing the transfer lottery using the transfer lottery table on the board 71b, the capacity of the storage means used for each lottery can be sufficiently secured, and lottery rich in variations can be performed.

  In FIG. 70B, the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a The configuration may be such that communication can be performed only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the second main control board 71b on the upstream side and the downstream side. By setting the communication in only one direction, the communication load can be reduced as compared to the case of bidirectional communication.

  In addition, when the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed on different boards (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transfer lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, after the transfer lottery is first performed on one substrate, the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate. Conversely, after the internal lottery is first performed on one substrate, the transfer lottery is performed on the other substrate. It is good as well. In this case, when the transfer lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transfer lottery. For example, such a configuration may be used in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination. As a result, even if an illegal act of illegally entering a winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is not affected, the result of the transition lottery will not be affected, so an illegal act of generating an advantageous result of the transition lottery Can be suppressed. Further, when the transfer lottery is performed first, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set value can be performed only by performing the lottery having no difference in the set value because the internal winning combination is not related.

  On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal lottery determined as the result of the internal lottery. It is good also as performing transfer lottery without referring to a combination. When performing a lottery transfer with reference to an internal winning combination, it is possible to perform a lottery based on information having no difference in setting values by performing a transition lottery based on the unquestioned setting as described above. In the case where the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference between the set values can be performed by performing the lottery without any difference between the set values.

  FIG. 70C is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since what is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM), in FIG. 70 (C), one main control board 71 as shown in the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, various tables used for internal lottery are stored in the first main ROM 32a, and various tables used for transition lottery are stored in the second main ROM 32b. A sufficient capacity can be secured, and lottery rich in variations can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 75, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section is made when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed during the specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section, the number of differences, and the like can be used. . The end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section. For example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

  As described above, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied. However, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, the end condition is not satisfied when the specific section continues for a long period of time. Then, the transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, The navigation continues without ending the specific section until navigation is performed, and transitions from the specific section to the normal section according to the number of times of navigation being performed (navigation assurance processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the limit process in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a counting method of the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a flow of limit processing in the specific section.
In a pachislot machine, if a specific section such as CZ or ART gaming state is continuously performed over a long period of time, the profit that the player gets during the specific section will increase, and the overall profit will be balanced Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profits that the player obtains during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. For this reason, in recent years, it has been required to keep the duration of a state advantageous to the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process that suppresses the duration of a specific section that is advantageous to the player to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(Counting the number of limit games)
First, a method for counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 79A, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuing games (the number of limit games) when the specific section continues. For example, when the ART gaming state continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuing games by one for each game. Further, for example, when the transition to the ART gaming state is made after the transition from the normal section to the CZ, since the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, the main control board 71 has the CZ continuation game. The sum of the number and the number of continuing games in the ART gaming state that are continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

  By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine that makes the RT gaming state different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after changing the RT gaming state. As a specific case, when winning a lottery for transition to a specific section, there is a case where a standby section is sandwiched when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and there is a bonus (object) in the specific section. When activated, a standby section may be sandwiched when returning to a specific section after the bonus ends.

  For such a waiting section, the main control board 71 may count as a limit game number or may not count. That is, the main control board 71 may count the number of games “A1” to “An” in FIG. 79B as the number of limit games or not count as the number of limit games. Good.

  In addition, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of the waiting section. For example, when winning a lottery for the transition to a specific section, the bonus is not counted as the number of limit games for the specific section sandwiched during the transition from the normal section to the specific section, and bonuses (acts) are activated during the specific section In this case, the waiting section sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the bonus ends may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When providing a waiting section for transitioning the RT gaming state, it is necessary to perform at least notification for transitioning the RT gaming state during the waiting section. There is no need to do it. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled pattern will change the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify the push order “push order bell” related to the increase / decrease in medals. When the combination of symbols of the bell-spilling is set to control that does not change the RT gaming state, the push order “push order bell” related to increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the standby section.

  Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as being in an advantageous state for the player for the waiting section for notifying the pushing order related to the increase / decrease of medals, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. It is good also as not counting as a limit game number about the waiting area which does not alert | report about an advance.

  In addition, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), when the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), a bonus flag is displayed during the specific section. There may be a gap between bonuses. The main control board 71 may count the number of games between the flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games, or may not count the games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of games “C1” to “Cn” in FIG. 79C and the number of games “D1” to “Dn” as the number of limit games. Alternatively, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

  In this case, the main control board 71 may count the game between the flags as the number of limit games, while the game in the bonus state may not count as the number of limit games. The games in the middle are not counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Also, both the game between the flags and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the limit game number, and conversely, both may not be counted as the limit game number.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games as the number of limit games, assuming that the flag is in an advantageous state for the player during the flag for informing about the pushing order related to increase / decrease of medals. The number of limit games may not be counted during the flag period during which no notification is given regarding the push order for increase / decrease.

  Further, the main control board 71 may vary whether or not to count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, there may be a case where it is possible to win a push forward combination (that is, a combination in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachislot machine, the player can obtain more profits by notifying the push forward during the bonus state. Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the number of games in the bonus state as the number of limit games and notifies the player in the bonus state, when notifying the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player in the bonus state. When the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the game in the bonus state may not be counted as the limit game number.

(Limit processing flow)
Next, the flow of limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 80 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the counting method described above reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let That is, when the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even when the number of games, the number of times of navigation, etc. still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). .

  Then, along with the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process that initializes values of variables related to the occurrence of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is or may be initialized to RT0 which is in a low RT state. For example, in the RT gaming state for the ART gaming state, the RT gaming state that does not transition to the RT gaming state by a combination of symbols such as bell spills and falling replays, and ends when the prescribed number of games is consumed or a bonus is won In such a case, even if navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, a state advantageous to the player of high RT will continue, so it is desirable that the latter specification be a gaming state with a low replay probability. Especially in the RT gaming state where the specified number of games is a large value, such as 6000 games, which is substantially continued until the next bonus, the gambling can be appropriately suppressed by dropping the RT gaming state by the limit processing. it can.

  When performing the limit processing in this way, the main control board 71 continues to light the status indicator 147b until the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section is ended. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. In addition, when the specific section is ended by the limit process, the main control board 71 turns on the limit lamp 148 for a predetermined period thereafter. As the predetermined period, when the limit process is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game for which the limit process has been performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit process is almost activated, and inform the player that the limit process is almost activated.

  Here, for example, when a game in the bonus state is also counted as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number of games during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the main control board 71 may perform a limit process to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section even in the bonus state. Further, as shown in FIG. 80C, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing at the timing when the bonus ends without performing limit processing during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 80B, the gaming state has shifted from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the limit game number reaches a certain number of games. In the example shown in FIG. The gaming state is shifted from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state is ended, not at the timing when the number of games reaches the certain number of games.

  Of course, when the number of limit games is counted during the waiting period of a specific section or between bonus flags, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between flags. Then, the limit process may be performed even during the standby section or between the flags, and the timing at which the limit game number reaches the specific section after the limit game number reaches a certain number of games, or the number of limit games is After reaching a certain number of games, the limit process may be performed at a timing when a transition is made from a flag state to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is terminated by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating that to the external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving this signal output, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped conventionally.
When the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games during the bonus state, the main control board 71 sets the external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches the certain number of games (that is, during the bonus state). It is also possible to output a predetermined signal to the external device, and output a predetermined signal to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs the bonus state in the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number, a predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the end of the bonus state).

  In addition, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed when the limit processing is performed a number of times exceeding the number of times normally assumed in one pachislot machine 1. A signal (error signal) indicating that limit processing has been performed more times than expected may be output to an external device. Specifically, when the number of times that the number of limit games has reached a certain number of games within a specific period (that is, the number of times limit processing has been performed) reaches a predetermined number, Output a signal. As an example, when the limit process is performed a number of times exceeding the assumption between the time when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the main control board 71 also sends an error signal to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. Thereby, for example, when the limit process is performed 10 times during the day, such as 10 times, which is not normal, it is possible to grasp the fact on the hall side.

(Navi guarantee processing)
Subsequently, a navigation guarantee process in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the flow of the navigation guarantee process at the end of the specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end condition of a specific section according to the number of games, if the number of times that a role to be notified (for example, push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination in the specific section is small, There are few medals to be paid out and the player may feel lost. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment guarantees the minimum number of times of navigation when shifting to a specific section, and continues without ending the specific section until navigation for this guaranteed number of times is performed.

  In FIG. 81, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games. In FIGS. 81A to 81C, the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It shall be. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, when the end condition is satisfied), notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 81 (A), after that, in the 54th game, a role to be notified (for example, push order bell) is determined as an internal winning combination, and notification is given to the notification target role. The main control board 71 ends the specific section when the notification is performed for the guaranteed number of times along with this notification. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section when the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

  By the way, in the pachislot machine, as the push order, a plurality of types of push orders with different medal payout numbers at the time of the push order correct are provided, and the main control board 71 responds to these push orders during a specific section. The order of pushing correct answers may be reported. As a plurality of types of pushing orders, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the pushing order, medals do not increase (that is, the payout number is equal to or less than the inserted number), or the medal increase is very small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets 4) and a push order in which the number of medals increases (for example, the number of payouts at the time of 3 betting is 9) is considered. It should be noted that, in any push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the medal payout number is smaller than that in the correct answer in the push order or the medal payout number is 0 in common.

  From the player's point of view, the number of medals earned during a specific section does not increase even if a notification is given for the push order that does not increase or the increase is very small at the correct answer. The number of navigations does not need to be guaranteed during a specific section. On the other hand, the push order role in which the medals increase at the correct answer in the push order affects the total number of medals acquired during the specific section, so that the player guarantees the number of times of navigation during the specific section. It is preferable.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the multiple types of push forwards having different payout numbers of medals at the correct push order, only push forwards in which the payout number at the correct push order is greater than the inserted number, The number of times of navigation may be guaranteed, and the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed for a push order in which the number of payouts in the correct answer in the push order is equal to or less than the number of input. In addition, among the multiple types of push order roles with different medal payout numbers at the correct push order, the number of navigations is guaranteed only for the push order with the largest payout number at the correct push order, and other push forward roles For, the number of times of navigation may not be guaranteed.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 sets the number of times of navigation when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in the situation where the notification for the push forward for guaranteeing the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications for a push order that is not guaranteed, the specific section is ended on condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in the situation where the notification for the push forward that guarantees the number of navigations is not performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, The specific section is ended at the timing when the notification for the push order for guaranteeing the number of times of navigation is performed for the number of times guaranteed.

  By doing this, the number of notifications (navigation) about push-forwarding that affects the total number of medals acquired during a specific section is guaranteed, so the loss felt by the player can be reduced. .

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state. FIGS. 81 (B) and 81 (C) show that when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the guarantee number of times has not yet been notified, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example in which a transition to the bonus state is made is shown.

  Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when the specific section is viewed as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the main control board 71 is in the specific section even when the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. If the bonus state has been entered even once, the specific section may be ended when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section and has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of times, Regardless of whether or not the transition to the bonus state has occurred, the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed. Good.

  Next, a case will be described in which the limit game number in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times. When the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that the player is given a certain profit, so the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 81 (D). As shown in the figure, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be ended even if the number of guarantees has not been notified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), the main control board 71, even if the limit game number in the specific section has reached a certain number of games, The specific section may be continued until notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  In the case where the specific section is continued until the notification for the number of times of guarantee is performed by the navigation guarantee processing, whether or not to perform so-called extra lottery during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may perform extra lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, and may not perform additional lottery even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may perform lottery for an additional period after the end condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

  Further, when the specific section is continued until the number of times of guarantee is given by the navigation guarantee processing, the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100 returns to the normal screen at a timing satisfying the end condition of the specific section, and then When the push order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order may be notified (navigation) on the normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without notification for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps the state indicator 147b lit, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen in the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen in the normal section. After that, when the push order to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub control board 72 , The order of pressing on the normal screen is notified. Then, when notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the outline of each gaming state of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section when roughly classified. The normal section is a state where a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state where a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. Further, the standby section is a state after the winning lottery for shifting to the specific section until the transition to the specific section from the normal section.

  In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the bonus winning combination is not determined as an internal winning combination depending on whether the bonus winning combination has been won or the bonus has been activated. Not set “Bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, set the probability that the bonus-related role is determined as an internal winning combination, and “Between flags” that the bonus is not operating is determined as an internal winning combination “Bonus state (no setting difference)” in which a bonus corresponding to a bonus combination with no difference is activated and a bonus corresponding to a bonus combination having a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination “ “Bonus state (with setting difference)” and the game state are included.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the “bonus inactive (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, In addition, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and when a combination for notification is determined as an internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these roles. Assuming that the combination “push order bell” is determined as the internal winning combination, information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72.

  Further, in the “bonus inactive (between non-flag)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to a specific section based on information that does not differ in the set value. On the other hand, in the “inter-flag” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform lottery transfer to the specific section. Further, in the normal section “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)”, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification when pushing forwards are won.

  Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 displays the status indicator 147b. Lights up. Note that the main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in a different manner during the standby section and during the specific section.

  Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 receives the push order combination. It is good also as notifying notifying of the pushing order of the correct answer of time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits the notification-related roles to the sub-control board 72 without grouping them. Specifically, when one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st”, “F_3 option bell_2nd”, and “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually sets the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of the combination determined as is transmitted to the sub control board 72. On the other hand, when not reporting the correct push order, the main control board 71 groups the roles related to the notification and transmits them to the sub-control board 72.

  Further, the main control board 71 wins in the “no bonus operation (between non-flag)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section. Transition lottery to a specific section is not performed (however, a transition lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the specific section being won). Further, in the “non-operational bonus (between non-flag)”, “inter-flag”, and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform lottery addition for the duration of the specific section. In the “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform lottery by adding the duration of the specific section based on information having no difference in the set value. It's okay to not.

  Further, in the specific section “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” “between flags”, “bonus state (without setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)”, the main control board 71 displays the status indicator 147b. Is turned on, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 performs a role related to notification in “bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Are transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

  Further, the main control board 71 wins in “bonus inactive (between non-flags)”, “between flags”, “bonus state (no setting difference)” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in a specific section. Transition lottery to a specific section is not performed (however, a transition lottery may be performed for a specific section different from the specific section being won). Further, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value in the “bonus inactive (between non-flags)” and “bonus state (no setting difference)” in the specific section. While lottery is performed, in the “between flags” and “bonus state (with setting difference)” in the specific section, no extra lottery is performed for the duration of the specific section.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform lottery transfer to a specific section only at the time of three bets, or add lottery for the duration of the specific section, and do not perform these lotteries at the time of one or two bets.

<Output of transfer lottery result to external device>
Next, with reference to FIG. 82 to FIG. 84, the flow when outputting the result of lottery transfer to a specific section from a pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

In game stores, external devices such as data counters and hall computers are installed in conjunction with pachislot machines.For example, when a bonus state starts in a pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter, and data Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the lottery for the specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 is able to recognize an event (for example, in the RT state) that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side. The lottery result is estimated from the transition and the stop operation is performed a plurality of times in a specific pushing order), and a signal is output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting that the winning lottery is won is delayed by several games from the timing of actually winning, and a specific pressing order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is assumed that the winning lottery is won even though it has not been won, and as a result, an incorrect signal may be output.
Further, in the specification of outputting a signal based on the transition of the RT gaming state, when a bonus is drawn during the ART, the signal is also output when the RT gaming state at the end of the bonus is returned to the RT gaming state for ART after the bonus is consumed. May be output. In such a case, there is a problem that the signal is output more than the number of correct ART wins and digest sets, and it is difficult for the player to grasp accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting a stand. Has occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery to the specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so the result of the transfer lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a pattern example of signal output timing to the external device. In FIG. 82, timing T1 is the start time of the game won in the lottery for transition to a specific section (eg, ART gaming state), period P1 is a period between one game of the game, and period P2 is It is a period between one game of the next game.

  In the example shown in FIG. 82, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the winning lottery for the specific section is won. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the lottery for the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, the main control board 71 can grasp that the winning lottery has been won from the time T1. .

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transfer lottery is output to an external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 won in the transfer lottery. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the game won for the transfer lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). is doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device at the start of the reel rotation of the game, and in the output pattern example C, the main control board 71 outputs the external lottery at the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transfer lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device when all reels of the game are stopped.

  As shown in output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can also output the result of the transfer lottery to an external device in a game after the game won the transfer lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery to the external device when a medal for the game next to the game won the transfer lottery is inserted. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 performs transfer lottery with respect to the external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games have been performed thereafter (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

  The output pattern example shown in FIG. 82 is merely an example, and the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment displays the result of the transfer lottery for the external device at an arbitrary timing after winning the lottery for the specific section. Can be output.

  In addition, by combining the lighting pattern example of the status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 73 with the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won can be output to the external device prior to the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Conversely, after the status indicator 147b is lit, the external device It may be possible to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won, or to output a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won to an external device simultaneously with the lighting of the status indicator 147b. Good.

  For example, since the signal is output to the external device before the status indicator 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status indicator 147b is turned on. It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of processing time in the external device, the signal to the external device is output slightly before the lighting of the status indicator 147b, so that the status indicator 147b is turned on (notification in the pachislot machine 1). The timing and the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachislot machine 1) can be matched, and the player's uncomfortable feeling can be reduced.

  For example, when there are many types of bonuses and there are limited output pins from the external concentrated terminal board 73, such as when there are no vacant output pins in the 8-pin signal line that outputs signals to the external device. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to the external device even if the transfer lottery is won.

  In the above embodiment, a signal is output when a transition lottery is won. However, a signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is managed and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the winning lottery is won (so-called first hit), and after the first set of 30 games is digested, 2 sets An external signal can be output at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting a signal in this way, the correct number of sets can be grasped. In addition, it is possible to use a data counter to accurately grasp the number of first hits and the number of continuations by using different signals for the first hit and the signal at the time of continuation. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. .

In such a game machine that manages the number of sets, when the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART game state, a pachislot machine that resumes the game from the remaining number of games in the set after the bonus ends, There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when 25 bonus games are started when 25 games out of a set of 30 games in the ART gaming state are digested and the bonus status starts, the remaining number of games after the bonus ends is 5 games (remaining at the time of bonus winning) The ART gaming state is resumed from (number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal at the time of restarting ART because only one set is divided on the way. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART gaming state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. Note that the same signal output processing can be applied not only to an ART of a type in which the number of predetermined games is one set, but also to a type of managing the number of ART sets by a difference number or the number of navigations.

  A pachislot machine having both a pattern in which the game is restarted from the remaining number of games in the set after the bonus ends and a pattern in which a new set is started from the beginning after the bonus ends can be considered. For example, if a bonus is won when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, one set is added as a remedy, and if the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the remaining after the bonus ends A specification that restarts the game from the number of games is conceivable.

In such a pachislot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output according to whether or not the ART is added when the bonus is won. In other words, if an ART addition occurs when the bonus is won, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus ends, and no ART addition occurs when the bonus is won. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the bonus ends. More specifically, when the bonus is won when the remaining number of games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when restarting ART after the bonus ends, assuming that an ART addition has occurred. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, no signal is output when the ART is restarted after the bonus is ended, assuming that no additional ART has occurred.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins a bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART gaming state is less than a predetermined value, the ART gaming state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. The signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, if the bonus is won when the remaining number of games in the ART gaming state is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART gaming state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus is over. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

  In addition, the presence or absence of signal output may be determined according to the presence or absence of an ART addition from the bonus winning to the start of ART as well as the presence or absence of an ART addition at the time of winning the bonus.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is incremented by one by one output. However, when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter depends on the value. It is good also as a signal which raises the value of two or more values. For example, in the case of an ART of one set of 30 games, when a long ART consisting of one set of 90 games is started with a premium or the like, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by three. .
Also, in the case of an ART of one set of 30 games, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, a signal is output so that the value of the data counter increases in accordance with the average number of games until the bonus is won. Also good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continued games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, and thus a signal that increases the value of the data counter by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continued games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified Output a signal according to. By doing so, it becomes easy to determine how much profit is obtained afterwards even from a data counter or the like even for a pachislot machine having a plurality of ART gaming states with different values at the start. The signal that increases the value of the data counter by a plurality of values may be a signal that increases the value by 1 a plurality of times with an interval so that an external device can identify the signal. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production in cooperation with external equipment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 83 and FIG. 84, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device when winning a lottery for shifting to a specific section will be described. FIG. 83 shows an example of an effect in the case where a signal is output to an external device during a game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and FIG. 84 shows an external in the game after winning the transition lottery to the specific section. An example of an effect in the case of outputting a signal to a device will be shown.

(Example 1)
In the production example 1 shown in FIG. 83, in the game winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in reverse before starting the reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction. The game is progressing. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is a timing for starting the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the timing T2 is a timing for starting the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, at the time of starting the reel rotation). The timing T3 is when all the reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing of lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the winning lottery has been won at the timing of output pattern example B (when reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

  As shown at the timing T1, in the game where the lottery for the specific section is won, the main control board 71 starts to rotate the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the reverse direction. In addition, the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display notifying the data counter installed at the upper part of the pachislot machine 1 and to display a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top. Therefore, for the player, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Accordingly, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. In addition to the guidance of the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the display unit 100 also draws attention to the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

  From timing T1 to timing T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to advance the countdown. Thereafter, at timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal indicating that the transfer lottery has been won to the data counter. When this signal is received, the data counter updates the counter and displays “winning” or the like.

  As described above, in the production example 1, by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the display by the display unit 100, the line of sight is guided to the data counter, and then the signal is output to the data counter. Then, the fact that the lottery for the transition to the specific section has been won is notified on the data counter that collects the gaze of the player. Thereby, not only the pachislot machine 1 but also an effect linked with an external device (data counter) can be executed.

  Moreover, in the production example 1, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing T3. On the sub-control board 72, in accordance with the lighting timing of the status indicator 147b, an image or the like indicating that the specific section is won is displayed on the display unit 100. As described above, in the production example 1, by performing the production in accordance with the lighting timing of the state indicator 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, various productions can be performed in conjunction with each other, and the production effect is enhanced. Can do.

(Example 2)
Next, production example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the lottery for the transition to the specific section, and the specific section starts after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. There is a case where a so-called precursor effect is performed during the predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transfer lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, so that the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. Even in a game where the player wins the transfer lottery, the result of the transfer lottery can be output to the external device. Here, when the game of winning the transition lottery is performed and the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device). An effect result (that is, whether or not the transfer lottery is successful) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is cut off.

  Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game after 32 games from the game won the transition lottery in the specific section. To do. Then, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursor effect during these 32 games as shown in the effect example A. Thus, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the sign effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the sign effect.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the transition lottery in the specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the game. However, the result of the transition lottery is displayed from the state indicator 147b during the indication effect. If it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. Therefore, it is preferable that the status indicator 147b makes it difficult to understand the result of the transfer lottery. The method for making the result of the transfer lottery difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

  Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the sign effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 84, in the effect example A, the warning effect is performed for 32 games, but in the effect example B, the warning effect is performed for 16 games, and then the winning of the specific section is confirmed. A later standby effect will be performed. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachislot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect suggesting a set value. Even if the period of the precursor effect can be customized as described above, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of whether or not customization is performed. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 84, both in the case of performing the effect example A and in the case of performing the effect example B, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game winning the transition lottery in the specific section. During the game, the result of the transfer lottery is output to the external device.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times of notification of a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during a specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART gaming state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment prevents the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous by creating a state in which navigation is easily performed during the specific section.

  Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the start timing of the specific section is set at the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, the push forward (notification target role) is performed with a higher probability than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal winning combination. If the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct pressing order is notified to the pressing order won during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the pressing order during the bonus state. Thereby, the situation where navigation is not performed during a specific section can be avoided, and as a result, the interest of games in the specific section can be enhanced.

  In particular, since the timing for starting the specific section is set as the start of the bonus state, the situation is such that the bonus state is never entered during the specific section, that is, the situation in which navigation is easily performed during the specific section (bonus state). It is possible to avoid the situation where the player does not need to go, and as a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during the specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of bonus)
Here, the method of setting the timing for starting the specific section as the start time of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus that is the unquestioned setting is determined as an internal winning combination (that is, bonus winning) during the normal section. And perform a transfer lottery. When the symbol combination corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 is winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state, 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the push order of the correct answer to the push order determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section when the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed in a state where the transition lottery is not won. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct pushing order even if the pushing order is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine that the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, but serves as a bonus related role that is not set during the normal section. A transfer lottery may be performed in response to the display of the corresponding symbol combination (that is, bonus winning).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 85 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform transfer lottery regardless of the combination relating to the bonus during the normal section. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transfer to a specific section based on information having no difference in set values during the normal section, and when winning the transfer lottery, the right to transfer to the specific section is determined. Is granted. After that, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts the specific section together with the bonus state when the right to transfer is granted, The board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pushing order of the correct answer to the pushing order determined as the internal winning combination with a high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the right to transfer is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting the specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are pushed forward during the bonus state. Even if is determined as an internal winning combination, the correct push order is not notified.

(Data example)
FIG. 85B is a data configuration example for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 85 (B), during the bonus state, the push order (“F_3 alternative combination_1st”, “F_3 alternative combination_2nd”, “F_3 alternative combination_3rd” is higher than in the state other than the bonus state. ) Is determined as an internal winning combination. For example, if the correct answer is in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols from which nine medals are paid out is displayed. If the answer is incorrect, the combination of symbols from which five medals are paid out It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

  According to such a data example, when notifying the correct pushing order to the pushing order during the bonus state, the player can obtain 18 (= 9 × 2 times) medals during the bonus state. However, if the correct push order is not notified to the push forward during the bonus state, the player will receive 10 (= 5 × 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to receive or receive medals.

<Precursor realization method using specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, a method for realizing a precursor effect in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a lottery for a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the player has won the transition lottery. It is not suitable for notifying the result of the transfer lottery using. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a prelude effect is produced during the first specific section using a specific section (first specific section) that is different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the success or failure is reported. Is going to do.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 86, a technique for realizing a precursor for the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations of a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section) are provided, and a game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, a short ART that lasts for a first period (for example, between three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example, 53 games (for 3 + 50)) are provided, and a lottery for transitioning to short ART or long ART is performed during the normal section. FIG. 86B is a diagram showing an example of a transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the short ART or the long ART based on the information (internal winning combination) having no difference in the set value with a probability that the set value does not vary.

  In this transition lottery, when either a short ART or a long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a precursor effect to notify whether or not the long ART has been won during a period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, when the pachislot machine 1 wins a short ART, it performs a precursor effect that informs that it has not won a long ART during the first period that is the duration of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when winning the long ART, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART, during the long ART duration. In addition to performing a precursor effect to notify this, an effect unique to the long ART is performed after the precursor effect.

  Note that when performing a precursor effect using a short ART, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b because both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections. That is, as shown in FIG. 86A, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b during the first period which is the duration of the short ART. In addition, when a long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period which is a continuous period of the long ART. Note that the main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

  In addition, a method for outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursor effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device, but only outputs the signal to the external device when the long ART is won in the transfer lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when winning a short ART and when winning a long ART in the transfer lottery.

  In addition, as conditions for ending the short ART and long ART, there are arbitrary conditions such as the number of games in a specific section, the number of navigations performed in a specific section, the number of medals paid out during the specific section and the number of differences. Can be used. In this case, the termination condition used for the short ART and the termination condition used for the long ART may be the same type or different types. For example, when the number of games is used as the short ART end condition, the same type is to use the number of games as the long ART end condition. The different type is, for example, the end of the short ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86 (C), an example of an effect in the case of performing a precursor game using a short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect such as “rushing into the blast chance” on the display unit 100, for example. This “explosive chance” effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be blown up during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the duration of the short ART is assumed to be 3 games.

  If the sub-control board 72 wins the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if the long ART is not won), the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without being able to blow up the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If it is, the production that succeeds in the explosion of the bomb is executed in the “bomb chance” production. It should be noted that the timing of succeeding in the bomb explosion when winning a long ART is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb can be successfully exploded in the first game or the second game, the bomb can be successfully exploded in the third game, You may be able to successfully blow up the bomb at the start of the fourth game.

  In addition, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player during the indication effect. In the example shown in FIG. 86 (C), since the push order is winning during the “blast chance” production which is the precursor of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the push order. On the other hand, the order of pushing correct answers is reported. In this way, the pachislot machine 1 can notify the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the sign production, and thus gives the player a sense of loss during the sign production that should increase the interest of the game. There is no end.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 87, another method of the precursor realizing method related to the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the precursor method 1 described above, the result of the transition lottery is already determined at the start of the “blast chance” effect, so the result of the precursor effect is already determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method that will be described subsequently is a method that makes it possible to determine the result of the precursor effect during the precursor game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART game state (second specific section) are provided, and a game in CZ is handled as a precursor game related to the transition to the ART game state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the pachislot machine 1 performs lottery transfer to CZ during the normal section and performs lottery transfer to ART during CZ. FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transfer lottery table used for the transfer lottery. The main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to CZ based on the internal winning combination, and lottery transfer to the ART gaming state based on a combination of symbols. Specifically, the main control board 71 does not perform the lottery transition to the ART gaming state when the combination of symbols of the bell spilling eyes or the first one is displayed, and when the combination of symbols of the bell is displayed. A lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed. Then, by notifying the correct push order to the push order bell during CZ, it is possible to make it easy to shift to the ART gaming state in CZ.

  In the pachislot machine 1, when winning the CZ in the lottery performed during the normal section, the “explosion chance” effect shown in FIG. 87 (C) is performed. This “explosion chance” effect is performed, for example, when three games are continued, and when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and the transition to the ART gaming state is made. Can receive lottery. When the CZ ends without winning the lottery for the transition to the ART gaming state, the sub-control board 72 ends the “blast chance” effect without being able to blast the bomb, and transitions to the ART gaming state before the end of the CZ. When the lottery is won, an effect that succeeds in the bomb explosion is executed in the “explosion chance” effect.

  The main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting state of the state indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may turn on the status indicator 147b in a different manner between the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light up in the same manner.

  Also, a method for outputting a signal to an external device is arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins CZ in the transfer lottery, the main control board 71 does not output a signal to the external device, but outputs a signal to the external device only when winning the ART gaming state in the transfer lottery. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device both when winning CZ in the transition lottery and when winning the ART gaming state.

  The termination conditions for the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of termination conditions may be used, or the same type of termination conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above-described example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of a so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals with an MB end condition of more than 14, and a combination of symbols from which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols from which 15 medals are paid out. In the state where notification is performed in the MB in which is displayed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of symbols from which 14 medals are paid out is displayed is notified, and in the next game In the state where 29 medals are paid out by notifying the pressing order in which the combination of symbols from which 15 medals are paid out is displayed, 15 medals are not notified. The combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

  In the above example, it is necessary to continue to wait until the pushing order is determined as an internal winning combination. However, if a short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the game is pushed in the short ART start game and the next game. Since forward navigation occurs, there is no need to continue to wait until the push forward is determined as an internal winning combination, and the game will not be delayed. Also, even if the game ends with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so there will be more medals than a normal game, and you will be able to experience profitable navigation consumption. It is possible to reduce disappointment due to not being connected to the player and to suppress a decrease in player's willingness to play.

<How to save navigation times>
In the so-called navigation frequency management pachislot machine that uses the number of times of navigation performed during a specific section as the end condition for the duration of a specific section, if the role to be navigated (notification target role) is concentrated and won, The navigation is concentrated and as a result, the specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, a method for saving the number of times of navigation will be described below with reference to FIG.

  When the number of times of navigation is used as the condition for ending the duration of the specific section, the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), notifies the player of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player even during the bonus state. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the symbol combination corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and the MB2 gaming state where the symbol combination corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (B), during the MB1 gaming state, the main control board 71 displays the combinations “F_maintenance lip_1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance” in which combinations of symbols with different payout numbers are displayed according to the pressing order. “Lip_2nd + all small roles” and “F_maintenance lip_3rd + all small roles” are determined as internal winning combinations, while in MB2 gaming state, only combinations where symbols with the same payout amount are displayed regardless of the order of pressing. To be determined as a winning role. In the MB1 gaming state, the payout number may differ depending on the order of pressing. Therefore, when these roles are determined as internal winning combinations, (Pressing order in which 9 winning combinations are displayed) is notified.

  In this way, when the MB1 gaming state starts during a specific section, the game is played while consuming the number of times of navigation, but when the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section. Can play a game without consuming the number of times of navigation, and can reduce the consumption speed of the number of times of navigation.

  In the MB1 gaming state, a combination that displays a combination of symbols with different payout numbers according to the pressing order is determined as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, in the MB2 gaming state, the same payout number is determined regardless of the pressing order. A method for realizing that only the combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to 3 bets, and during the MB1 gaming state, individual lotteries are randomly drawn only for replays, and when all the small roles are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop control is varied according to the type of replay. Thereby, during the MB1 gaming state, a combination in which a combination of symbols with different payout numbers depending on the pressing order can be determined as an internal winning combination. On the other hand, the MB2 gaming state is a gaming state dedicated to two bets, and in the case of two bets, a combination of winning combinations of the same medal payout numbers is used for all small combinations. As a result, during the MB2 gaming state, only a combination that displays a combination of symbols having the same payout number regardless of the pressing order can be determined as an internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Subsequently, a method for individually managing Lip Navi and Bell Navi during a specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. In conventional pachislot machines, it is common to perform both notifications for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state and notifications for increasing medals during a specific section. By managing each of them individually, it is possible to realize a new gameability that has never existed before.

(Game Example 1)
First, with reference to FIG. 89 to FIG. 91, Game Example 1 in the case where Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. This gaming example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections such as Lip Navi AT and Bernavi AT as specific sections. In Lip Navi AT, notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high Lip state is performed, but notification for increasing medals is not performed. In addition, in the bell navigation AT, at least notification for increasing medals is performed, and notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is performed as necessary.

  FIG. 89A shows a game flow in the gaming example 1. As shown in FIG. 89 (A), the pachislot machine 1 provides three types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state, with different types of internal winning combinations related to replay and their winning probabilities as RT gaming states. . The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, after initialization processing, after a setting change, or the like. The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in a normal game. In addition, the RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is a high probability, and if it is changed according to the notification, it is treated as a Lip Navi AT, and is transferred regardless of the notification. The game state is treated as a normal game. In addition, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in Bernavi AT.

  There is a possibility of transition from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), the combinations of the bell spilled symbols are combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_1st” which are pushing orders. "Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pushing in the game determined as an internal winning combination. In the game in which the winning combinations “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out when the answer is correct in the pressing order.

  Further, there is a possibility that the RT1 gaming state may shift to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT1 gaming state, when the combination of RT2 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT1 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed.

  Further, there is a possibility that the RT2 gaming state may shift to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT2 gaming state, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_Keep Lip_123” to “F_Keep Lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the replay symbol combination is displayed by the correct push order answer, the main control board 71 maintains the gaming state in the RT2 game state, and the RT1 transition lip symbol combination is displayed by the incorrect push order answer. In this case, the gaming state is shifted from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

  Further, when the combination of symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table in FIG. 89 (B), in the RT2 gaming state, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 89 (B), in the game in which the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are determined as internal winning combinations, In the case of, the combination of symbols of RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of incorrect answer in the order of pressing, the combination of symbols of replay is displayed. When the combination of the RT3 transition lip symbols is displayed by the correct push order answer, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and the replay symbol combination is changed by the incorrect pushing order. If displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

  In addition, there is a possibility of transition from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, in the RT3 gaming state, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the roles “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the combination of bell symbols is displayed by the correct push order. If the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state while 9 medals are paid out, and the combination of symbols of the bell spilled pattern is displayed due to incorrect push order, the number is less than 9 (or 0) The game state is shifted from the RT3 game state to the RT1 game state while paying out the medals.

  As shown in the transition lottery table in FIG. 90C, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to the Lip Navi AT based on the internal winning combination. This transition lottery table indicates that a lottery for transition to Lip Navi AT is performed based on an internal winning combination, and the types of combinations for which a transition lottery will be performed are merely examples.

  As shown in the transition lottery table in FIG. 90C, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to the Bernavi AT based on the displayed combination of symbols. In this gaming example 1, the main control board 71 performs a lottery transition to the Bernavi AT only when a combination of symbols for the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and when a combination of symbols for the RT3 transition lip is displayed. For this reason, he will always win the Bell Navi AT.

  In the example shown in the drawing, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed for the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT, that is, the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are determined as internal winning combinations. However, it is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply includes the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”. When it is determined as a winning combination, a lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT may be performed.

  Here, in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” as internal winning combinations during the RT2 gaming state, and plays the role “ F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 "are not determined as internal winning combinations, or in other RT gaming states, the roles" F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 "have a lower probability than in the RT2 gaming state. Is determined as an internal winning combination. Therefore, the RT2 gaming state has a higher frequency of lottery transition to the Bernavi AT than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly the RT1 gaming state during the RT2 gaming state). ) And lottery transfer to Bernavi AT.

  When the pachislot machine 1 (the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72) does not win any of the Lip Navi AT and the Bell Navi AT, the stop operation mode (the correct push order) advantageous to the player is notified. do not do. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the player is winning the Lip Navi AT, the pachi-slot machine 1 performs the notification accompanying the Lip Navi AT.

  Specifically, when winning the Lip Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 have the roles “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to When any of “F_RT3 transition lip_321” and combination “F_maintenance lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct pressing order is notified. On the other hand, even in the case of winning the rip navigator AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined as any of the winning combinations “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” as an internal winning combination. Even if it is done, the order of pushing correct answers is not notified.

  Further, when winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are determined that any of the combinations “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd” is determined as the internal winning combination. , Notify the correct answer push order. In the case of winning the Bernavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are transferred from the roles “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition”. When either of “Lip_321” and the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

  In this way, it is possible to treat the Rib Navi AT as a specific section for performing a notification for maintaining the RT2 gaming state with a high frequency of lottery transition to the Bernavi AT. It can be handled as a specific section in which notification for increasing is performed. As described above, in the gaming example 1, since there are specific sections having different roles of Lip Navi AT and Bernavi AT, the meaning of notification varies depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest without making the notification monotonous.

  In addition, during Lip Navi AT, notification for increasing medals is not performed, so that an increase in medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits between the player and the game store. However, if the period of increase in medals is long, the profit that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to move to a specific section, etc. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 1, since there is a specific section called “Rip Navi AT” that does not perform notification for increasing medals separately from the Bernavi AT that performs notification for increasing medals, the specific section It is possible to achieve a balance between the profits of the player and the amusement store while realizing a gameability that is easy to shift to.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transfer lottery performed based on the information having no difference in the set value. . In this regard, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information having no difference in setting values, and the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be varied for each setting value. The specific method is shown below.

  In the above-mentioned gaming example 1, in response to the determination of the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” as internal winning combinations (more specifically, when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination) In response to a stop operation in the pressing order, a lottery for shifting to the Bell Navi AT is performed. Since the transfer lottery is performed based on information having no difference in the set value, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” have an internal winning combination with a probability corresponding to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Need to be determined. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” as internal winning combinations at a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 gaming state. As described above, in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” may be determined as internal winning combinations, and in this case, the main control The board 71 has a lower probability than the predetermined probability during the RT gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state) other than the RT2 gaming state, and the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”. Is determined as an internal winning combination.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning lottery to the specific section is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value, so that the roles “F_RT3 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT3 transition lip — 321” are internal. Depending on what is determined as a winning combination (more specifically, when it is determined as an internal winning combination, it is stopped in the correct pushing order), regardless of the set value, the winning rate is the same. It is necessary to perform a transition lottery. Therefore, the main control board 71 performs lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value when performing lottery to shift to the Bell Navi AT.

  In this way, the roles “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321”, which trigger the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT, are determined as internal winning combinations with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for the transition to the Bell Navi AT is won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the expectation level regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each setting value. However, in this method, a setting difference is provided for the transition of the RT gaming state, thereby regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Different expectations for each set value.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set value that has been set. As described above, during the RT2 gaming state, since the lottery for the transition to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT gaming states, this RT2 game is not provided with a setting difference in the transition lottery trigger or winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bell Navi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 89 (B), the probabilities (information on lottery values) for determining the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip — 123” to “F_RT2 transition lip — 321” as internal winning combinations. By making the value different for each setting value, a setting difference can be provided for the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the setting value having a high probability of determining the combination “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” as the internal winning combination is likely to transition to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT Therefore, a feature for each set value can be obtained with respect to the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Example of effects in Game Example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91, an example of the effect in the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 1 will be described. FIG. 91 (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a game flow in the case of performing the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (A), the first game is an RT1 game state and is a game that has not won any of the Lip Navi AT and the Bernavi AT. In the first game, since neither the rip navigator AT nor the bell navigator AT is won, the status indicator 147b is turned off, and both the rep navigator count and the bell navigator count remain zero. Note that the number of Lip Navi means that any one of the roles “F_RT2 Transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 Transition Lip_321”, Roles “F_RT3 Transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 Transition Lip_321”, and Role “F_Maintenance Lip_123” is internal. This is the number of times the correct push order is notified when it is determined as a winning combination. The number of bell navigations is determined as any of the “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection_3rd” internal winning combinations. In this case, the number of times the correct answer is pushed is notified.

  Subsequently, in the second game, a lottery for the transition to Lip Navi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b lights up with the lighting pattern 1, and 5 times is given as the number of Lip Navi. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91 (B) (a) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of Lip Navi is given to the display unit 100 and also displays that the “search challenge” effect is started. The “search challenge” effect is an effect of searching for a treasure performed during Lip Navi AT. If a treasure can be found while the number of Lip Navi remains, the result is a success (Bernavi AT). It is.

  Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since Lip Navi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. With this notification, in the third game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 5 times to 4 times. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91B (b) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays a pressing order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 gaming state) to the treasure (RT2 gaming state) on the display unit 100. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (b) of FIG. 91 (B), the sub control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. The display indicating that the treasure has arrived from the waiting time is displayed.

  Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state is performed in the third game, the status indicator 147b is lit with the lighting pattern 2. In the fourth game, any of the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in Lip Nav AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the user to maintain the RT2 gaming state. With this notification, in the fourth game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 4 to 3 times. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (c) of FIG. 91 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained, and the search among treasures continues.

  Subsequently, in the fifth game, any one of the roles “F_3 option bell_1st” to “F_3 option bell_3rd” is determined as an internal winning combination, but since it is in the Ripenavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct pushing order. Therefore, the sub control board 72 performs a display indicating that the pressing order is unknown in the display unit 100, as shown in (d) of FIG. 91 (B). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 91, it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, so the combination of symbols of the bell spilled pattern is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state with the display of the combination of the bell spilled symbols. In addition, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that it has fallen from treasure (RT2 gaming state) to standby (RT1 gaming state).

  Subsequently, in the sixth game, since the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game, the status indicator 147b is lit with the lighting pattern 1. In the sixth game, any of the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since Lip Navi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the push order of correct answers and prompt the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from 3 times to 2 times. In addition, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 a pressing order for shifting from standby (RT1 gaming state) to treasure (RT2 gaming state). Thereafter, when the combination of symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 displays that it has arrived between the treasure from the standby.

  Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the sixth game, the status indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. In the seventh game, any of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lip Nav AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct pushing order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of Lip Navi is reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 91 (B) in the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct push order on the display unit 100.

  Here, when any of the combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination, if a correct answer is made in the push order, a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the Bell Navi AT is won. Therefore, the sub control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that it has won the Bernavi AT. Further, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi according to the winning of the Bell Navi AT. In addition, since 1 remains as the number of Lip Navi when winning the Bell Navi AT, the number of Lip Navi when winning the Bell Navi AT is 11 times.

  Thereafter, from the eighth game, the gaming state becomes Bernavi AT, and the main control board 71 lights the state indicator 147b with the lighting pattern 3. In this bell navigator AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, as long as the number of Lip navigator remains, the role “F_RT2 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition Lip_321”, the role “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition”. Rip_321 ”and the role“ F_Maintenance Lip_123 ”are notified of the correct push order, and as long as the number of bell navigations remains, the correct answer is pushed for the roles“ F_3 choice bell_1st ”to“ F_3 choice_3rd ”. Announce the order.

(Game example 2)
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 to FIG. 94, a game example 2 in the case where Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during a specific section, but the number of notifications of both is individually managed. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. Note that Lip Navi refers to notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high Lip state, and Bell Navigation refers to notification for increasing medals.

  FIG. 92A shows a game flow in the game example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (A), in the gaming example 2, there is a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, a high probability that a role related to replay is determined as an internal winning combination (For example, the RT2 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state in the gaming example 1) and the low lip probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the gaming example 1) with a low probability that the role related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination.

  In the gaming example 2, the main control board 71 performs a lottery to the specific section during the normal section, and when the winning lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to the specific section. . In the gaming example 2, the lottery for the transition to the specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

  Further, when both the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times become 0 during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the gaming example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state for the number of times indicated by the number of Lip Navi, and the medals for the number of times indicated by the number of Bell Navigation. Informs to increase. Then, when both the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times become 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

  Further, when the symbol combination of the fall replay is displayed in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the high lip state to the low lip state, and the symbol combination of the promoted replay is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of the game example 1, for example, the symbol combination of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the symbol combination of the fall replay, and the transition to RT2 The combination of symbols of Lip and RT3 transition Lip corresponds to the combination of symbols of Promotion Replay.

  Note that the combination of symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed at the time of an incorrect answer in the pressing order when the combinations “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations, and the RT2 transition lip or RT3 The combination of symbols of the transition lip is correct when the combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” and “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations. Displayed at times. Therefore, Lip Navi in Game Example 2 means that when the combinations “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the correct push order is notified, and the combination of the fall replay symbols is When it is determined that the combination “F_RT2 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition Lip_321” and the roles “F_RT3 transition Lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition Lip_321” are determined as internal winning combinations. This includes notifying the correct pushing order and prompting the display of the combination of symbols of the promotion replay.

  In addition, if the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in the correct push order, a combination of replay symbols is displayed and the RT gaming state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. In other words, the main control board 71 displays the combination of replay symbols when the combination “F_Maintenance Lip_123” to “F_Maintenance Lip_321” is determined as an internal winning combination during the high lip state (press In the correct answer), while maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state, when the combination of falling replay symbols is displayed (incorrect push order answer), the RT gaming state is shifted from the high lip state to the low lip state. .

  Subsequently, FIG. 92 (B) is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a specific section of the gaming example 2. As shown in FIG. 92 (B), the gaming example 2 has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state in the specific section. Comparing the normal ART with the special state, the normal ART is in a state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is higher than that in the special state. In addition, in the gaming example 2, when the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi are added during a specific section, when the normal ART and the special state are compared, the amount of the Bell Navi number added is reduced compared to the normal ART during the special state. On the other hand, the additional amount of Lip Navi is increased. That is, during a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is suppressed, the number of Lip navigation is given priority over the number of bell navigation.

(Realization method of special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 93, a method for realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles “F_3 option bell A_1st”, “F_3 option bell A_2nd”, “F_3 option bell A_3rd”, and the roles “F_3 option bell B_12t” “F_3 option bell B_2nd” “F_3 option” Bell B — 3rd ”. In the following, the roles “F_3 selection bell A_1st” to “F_3 selection bell A_3rd” are simply referred to as roles “F_3 selection bell A”, and the roles “F_3 selection bell B_1st” to “F_3 selection bell B_3rd” are simply referred to as roles “F_3”. Sometimes referred to as “Choose B”.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, in the state where the bonus winning combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, either of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” or combination “F_3 selection bell B”. Also, the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different. Specifically, for both the combination “F_3 selection bell A” and the combination “F_3 selection bell B”, the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the pressing order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and the pressing order is out of order. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed, and fewer than nine (or zero) medals are paid out.

  Therefore, when the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are determined as the internal winning combination of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” and the combination “F_3 selection bell B” during the specific section at the time of bonus non-winning, Bell navigation (notification of pressing order of correct answers) is performed as many times as the number of bell navigations. In other words, during the specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will be reduced even if either of the combination “F_3 selection bell A” or “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination. Become.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), during the flag, that is, in a state where the bonus winning combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, the winning combination “F_3 selection bell B” is displayed according to the order of pressing. Although the combination of symbols is different, the combination “F_3 selection bell A” has the same symbol combination displayed regardless of the pressing order. Specifically, for the combination “F_3 selection bell B”, the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is pressed, nine medals are paid out, and when the incorrect answer is the pressing order, the combination of the bell spilled symbols is displayed. Is displayed, and fewer than nine medals (or zero) are paid out. On the other hand, for the combination “F_3 selection bell A”, a combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out regardless of the pressing order.

  For this reason, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, when the combination “F_3 selection bell A” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, When the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section, bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, during a specific section between the flags, even if the combination “F_3 selection bell A” is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations is not reduced, and the combination “F_3 selection bell B” is determined as an internal winning combination. The number of bell navigators will be reduced.

  In this way, it is possible to realize a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the bonus-related combination is carried over as an internal winning combination can do. In other words, in the case of the above-described example, a special state that can suppress the consumption speed of the number of times of the bell navigation is realized by setting the specific section when the bonus is not won as a normal ART and the specific section between the flags as a special state. can do.

(Example of addition)
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a method for adding the number of Lip Navi times and the number of Bell Navi times will be described. The added lottery table in FIG. 94 (A) defines lottery value information with respect to the additional amount of the Bell navigation number and the Lip navigation number for each internal winning combination and gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 refers to the extra lottery table shown in FIG. FIG. 94 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the expected degree of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 94 (A).

Referring to FIGS. 94A and 94B, it can be seen that the normal ART and the special state differ in the expected increase in the number of Bell Navi and the expected increase in the number of Lip Navi. Specifically, in the addition based on the cactus and the weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is more likely to be added during normal ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during a special state. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of increase in the number of bell navigations is reduced compared to that during normal ART, and on the contrary, the amount of increase in the number of lip navigation is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 94, the addition expectation based on the strong cherry has the same expectation for addition during the normal ART and during the special state.

  In such a pachislot machine 1 of Game Example 2, Lip Navi and Bell Navi are individually managed during a specific section, Lip Navi is performed for the number of Lip Navi, and Bell Navigation is performed for the number of Bell Navi. As a result, even if one of the roles that are subject to Lip Navi or Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as an internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. In addition, since the other navigation frequency is not consumed, the consumption speed of the navigation frequency can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the gaming example 2, the normal ART and the special state are provided as the specific section, and the expectation of the addition is made different according to the current state. Specifically, during normal ART where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigation is high, the number of times of bell navigation is easy to be added. Increase the amount of Lip Navi. Thereby, the consumption speed of the frequency | count of a navigation can be relieve | moderated and, as a result, the interest in a specific area is not spoiled.

<CZ selection method with different end periods>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method for selecting CZs having different end periods will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). In addition, since the specific section includes CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games that CZ has continued. It will be shorter. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select a CZ to be executed from CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, it is easy to select a CZ that is considered preferable for the player. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ “short-term game” shown in FIG. 95 (A) is a CZ with an end period of 0 games, and the CZ “game” shown in FIG. 95 (B) is a CZ with an end period of 1 game. The CZ “stable” shown in FIG. 95 (C) is a CZ of 10 games in the end period, and the CZ “Random” shown in FIG. 95 (D) is a CZ of 10 games in the end period. The CZ “long term game” shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery to shift to the ART gaming state before the CZ duration exceeds the termination period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

  Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 95A to 95E are selection screens for selecting CZ. This selection screen is provided with a selection cursor for selecting CZ. In FIG. 95, the selection cursor points to CZ “short term” in FIG. 95A, points to CZ “game” in FIG. 95B, and points to CZ “stable” in FIG. 95C. In FIG. 95D, CZ “wave disturbance” is indicated, and in FIG. 95E, CZ “long term battle” is indicated. For example, the selection cursor switches the CZ to be selected as time passes.

  In the selection screen, a player's operation on a chance button (not shown) is accepted, and the main control board 71 executes the operation by assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor at the timing when the chance button is operated. The selection of CZ is accepted, and then the selected CZ is started. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing of FIG. 95 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting CZ “short-term battle”, and then CZ “short-term battle”. Start “Battle”. Note that the method for specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 also counts the interval for switching the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor so that the main control board 71 The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be specified.

  In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” having the shortest end period in the initial state, and thereafter points to other CZs in the shortest end period as time passes. . For example, the selection cursor indicates CZ in the order of CZ “short-term game”, CZ “game”, CZ “stability”, CZ “wave disturbance”, and CZ “long-term game” as time passes.

  Here, when the limit processing is performed as described above, the game period in the ART gaming state is shortened by the number of times that the CZ has been continued, so the CZ “short-term battle” with the shortest end period is a game It is considered preferable for the person. In the pachislot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by indicating the CZ “short-term battle” as the initial state of the selection cursor, A selection method can be realized.

  Also, some players may advance the game without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the game is started by operating the start lever 6 without accepting an operation for the chance button on the selection screen (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed), the selection by the player is not performed. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts CZ having the shortest end period among a plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ “short-term battle” with the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. Automatically select, then start CZ “short term”. As a result, it is possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

  Such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, with the right to transition to CZ. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to transition to the CZ for performing the transfer lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and in the state where the right to transition to the CZ is granted, The selection of one CZ is accepted.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, the reel control when starting the specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when starting a specific section, reel stop control is performed so that a combination of specific symbols such as “7-7-7” (hereinafter referred to as “AT start start”) can be displayed. I do. Specifically, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery for shifting to the specific section, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (stripped) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, the main control board 71 transitions the gaming state to the specific section and satisfies the transition right when the transition condition to the specific section is satisfied (for example, the AT start appearance is displayed) while the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (ie, the reel stop control). Different).

  FIGS. 96 and 97 are diagrams showing an example of a turning stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in the above-described steps S9 and S12 of FIG. This spinning cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The rotation stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence / absence of the right to move to the specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the spinning stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, gaming state, and the presence / absence of the transfer right, and uses the reel stop control information to reel 3L, Stop 3C, 3R.

  The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the gaming state and the presence / absence of the transfer right includes the rotation stop number, determination data for each pressing order (drawing priority table number, drawing priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), first cylinder first stop table change data, first cylinder stop data table selection data (left first stop table), first cylinder first stop This is information including a table change initial data selection value (change status, table number) and a search order data table number.

  The “determination data by pressing order” includes a pull-in priority table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The “pull-in priority table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). Further, the “pull-in priority order selection table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority order selection table (not shown).

  “Table number selection data” is a value that is referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

  The “stop table number” is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, if the line status is A line, the line status is changed to B line.

  1st cylinder first stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data, and 1st cylinder 1st stop table change initial data selection value are as follows. That is, the data is referred to when the left reel is 3L.

  The “first-cylinder first stop table change data” indicates whether the same stop table after the first first stop is used after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is data which shows. If there is a value (other than 0) in the first cylinder first stop table change data, the change data search table is selected based on the planned stop position, and the data is searched for the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table.

  “First cylinder stop data table selection data” is a number for selecting a first cylinder stop data table (not shown) to be referred to when stopping the first cylinder.

  The “first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value” is data to be referred to when stopping the second and third cylinders, and includes a table number and a line status. The “table number” is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first cylinder first stop that is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The “change status” is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first cylinder first stop selected based on the table number. When the change status is “0”, the line status is not changed. When the change status is “2”, if the line status is A line, the line status is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

  “Search order table number” is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding symbols.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 96 (B), in the pachislot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Specifically, in the turning stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (A) that is referred to when the winning combination is non-winning, the rotating stop number “17” for the winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. The reel stop control information is defined, and in the spinning stop initial setting table of FIG. 96 (B) that is referred to when the bonus winning combination is won, for the same winning combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” The reel stop control information of the reel stop number “31” is defined. As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence / absence of the winning combination, the reel stop control is different when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

  Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 96 (A) and 97 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the turning stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 96A that is referred to when the right to transfer is not granted, the turning stop number “17” is assigned to the role “F_3 selection bell_1st”. In the rotating stop initial setting table of FIG. 97 (C) that is referred to when reel stop control information is defined and the right to transfer is granted, the rotating device for the same combination “F_3 selection bell_1st”. The reel stop control information of the stop number “41” is defined. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, by changing the reel stop control information according to the presence / absence of the transfer right, it is possible to change the reel stop control when winning the transfer lottery to the specific section.

  Next, FIG. 98 shows a correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the rotating drum stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 98, in the normal section where the right to shift to a specific section is not granted, when the internal winning combination is “out of”, a combination of symbols of “out” is displayed, and the internal winning combination is displayed. Are "F_3 option bell_1st" to "F_3 option bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, and if the answer is incorrect, The combination is displayed.

  On the other hand, in the standby section of the specific section to which the right to transition to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is “out”, the combination of symbols at the start of AT starts when the push operation is accurate Is displayed, and when the eye-pushing operation is inaccurate, a combination of symbols of “out” is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”, if the eye pressing operation is accurate, a combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is displayed, and the eye pressing operation is not performed. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, bell spilled eyes, or the first symbol is displayed.

  In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to vary the reel stop control according to the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of symbols of the AT start appearance is determined according to the player's stop operation at the start of the specific section. Reel rotation can be stopped to display.

  Further, in the pachislot machine 1, the reel stop control may be varied according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. In other words, the pachislot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 has a right to transfer to one specific section and the one specific section The reel stop control may be made different when the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the right to transition to one specific section is granted and when the right to transition to another specific section is granted, when the same combination is determined as an internal winning combination What is necessary is just to provide a rotation stop initial setting table so that the reel stop control information used may differ.

As a result, the reel stop control can be made different according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination.For example, when shifting to a specific section that is more advantageous for the player and when shifting to another specific section Thus, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section can be varied. From the player's point of view, since the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, the player will have a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The fun of gaming is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, although the winning probability of the internal winning combination varies depending on the bonus state and the RT gaming state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

  Here, in recent years, there is also known a pachislot machine in which another reel (hereinafter referred to as “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter referred to as “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of the internal lottery. ing. For example, a pachislot machine having three reels, the above-described reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, as the first main reel, and a reel provided in a single row on the right side of the reel 3R is known as the second main reel. . The reel whose stop control varies depending on the result of the transfer lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

  In the case where the stop control of the second main reel is changed according to the result of the transfer lottery, the main control board 71, in the game in which the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed, according to the operation of the start lever 6, the first main reel The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. When the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel in accordance with the result of lottery transfer to the specific section. Specifically, when winning a lottery for shifting to a specific section, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that symbols that are not displayed when not winning can be displayed. In this way, when the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the lottery transition to the specific section, the main control board 71 thereafter starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. Good. Further, a plurality of second main reels may be provided instead of one.
Thus, by separating the stop operation for the transition lottery result of the specific section and the stop operation for the internal lottery result, both can be enjoyed and the player can easily understand the game characteristics.

<Control when changing settings>
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, control at the time of setting change will be described. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a new set value is set (when the setting is changed), the main control board 71 performs a role related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the standby section winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachislot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag, during the specific section, or during the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. .
Note that the case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to a case where the setting value is changed from a setting 1 to a setting 6 or a different setting value. The case of resetting the value (so-called re-setting to the same setting) is also included.

  On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the combination related to the bonus carried over when the RAM is cleared during the flag, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. When the game state is shifted to the normal section and the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the transition lottery is cleared.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the amusement store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear the specific section while changing the set value, so that a variety of options can be given to the amusement store side regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

  The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 69), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 69). It can be carried out.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment will be described. In addition, about the pachislot machine 1 of 3rd Embodiment, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and control similar to the pachislot machine 1 of 1st Embodiment or 2nd Embodiment. In addition, the “specific section” described in the second embodiment is referred to as an “advantageous section” in the third embodiment, and a game state that takes into account so-called navigation and effect forms is referred to as a “departure state”. In addition, when using different terms with the same or similar elements as those described in the first to third embodiments, the terms used in the first to third embodiments are appended in parentheses at the end of the terms. The following features of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment can be similarly applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments.

[Game flow of pachislot machine of the third embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 100 is a transition flow of the ball-out state of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a process during MB operation in the payout state. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a summary of the game appearance state and the game state in a list. 101 and 102 are controlled by the main control board 71.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the payout state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned on by the control of the main control board 71. Is done. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section due to the light-off state, while notifying the player that he / she is staying in the advantageous section due to the lighting state. However, in the present embodiment, even when the advantageous section lamp stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is possible to suppress notification of necessary stop operation information to the player by the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are a state to be (unacceptable) and a state to be allowed. As shown in FIG. 101, the MB operates in accordance with the MB winning in any of the normal section and the advantageous section. In this embodiment, a short MB (abbreviated as “SMB” for short) that is always won in any pushing order at the time of winning and ends in 1G with a medal payout exceeding one piece as an end condition, is basically a win. There is a long MB (abbreviated as “LMB” for short) that wins through an inter-flag state and ends by digesting a plurality of games using over 81 medal payouts as an end condition. The LMB has no setting difference for the winning probability, and the SMB has the setting difference for the winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

  In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs various lottery processes to control the payout state. The various lottery processes for controlling such a lottery state are roughly divided into a normal process and a common process. Divided. Note that the main control board 71 performs only normal processing during the normal section, does not perform common processing, and can perform both normal processing and common processing during the advantageous section.

  The normal process is a process performed according to the internal winning combination or the displayed symbol combination. In this embodiment, when the main control board 71 determines the internal winning combination, various lotteries are selected according to the determined internal winning combination. Process and control the appearance of the ball. This normal process is a lottery process that is performed with the same probability regardless of the set value when a combination having no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination for the probability determined as an internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 102, while the LMB is in operation, various normal processes are performed according to the internal winning combination. However, the normal process based on the internal winning combination is not performed during the SMB operation. This is because the LMB has no setting difference in the winning probability, so there is no setting difference in the probability that the LMB is in operation, but the SMB stays in the SMB in operation because there is a setting difference in the winning probability. There is a setting difference in the probability of doing. Since the normal process is a process performed without a setting difference, a setting difference appears at a time when the probability of staying in the state is different. Therefore, the main control board 71 does not perform the normal process while the SMB is operating.

  Further, the common process is a process performed when the bonus is activated. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs various lottery processes when the MB is activated, and controls the payout state. This common process is a lottery process performed at the same probability regardless of the set value when the MB is activated. The MB operation time refers to the timing at which the MB (bonus) is activated when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed (see S235 in FIG. 62 of the first embodiment). Unlike the above-described common process, the main control board 71 can execute various lottery processes by the common process both when the SMB is activated and when the LMB is activated.

  In the normal section, “normal” is executed as the appearance state. As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “normal” is an initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and all variables related to the advantageous interval are cleared after the advantageous interval described later is completed. Transition to the state. In “normal”, navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). Winning with an advantageous section transition lottery results in an advantageous section winning. There are “normal winning” and “ART winning” in the advantageous section winning. In the case of “normal winning”, the game shifts to “normal advantage”, which will be described later, from the next game. On the other hand, in the case of “ART winning”, the state shifts to “ART precursor”, which will be described later. The advantageous section transition lottery will be described later.

  In the advantageous section, “usually advantageous”, “SCZ”, “ART precursor”, “MB_HCZ”, “addition-specific zone”, “ART”, and “ending” can be executed as the main payout states. The advantageous section is a state in which a navigation (bell navigation) that can win a push order small combination of the maximum payout number (in this embodiment, “push order bell” or “batting order bell”) can be generated, and corresponds to the advantageous section. It cannot be terminated until a privilege is granted. In this embodiment, the privilege corresponding to the advantageous section refers to the occurrence of a bell navigation (winning of the pressing order bell) or the operation of a bonus (MB). In other words, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section is terminated until at least one of the termination conditions such as the occurrence of the bell navigation (winning of the pressing order bell) or the operation of the bonus (MB) is satisfied. Can not. When the above end condition is satisfied, an advantageous section end lottery to be described later is executed, and “normal” is shifted according to the lottery result. Depending on the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery, the advantageous section may be continued. However, in the present embodiment, except for the case where the MB is activated, the bell navigation is not generated (the notification suppression is not generated) even when the pushing section bell is hit, for example, until 100G elapses after the advantageous section is started. State, also referred to as “standby section”). In other words, in the present embodiment, in principle, the first bell navigation can be generated according to the winning of the push order bell on condition that the predetermined number of games (100G) has elapsed without the MB being activated since the start of the advantageous section ( Bell navigation generation possible state, notification permissible state). As an exception, even if the predetermined number of games (100G) has not elapsed since the start of the advantageous section, if the MB is won, the bell navigation generation possible state (notification allowable state) is entered. It should be noted that regardless of the number of games, the winning of the pressing order bell may be managed with a flag, and the non-bell navigation generation state and the bell navigation generation possible state may be controlled according to the presence or absence of the flag and the number. Further, in this embodiment, when the advantageous section is reached, for example, 1500G is reached, even if the advantageous section ending condition (push order bell win, bonus (MB) operation) is not satisfied, Limit processing that is forcibly terminated and shifts to a normal section (“normal” state) is executed. For example, in the state of ART, when 1500G is reached from the start of the advantageous section, the limit process is executed even if the remaining number of games of ART remains. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with the ART, and the normal section is entered.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “normally advantageous” is shifted to “normally winning” due to the advantageous section lottery in “normal”. “Normal advantage” is also transferred when a lottery result that is continued at the advantageous section end lottery at the end of “ART” is obtained, or when the remaining “0G” is not achieved in ART “SCZ” and will be described later. To do. In “normally advantageous”, an SCZ lottery and an ART lottery described later are executed. When winning the SCZ lottery, the state shifts from “normally advantageous” to the “SCZ” state described later, and when winning the ART lottery, the state shifts from “normally advantageous” to the “ART precursor” state described later.

  “Normally advantageous” includes normal modes having different “ART” winning probabilities of the ART lottery such as “low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, and “next warning”. The type of the normal mode is initially determined by an advantageous section initial normal mode lottery which will be described later when “normal winning” is obtained by advantageous section lottery in “normal”. In the normal mode in “normally advantageous”, the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and the mode is basically promoted to the mode having a high ART lottery winning probability or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result.

  “Normally advantageous” includes SCZ modes having different “SCZ” winning probabilities such as “low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, and “high accuracy D”. . The type of the SCZ mode is “low probability” at the beginning, and is promoted, dropped or maintained by the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during “normally advantageous”. In the present embodiment, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during “normally advantageous” includes the SCZ mode transition lottery performed according to the winning combination, the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during MB operation, and the progress during “normally advantageous” There is an SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated when the specified number of games is reached when the number of games reaches the specified number. Here, in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed in accordance with the winning combination, the SCZ mode is basically dropped or maintained in a mode with a low “SCZ” winning probability, and in the SCZ mode transition lottery performed during MB operation, In particular, the SCZ mode is promoted or maintained to a mode having a high winning probability of “SCZ”.

  Also, the SCZ mode transition lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games is executed when the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches 20G, 40G, 80G, for example, and is promoted or maintained to a mode with a high “SCZ” winning probability. Is done. Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches 120G, the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), and the winning probability in the SCZ lottery and ART lottery increases from the beginning. In addition, after the “Hamari Ceiling” which becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), an advantageous section end lottery (see FIG. 122), which will be described later, which triggers the transition from “normally advantageous” to “normal” is performed. It is desirable that there be no “ART” win. By taking such remedy measures, it is possible to give a benefit to a player who has reduced the number of medals by proceeding with about 120 games without substantially winning the push bell or MB. Unfortunately, even if the push order bell or MB could not be pulled (winning) in the “normally advantageous” state, the game can be advanced with a sense of expectation to reach the “Humari Ceiling”. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating. The number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” refers to the number of games that have elapsed from the transition from “normal” to “normally advantageous” until the transition to “ART” or “normal”. At this time, it may shift to “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ” before shifting to “ART” or “normal”, but the number of elapsed games in this “SCZ” and the number of elapsed games in “MB_HCZ” It may be included in the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous”, or may not be included. When the number of elapsed games in “SCZ” and the number of elapsed games in “MB_HCZ” are not included, “SCZ” and “MB_HCZ” are included in “normally advantageous” after “SCZ” and “MB_HCZ” have ended. It is also possible to take over the number of elapsed games that have been counted up to the time of transition and count the number of elapsed games that are “normally advantageous”, or to newly count the number of elapsed games that are “normally advantageous” from the beginning Good.

  Further, in the “Humari ceiling” mode (high accuracy D), only “ART” may be lottery or only “SCZ” may be lottery. In addition, the probability of winning “ART” or “SCZ” is higher than that in each normal mode and SCZ mode, and it is difficult to win “ART” or “SCZ” by reaching the “Hamari ceiling”. It is desirable to prevent it from occurring in order to increase the interest of the game. In addition, even if “SCZ” is won and “SCZ” is failed, it is possible to return to the “Hamari Ceiling” mode (high accuracy D), and to provide benefits beyond the “ART” winning section. It is desirable to ensure. In addition, when “SCZ” is won in the “Hamari Ceiling” mode (high accuracy D) in which benefits beyond “ART” are confirmed, the number of games until “ART”, which is a medal increase section, is started as a result. However, if “ART” is won via “SCZ”, ART is started from the “additional special zone” described later, so it is consumed during “SCZ” of about 5 games. Even if medals are considered, the expected value of medals that can be earned is higher than when directly winning “ART”, so even if “ART” is confirmed, medals are reduced by extra chance games. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Furthermore, in the “ordinary advantage”, the MB winning probability described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning an MB is high before reaching 100G. Then, when the MB is won, the bell navigator can be generated, and after the MB operation is completed, an advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the state shifts to “normal” according to the lottery result. In short, if the game shifts to “ordinary advantage” and exceeds the predetermined number of games (100G), it becomes possible to generate a bell navigation, but there is a possibility of winning in a game in which MB is established before reaching 100G or through an inter-flag state. Since it becomes higher, the average number of staying games of “normally advantageous” is about 25G. In addition, as will be described in detail later, the MB symbol combination is drawn in 1 (in any push order, so as not to capture the winning rate of MB by the player intentionally delaying the winning of MB) It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and the reel stop control so that a winning is possible even if the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is stopped at the timing.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “SCZ” shifts when “SCZ lottery” is achieved by SCZ lottery in “normally advantageous”. “SCZ” is a chance zone (CZ) that is relatively easy to win “ART” described later. “SCZ” includes types such as “normal” and “legend” that have different ART lottery winning probabilities depending on the SCZ mode. For example, when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy A” and the type is “legend”, the ART winning probability is higher than when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy A” and the type is “normal”. Basically, the ART winning probability is higher in the case of “Legend” than in the case of “Normal”. The type of SCZ is determined by lottery without any combination. When the ART lottery is won during “SCZ”, the state shifts from “SCZ” to the “additional special zone” described later. When the prescribed number of games (5G) of “SCZ” is finished without winning the ART lottery, the process shifts to “normally advantageous”. Note that in “SCZ”, the winning push-bell navigation is basically not performed. The type of “SCZ” may be determined with reference to the internal winning combination of the unit game (game) won in the SCZ lottery. For example, when “SCZ” is won when “Strong Bell” is won, “Legend” may be selected more easily than when winning other types. For the type of “SCZ”, the SCZ mode at the time of “SCZ” win may be referred to. “Low accuracy”, “High accuracy A”, “High accuracy B”, “High accuracy C”, “High accuracy” The selection rate of “Legend” may be different for each SCZ mode such as “D” or a part thereof. In addition, in the “Hamari Ceiling” mode (high accuracy D) described above, a privilege such as “Legend” is established and a relief measure is provided for the player who has reduced the number of medals. It is good also as a specification which suppresses a fall. During "SCZ", an ART lottery will be performed with reference to the internal winning combination for 5 games. However, in the event of a loss, the internal winning combination may be considered as a non-winning state. It is good. In addition, the ART lottery may be performed with reference to at least one of the internal winning combination or the stoppage. When performing the ART lottery based on the stop event, the player can entertain the reel event, and when performing the ART lottery based on the internal winning combination, the control load on the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “ART precursor” shifts by becoming an ART win by ART lottery in “normal” or “normally advantageous”. “ART precursor” shifts to “ART” through the ART preparation state after the prescribed number of games is exhausted. However, when the normal mode is staying in “special” and has shifted to “ART precursor” by ART winning, it shifts to “ART” via an “additional special zone” described later. In “ART precursor”, rank-up lottery of initial modes of various modes used during ART from the start is executed. Since various modes used during ART are basically more advantageous to the player as the rank is higher, if the rank can be raised in the rank-up lottery in “ART omen”, immediately after the start of “ART” The various modes (initial mode) are advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, “MB_HCZ” shifts by winning an LMB regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. In “MB_HCZ”, an HCZ mode promotion lottery and an unquestioned ART lottery are executed. In the HCZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous for the player. When the operation of the LMB is completed after winning the ART lottery, the state shifts from “MB_HCZ” to “ART” through a state of “addition specialization zone” described later. When the operation of the LMB is completed without winning the ART lottery, a transition is made from “MB_HCZ” to the original appearance state (for example, “normal” or “normally advantageous”).

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, the “addition-specific zone” is a period during which ART is easily added, and the number of games specified as “ART Predictor” or “ART Predictor” in “SCZ” or “MB_HCZ” Transition after completion. Although details are omitted, in the present embodiment, a plurality of “additional specialization zones” are provided, and in the “additional specialization zone”, an additional lottery of the number of ART games is executed according to the type of specialization of the addition. The type of “additional specialization zone” is arbitrary, and for example, a plurality of specialization zones with different average additions may be provided, and a plurality of specialization zones with different addition characteristics may be provided. It is good also as providing. After the specified number of games in the “Additional Specialized Zone” is exhausted, if the winning lottery is won, if there is a stock of the specialized additional zone, it will be in the “Specialized Additional Zone” state, and if there is no additional specialized zone stock, “ART” Migrate to

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “ART” is a so-called ART state, and shifts from “addition-specific zone” or “ART precursor”. “ART” includes modes such as an extra lottery such as an ART mode, a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode, which have different degrees of advantage, and an extra lottery and various mode transition lotteries are executed. “ART” is given, for example, 100G as the initial number of games, and the number of games is added according to the result of the extra lottery. At the end of the number of “ART” games, an advantageous section lottery that does not require a winning combination is executed. If the lottery result is “Continue”, it shifts to “Normally advantageous”, whereas if it is “Ended”, it shifts to “Normal”. To do.

  The ART mode includes a plurality of modes such as “Mode 0”, “Mode A”, “Mode B”, and “Mode C”, which have different degrees of advantage, such as extra lottery during ART, and basically “Mode 0”. Is the most disadvantageous ART mode, and an extra lottery in the order of “Mode A”, “Mode B”, and “Mode C” is advantageous (“Mode C” is most advantageous). During the ART, an ART mode transition lottery is executed, and the ART mode shifts according to the result of the transition lottery. The transition to the ART mode is basically to maintain the current ART mode or to fall to an ART mode lower than the current ART mode (from “Mode C” to “Mode B”, “ Fall from “mode B” to “mode A”, or fall from “mode A” to “mode 0” (may include two or more stages). When the ART mode falls to the lowest “mode 0”, extra lottery or the like during the ART is suppressed. On the other hand, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0” (“mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”), the extra lottery or the like is not suppressed and the extra lottery is performed with a normal probability. To win. In this embodiment, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0”, the winnings are all the same for the extra lottery, but the ease of falling to “mode 0” where the extra lottery is suppressed is easy. Since each ART mode is different, the degree of advantage such as extra lottery in ART is different. The ART mode is maintained or falls in the transition lottery by the normal process, but may be promoted by the transition lottery by the common process at the time of MB operation.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART mode “mode 0”, the extra lottery or the like during the ART is suppressed. However, the extra lottery or the like during the ART may be suppressed instead of being suppressed. In a normal pachislot, the addition during ART is triggered by a so-called rare role, but a weak rare role and a strong rare role may be provided as a rare role that triggers the addition. Here, when prohibiting the extra lottery or the like, it will not be added even when a strong rare role is won, and the player will easily feel dissatisfied. In this regard, by suppressing the extra lottery or the like as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make an extra at the time of winning the “strong bell” that is a strong rare role, and the player does not feel dissatisfied.

  The chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode have a plurality of different degrees of advantage such as extra lottery in the ART of “normal”, “high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy”, and “ultra high accuracy”. Basically, “normal” is the most unfavorable mode, and an extra lottery during ART is advantageous in the order of “high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy”, and “ultra high accuracy” (“ "Super high accuracy" is the most advantageous). The chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode are managed individually. For example, each mode may be a separate mode in a game (chance A mode “high probability”, chance B mode “super” High accuracy, chance C mode “normal”), some modes may be common (chance A mode “high accuracy”, chance B mode “high accuracy”, chance C mode “normal”), all modes May be common (chance A mode “high accuracy”, chance B mode “high accuracy”, chance C mode “high accuracy”). During ART, a transition lottery is executed for each mode, and each mode is shifted individually according to the result of the transition lottery.

  In the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, the timing of the addition in the ART to be managed is different. In the present embodiment, the chance B mode is a mode for managing an extra lottery based on “SP Lip A2” described later (see FIG. 134), and the chance C mode is an extra lottery based on “SP Lip A1” described later. This is a mode for managing (see FIG. 135), and the chance A mode is a mode for managing an extra lottery based on other combinations (see FIG. 133). The present invention is characterized in that individual modes are managed for each opportunity for addition, and the opportunity for addition managed by each mode is not limited to that described above. As an example, a mode for managing an extra based on an internal winning combination, a mode for managing an extra when the period is reached, a mode for managing an extra when the bonus is activated, a mode for managing an extra during the bonus operation, and an extra during the ART preparation It is possible to manage individual modes for each additional opportunity, such as a mode to manage and a mode to manage additions during ART termination standby.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 100 and 102, the appearance state may shift to “ending” during “ART”. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, for example, when reaching 1500G, limit processing is executed to end the advantageous section even if the remaining number of games remains. Although the limit processing itself is performed when 1500 games are reached, since the number of remaining games is managed internally in Pachislot 1, it is possible to know in advance whether 1500 games will be reached in the future before 1500 games arrive. . Therefore, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending” when the total value of the number of games played in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games exceeds a specified value. When the process shifts to “ENDING”, it is determined that limit processing will be performed in the future, so the main control board 71 does not perform all lottery related to the addition. It should be noted that the threshold value of the sum value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section that becomes the trigger for the transition to “ending” can be arbitrarily set. As an example, since the limit process is performed when 1500 games are reached, the threshold value may be 1500 games. However, in this embodiment, when the limit process is performed, the threshold value is set to 1400 games in order to perform an ending effect between 100 games. It is said. Then, when the total value of the number of games played in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games reaches 1400 games, the ending effect of 100 games is performed after the 1400 games are consumed, and limit processing is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 100 and FIG. 102, “MB” is a so-called bonus state, and can be generated in accordance with winning in either the normal section or the advantageous section except when the LMB is in operation. In “MB”, a normal mode transition lottery, an SCZ mode transition lottery, an ART mode transition lottery, a game number extra lottery, and the like are executed.

[Game state controlled by main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the game state by control of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 of 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 103 is a game state transition flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming state includes RT0 and RT1 having a relatively low replay winning probability and RT2 and RT3 having a relatively high replay winning probability. RT0 is an initial state after changing the setting or a gaming state after the end of LMB, and is a state where the player is staying when the appearance state is “normal”. Migrate to RT1 is a state of staying mainly when the appearance state is “normal”. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the RT1 transitions to RT2. RT2 is an intermediate state at the time of transition to RT3, and transitions to RT3 when the RT3 transition lip is displayed. RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the ball appearance state corresponds to “ART” or “additional specialization zone”, and transitions to RT1 through the display of the RT1 transition symbol or the RT1 transition lip.

  The initial state after the setting change is always in the “normal” state at RT0, while in the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change, the gaming state (generally RT1) before the power is turned off. It remains in the “normal” state. In the initial state after changing the setting, if the advantageous section is hit in the “normal” state of RT0, the advantageous section is relatively advantageous compared to the case where the advantageous section is hit in the initial state after the power is turned on without changing the setting. . This will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described.

<Pattern arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions.

  Symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

  The types of symbols are “Black BAR”, “Red BAR”, “Red 7”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Replay C”, “Bell A”, “Bell B”, “Bell C” And “Bell D”.

  The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 104 assigns the symbol located at the middle stage of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected (the symbol passing through the middle stage of the display window 4) to the symbol position “0”, and the reel 3L. Correspondences in which symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the 3C and 3R rotation directions are defined.

  In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Also, as shown in FIG. 104, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 104 represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are “Black BAR”, “Red BAR”, “Red 7”, “Replay A”, “Replay B”, “Replay C”, “Bell A” as described above. ”,“ Bell B ”,“ Bell C ”and“ Bell D ”.

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “black BAR” symbol (symbol code 1). Similarly, each symbol of “red BAR” to “bell D” (symbol codes 2 to 10). Also, “00000010” to “00000101” are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table is a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the symbol combination is displayed, and when the symbol combination is displayed. Stipulates the correspondence with the benefits (number of medals paid out).

  In this embodiment, a winning combination is determined when the symbol combination displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination (combination) defined in the symbol combination table. When it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given privileges such as paying out medals, replaying (replaying), and bonus game (acting equipment continuous operation device). In addition, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line does not coincide with any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “displacement”. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “missing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination of “missing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and an item “displacement” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “disappearance”.

  Here, in this embodiment, when the number of medals provided for a unit game is “2” (at the time of 2 BET), the left column of 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4 Two lines are effective: the bottom line connecting the lower row, the lower row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right row, and the mound line connecting the lower row of the left row, the middle row of the middle row, and the lower row of the right row When the number of medals offered for a unit game is “3” (when 3 BET), the middle row of the left column of the 3 × 3 symbols displayed in the display window 4 and the middle One line of the center line connecting the middle row of the row and the middle row of the right row is an effective line. Note that only 2BET games are possible during SMB operation, and only 3BET games are possible during LMB operation and MB non-operation.

  In the data column in the symbol combination table, information for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line is defined. Specifically, in the data column, a “storage area” in which data of a corresponding symbol combination is stored and a “data (bit corresponding to a symbol combination in 1-byte data) stored in the storage region” Data for designating “)” is defined.

  The combination defined in the symbol combination table means a symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. Each combination is defined with a combination name corresponding to the role of the combination and the type of symbol constituting the combination.

  The number of payouts defined in the symbol combination table defines the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding symbol combination (combination) is displayed. The content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination.

  Referring to FIG. 105, for example, combination names “S_red CL lip — 01” to “S red CL lip — 18” are combinations of symbols related to “W uniform lip”. More specifically, the combination names “S_red CL lip — 01” to “S_red CL lip — 18” can be displayed by arranging three symbols “red BAR” and “red 7” in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

  Note that, in the combination of symbols related to the combination name “S_red CL lip — 01” in “W uniform lip”, both the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” are displayed in a straight line. In other combinations of symbols, the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” are not displayed in a straight line. This is because the symbol “red BAR” and the symbol “red 7” may not be able to be stopped and displayed depending on the timing of the stop operation due to the arrangement of symbols arranged on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol combinations other than “S_red CL lip — 01” indicate symbol combinations that are displayed instead when a so-called eye pressing operation is not appropriate. The same applies to other symbol combinations such as “red BAR lip”.

  The combination names “S_Red XU Lip” to “S_Red XD Lip_06” are combinations of symbols related to “Red BAR Lip”, and three symbols “Red BAR” can be displayed in a straight line. It is a combination. The combination names “S_Red 7CL Lip_01” and “S_Red 7CL Lip_02” are combinations of symbols related to “W-equipped Lip”, and both the symbols “Red BAR” and “Red 7” are linear. This is a combination of symbols that can be displayed side by side. The combination names “S_Red 7XU Lip_01” to “S_Red 7XD Lip_04” are combinations of symbols related to “Red 7 Lip”, and three symbols “Red 7” can be displayed in a straight line. It is a combination of symbols.

  106 and 107, and the combination names “S_common lip 1_01” to “S_common lip 3_04” are combinations of symbols related to “red BAR ringing”, and the symbol “red BAR” is linear. Although two can be displayed side by side, three are combinations of symbols that do not line up. Similarly, the combination names “S_common lip 4_01” to “S_common lip 6_03” are combinations of symbols related to “red 7 beat”, and two symbols “red 7” can be displayed in a straight line. Three are combinations of symbols that cannot be arranged.

  That is, in this embodiment, a combination of symbols in which three symbols “red BAR” can be displayed in a straight line is called “red BAR lip”, and two symbols “red BAR” are displayed in a straight line. A combination of symbols that you can get, but the three are not lined up, is called "red BAR inscription". Similarly, a combination of symbols in which three symbols “red 7” can be displayed in a straight line is called “red 7 lip”, and two symbols “red 7” can be displayed in a straight line. The combination of symbols that do not line up is called “red 7 red”. Further, a combination of symbols in which three symbols “red BAR” and symbol “red 7” can be displayed side by side in a straight line is referred to as “W uniform lip”.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 109, an internal lottery table referred to when determining an internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each gaming state and defines lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 109 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of RT0 to RT3, MB inside, and MB (operation).

  In the present embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred.

  Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the combination to which the lottery is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random values that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination change according to the type of RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 109, it can be seen that the types and winning probabilities related to replays determined as internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. By the way, within RT0 to RT3 or MB, push order bells ("F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_4 selection bell 4B (No. 41)") have an internal winning probability of about 1/4. It is decided as a role.

  The SMB is a bonus combination having a setting difference, and can be determined as a single winning combination of “SMB (No. 48)”. On the other hand, the LMB is a bonus combination with no setting difference, and can be determined as an overlapping winning combination of “LMB + F_Rip Lip B (No. 49)” or “LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50)”. Here, only the internal lottery table for setting 1 is shown in FIG. 109, but an SMB having a setting difference in RT0 to RT3 is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/18 in setting 1, and set. 6 is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15. In addition, when SMB and LMB are taken into account, MB (“SMB (No. 48)” to “LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50)”) in RT0 to RT3 is an internal winning with a probability of 1/17 in setting 1. In the setting 6, the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/15.

  In addition, “SMB” is a single winning combination and a symbol combination corresponding to “SMB” is drawn 1 (in any push order, no matter what timing the stop button 7L, 7C, 7R is stopped, The symbol arrangement and reel stop control are designed so that it can be won as long as it is not hindered, and it will always be carried over because it wins in the established game (game won for the first time instead of carry-over from the bonus non-winning state) Absent. “LMB” is won internally in duplicate with the re-gamer (replay) in the established game, and the re-gamer wins a higher priority than “LMB”. It moves to the inside of MB which is a state. Since the symbol combination corresponding to “LMB” is also drawn 1, the winning combination is surely won unless a small combination or replaying combination that wins preferentially over the bonus in the inter-flag state is established at the same time. By using such a role structure, the player intentionally avoids winning MBs and delays the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, thereby increasing the arrival rate to the “Humali Ceiling”. It is possible to prevent the capture method and prevent unexpected damage from occurring on the hall side.

  In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 109, the lottery values of “F_RT1 lip 1 (No. 1)” to “F_common lip (No. 24)” in the MB and during MB (operation) are omitted. However, lottery values corresponding to the RT state at that time are defined in the MB and in the MB. In addition, lottery values of “F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_1 single combination (No. 47)” are omitted during MB, but during MB operation, regardless of internal lottery processing. All small roles ("F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_1 single role (No. 47)") are won.

  As described above, in the MB, for the replay combination, the winning probability of the current RT state (that is, the lottery value shown in FIG. 109) is inherited and the lottery is performed, while the small combination is not performed. , All the small roles can be determined as internal winning roles. As shown in FIG. 102, the LMB takes over the internal medium RT state that is shifted by the internal winning of the LMB combination (No. 49, 50 in FIG. 109) during the LMB operation, and the SMB performs the SMB combination (No. 109 in FIG. 109). .48), the RT state of RT0 to RT3, which is the RT state in the game internally won, is taken over during the SMB operation. As shown in FIG. 103, the transition to RT0 (low RT) is made after the operation of the LMB is completed, but the SBM does not perform the transition of the RT state in any of the internal winning, the operation start, and the operation end. By not shifting from high RT to low RT with SMB having a small number of acquisitions and a high probability of winning, it is easy to maintain high RT so that the rate of increase in the number of balls due to "ART" is not reduced. .

  Further, the method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB is not limited to the above. For example, in the MB, the internal lottery table corresponding to the current RT state is referred to (that is, the internal lottery table for the MB is not defined), and all the winning numbers described above ("F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34 ) ”To“ F_1 single winning combination (No. 47) ”), it is possible to determine whether or not the winning combination is based on the specified lottery value. 1A (No. 34) "to" F_1 single combination (No. 47) ") may be further determined as internal winning combinations. Thereby, the data capacity concerning an internal lottery table can be reduced.

  Further, as a method of determining the internal winning combination in the MB, all the small combinations ("F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_1") are performed without using the internal lottery table shown in FIG. “Combination (No. 47)”) may be determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the data capacity and processing load can be further reduced.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 110 to 111 are tables showing the correspondences between combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the active line in each internal winning combination when each winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination.

  FIG. 110 shows a correspondence relationship between the winning combination and the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state in normal time (that is, in a state where the game state of the main control board 71 is not in the MB or in the MB (operation) state (see FIG. 102)). FIG. When the main control board 71 determines the internal winning combination, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are displayed so that the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 110 is displayed based on the determined internal winning combination and the order of the stop operation (pushing order). To control.

  For example, when “F_normal lip B (No. 14)” is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is “left 1st” of the left reel 3L (left middle right or left and right middle). When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, the symbol combination related to “Replay” (see the contents column in FIG. 106) is displayed, and the first stop operation is an operation (middle left / right or middle right / left) on the middle reel 3C. When a stop operation is performed in a certain “middle 1st” pressing order, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR turning” is displayed, and the first stop operation is an operation on the right reel 3L (right left middle or right middle left) When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “Right 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 turn” is displayed.

  When “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in the order of “left 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “Middle 1st”, the symbol combination related to “Red BAR Lip” is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “Right 1st”, “Red 7 turn” A combination of symbols is displayed. Similarly, when “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)” is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “left 1st”, the combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed, When a stop operation is performed in the order of “middle 1st”, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR turn” is displayed. When a stop operation is performed in the order of “right 1st”, “red 7 lip” is displayed. Such symbol combinations are displayed.

  As described above, during ART, the extra lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is managed in the chance B mode, and the extra lottery based on “SP Lip A1” is managed in the chance C mode. The extra lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is performed when “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)” is determined as the internal winning combination. 71 and / or the sub control board 72 notifies (instructs) the pressing order of “medium 1st”, and displays the symbol combination related to “red BAR lip”. Similarly, the extra lottery based on “SP Lip A1” is performed when “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination, and when this extra lottery is won, pachislot 1 The main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 informs (instructs) the pressing order of “Right 1st”, and displays the symbol combination related to “Red 7 Lip”.

  On the other hand, when there is an instruction of a symbol to be aimed at, the game will become monotonous if the symbols are always aligned, so when “F_Normal Lip B (No. 14)” is determined as an internal winning combination, Alternatively, when the extra lottery based on “SP Lip A1” or the extra lottery based on “SP Lip A2” is not won, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot 1 “red” with a predetermined probability. A notification is made (instructed) of the pressing order in which the symbol combinations related to “BAR Skill” and “Red 7 Skill” are displayed, and the symbols are aligned. When the pattern matching is not performed, the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachi-slot 1 informs (instructs) the pressing order of “left 1st” and instructs the “replay”. The combination of is displayed.

  In addition, when “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the combination of symbols displayed differs according to the pressing order, and “Left 1st When the stop operation is performed in the order of "", the combination of symbols related to "Replay" is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in the order of "1st" or "1st right", A combination of symbols (“red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, “W aligned lip”) is displayed without displaying the combination (“red BAR ring” “red 7 ring”). As will be described later, in the present embodiment, when an extra lottery is won during ART, the addition may not be notified immediately, but the additional may be notified after being temporarily held. ) ”To“ F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24) ”are used when the addition is notified later. For example, if the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 notifies the addition of 50 games held, “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP” are used as internal winning combinations. When “Lip B3 (No. 24)” is determined, the pressing order in which the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Lip” is displayed (instructed), and the addition of 100 games held is notified. When notifying (instructing) the pressing order in which the symbol combination related to “Red BAR Lip” is displayed and notifying the addition of 150 games held, the symbol combination related to “W Match Lip” is displayed. Inform (instruct) the pressing order.

  In addition, combinations of symbols that can be displayed when other winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations in normal times are as shown in FIG. 110, and winning combinations and stoppages in the MB or during MB (operation) The correspondence relationship with the displayed symbol combination is as shown in FIG.

[Game flow during non-ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the flow of a game during non-ART (“normal” or “normally advantageous”) will be described. As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the pachislot 1 has a game property that basically plays a game from non-ART to ART. As shown in FIG. 112A and FIG. 100, in the pachislot 1, the transition route from non-ART to ART is the ART direct route that directly transitions from non-ART to ART, and ART from non-ART via SCZ. There is a route through SCZ that shifts to and a route through MB_HCZ that transitions from non-ART to MB via MB_HCZ. In the following, the flow between the ART direct route and the SCZ route will be described.

  FIG. 112 (B) is a diagram showing a game flow of the direct ART route. As shown in FIG. 100, in this embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an advantageous section transition lottery during “normal” (normal section), and shifts from “normal” to an advantageous section when winning this transition lottery. To do. In this advantageous section transition lottery, the main control board 71 also draws the type of the advantageous section of the transition destination. For example, when ART is determined as the transition destination, the normal control board 71 directly shifts from ART to the advantageous section ART. Transition.

  On the other hand, when the normal advantage is determined as the transfer destination in the advantageous zone transition lottery, the normal advantage of the advantageous zone is shifted from “normal”. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery during normal advantage, and shifts from normal advantage to ART when winning this transfer lottery. In the present embodiment, when ART is determined as the transfer destination in the advantageous section transition lottery performed during “normal” in this way, or when the ART lottery performed during normal advantage is won, the non-ART is directly changed to ART. Transition (route that goes directly to ART).

  The ART lottery that is normally advantageous is performed based on the normal mode. The normal mode includes a plurality of modes such as “low probability”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, and “next warning”, and the winning probability of the ART lottery is different. Specifically, the winning probability of the ART lottery is the highest in “super heaven” in the normal mode, “heaven” and “special” are the next highest, “heaven ready” is the next highest, and “low probability” is Lowest. The “next sign” is a normal mode in which it is determined that the ART lottery will be won. The normal mode that is normally advantageous can be changed arbitrarily. For example, the main control board 71 performs a normal mode transfer lottery according to the winning combination during the normal advantage, and changes the normal mode according to the lottery result. be able to.

  Further, when the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode is compared with the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in “normal”, the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in “normal” Is slightly higher than the winning probability of the ART lottery based on the normal mode “heaven preparation”. Therefore, in this embodiment, depending on the normal mode, the winning probability of the ART lottery in the advantageous section may be lower than the probability that the ART is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery in “normal” (for example, Normal mode "low accuracy" "heaven preparation").

  Note that, as described above, when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120 games (Hamari ceiling), the SCZ mode becomes a dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D). Here, during normal advantage after the ceiling, the main control board 71 performs the ART lottery that is normally advantageous based on the SCZ mode “high accuracy D” regardless of the normal mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 115 to be described later, the ART lottery based on the SCZ mode “high probability D” has a higher winning probability than the normal mode “super heaven”.

  FIG. 112 (C) is a diagram showing a game flow of a route via the SCZ. As shown in FIG. 100, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an SCZ lottery while it is normally advantageous, and shifts to the SCZ when the SCZ lottery is won. Further, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery during SCZ, and shifts to ART when this ART lottery is won. In this way, when an SCZ lottery performed in an advantageous manner is won and then an ART lottery performed during the SCZ is won, a transition is made from the non-ART to the ART via the SCZ (route via the SCZ). On the other hand, when the SCZ is completed without winning the ART lottery performed during the SCZ, a transition is advantageously made from the SCZ. Note that the SCZ ends when the specified number of games (5G) has passed without winning the ART lottery.

  The SCZ lottery that is normally advantageous and the ART lottery during the SCZ are performed based on the SCZ mode. The SCZ mode has a plurality of modes such as “low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, and “high accuracy D”, and each of the SCZ lottery and ART lottery The winning probability is different. Specifically, the winning probability of the SCZ lottery and the ART lottery is the highest in the “high-precision D”, the “high-precision C” is the next highest, and the “high-precision B” is the next highest in the SCZ mode. “High accuracy A” is the next highest, and “low accuracy” is the lowest. Although these SCZ modes can be changed arbitrarily, in this embodiment, the main control board 71 performs SCZ mode transfer lottery according to the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous and the winning combination that is normally advantageous. The SCZ mode is shifted according to the lottery result.

[Various data tables used for ART direct route]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in the ART direct route will be described. Various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to these various data tables.

<Normal _ advantageous section transition lottery table>
First, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on an internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the “normal” state (normal section). As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous zone transition lottery table, reference items include “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance”, “medium chance, beat “Lip”, “Strong Bell”, “Decisive Role”, “LMB” are defined, and lottery values of “non-winning”, “ordinary advantage”, “specific role”, “LMB” indicating the lottery result for each reference item are It is prescribed. As the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 109, “batting order bell” corresponds to “F_4 option bell 1A (No. 34)” to “F_4 option bell 4B (No. 41)”, and “common bell, 1 sheet” , “F_common bell A (No. 45) to F_common bell B (No. 46)”, “F_1 single role (No. 47)”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance” Equivalent to “F_Common Lip (No. 25)”, “F_Chance Lip (No. 26)”, “F_Weak Chance Role (No. 44)”. (No. 43) ”,“ F_Turning Lip A (No. 31) ”to“ F_Tearing Lip B (No. 32) ”, and“ Strong Bell ”is“ F_Strong Bell (No. 42) ”. “Finalize” is “F_Black BAR Lip (No. 37)”, “F_Red BAR Lip” No. 28) ”,“ F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29) ”to“ F_Red 7 Lip B (No. 30) ”,“ LMB ”is“ LMB + F_Rip Lip B (No. 49) ” "To" LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50) ". The “specific combination” as the lottery result serves as a trigger for specific processing as a “determined combination”. In addition, “batting order lip”, “SP lip A1”, “SP lip A2”, “SP lip B1”, and “SP lip B2” may be used as reference items in other lottery tables. Are equivalent to “Lip 1 in F_RT1 (No. 1)” to “F_Maintenance Lip 5 (No. 19)”, “SP Lip A1” corresponds to “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)”, “SP Lip A2” corresponds to “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)”, “SP Lip B1” corresponds to “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)”, and “SP Lip B2” This corresponds to “F_SP Lip B2 (No. 23)” and “F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)”.

  According to the advantageous section transition lottery using the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, for example, when “winning order bell” is won in the “normal” state, a lottery result of “normally advantageous” is obtained with a probability of 1/256. Based on the lottery result, the next game is in a “normally advantageous” state. Further, for example, when “medium chance” or “slipping lip” is won, a “normally advantageous” lottery result is obtained with a probability of 248/256, and a “normally advantageous” state is determined from the next game based on the lottery result. In addition, the “ART” lottery result may be obtained with a probability of 8/256, and in this case, the state of “ART precursor” is set from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such “ART” is about 3.2% at the time of winning “medium chance, hitting lip”, and is about 12.5% at the time of winning “strong bell”. It is kept lower than the probability of doing.

<Normal _ advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table>
Next, the normal_advantage zone initial normal mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Normal_Advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table shows the normal mode of the initial game in the advantageous section in the first game (unit game) immediately after the transition to “Advantageous section” by winning the advantageous section transition lottery from “Normal” It is a table referred when determining by initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, “common lip, chance lip, weak chance”, “medium chance” , “Rip”, “Strong Bell”, “Decisive Role”, “LMB” are defined, and the types of normal mode indicating the lottery result for each reference item are “low probability”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “Super heaven”, “special”, “next sign” lottery values are defined.

  According to the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, for example, in the first game of “ordinary advantageous”, when the “batting order bell” is won, the probability of “248/256” A “probable” lottery result is obtained, and in the initial game, the “low probability” normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, when the “batting order bell” is won, a lottery result of “heaven preparation” is obtained with a probability of 6/256. In this case, in the first game of “ordinary advantage”, “ It becomes the normal mode of “heaven preparation”. After the first game of “normally advantageous”, the normal mode may be promoted according to the lottery result of the normal mode transition lottery. The normal mode is promoted in the order of “low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, “next warning” (including promotion of two or more levels), and basically promotes. The winning probability of “ART” (see FIG. 115) becomes higher, but in the case of “special” that can be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of “ART” is “super heaven” It is not necessarily higher than the case (see FIG. 115). Also, the winning probability of “ART” when the normal mode is “low” or “heaven ready” in the “normally advantageous” state is set to be lower than the winning probability of “ART” in the “normal” state. (See FIGS. 113 and 115). As a result, immediately after the transition from “normal” to “normally advantageous”, it is more likely that the “ART” is more difficult to win than the “normal” state. This will be described in detail with reference to a normal advantage_ART lottery table to be described later.

<Normal advantage_ART lottery table>
Next, the normal advantage_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Normal advantage_ART lottery table is available for each type of normal mode (“low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”, “precursor”) and SCZ mode “high accuracy D” It is a table that is provided and is referred to when determining the transition to “ART” (“ART winning”) based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, the normal advantage_ART lottery table corresponding to each mode includes, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “ “Chance lip”, “medium chance”, and “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the ART lottery using such a normal advantage_ART lottery table, in the “normal advantage” state, for example, in the “low probability” normal mode, when “weak chance” is won, 1/256 The lottery result of “ART” win is obtained with probability, and then the state shifts to the “ART” state through “ART precursor”.

  Here, when the normal mode is “low probability” or “preparation for heaven”, the probability of winning “ART” takes into account the probability of winning “ART” (“low probability” or “heaven” Preparation “) = 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81%. On the other hand, with reference to FIG. 113, “ART” winning probability (normal time) = 2. It becomes about 5%. That is, in this embodiment, the initial normal mode (mainly “low probability” or “heavenly ready”) that has shifted to “normally advantageous” has a lower probability of winning “ART” than the “normal” state. Therefore, it is more difficult to shift to “ART” immediately after shifting to “normally advantageous” than to “normal”. Thereby, even if it is in the “normal” state, the expectation that it may shift to “ART” without going through “normally advantageous” is raised, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Even if the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is turned off, it is not necessarily the most disadvantageous situation, so let's stop the game when the lamp is turned off. Can be motivated to continue the game. In addition, in amusement halls other than immediately after the opening of the store, a vacant stand is selected from a situation where the predecessor is left in a state where the game is stopped. Even if the above-mentioned device is applied, the number of the stands left in the situation where the advantageous section lamp is turned off tends to be larger, and the advantageous section lamp is turned off in a relatively disadvantageous situation for the model. If it is confirmed, the player may hesitate to start the game, because it may not be necessary to start the game from the most disadvantageous situation. It can be said that it is a player who has a very high willingness to go to the amusement hall and see the model, but if such a player's willingness is cut, the utilization rate will be reduced. As mentioned above, by making the specifications that the advantageous section lamp turn-off situation is not necessarily the most unfavorable in the gaming state of the model, it can be said that it is not the most unfavorable situation for the time being. It is possible to expect the effect of suppressing the decline in the operation rate by making the player feel like going.

[Various data tables used for routes via SCZ]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used in the route via the SCZ will be described. Various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to these various data tables.

<Normal advantage _ SCZ mode transition lottery table when reaching specified game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the normal advantage_specified game arrival SCZ mode transition lottery table will be described. The normal advantageous_specific game arrival SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each normal advantageous number of elapsed games ("20G elapsed", "40G elapsed", "80G elapsed") ) Is a table that is referred to when determining the destination SCZ mode from the SCZ mode. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transition destination SCZ mode) is defined for each current SCZ mode in the SCZ mode transition lottery table when reaching the normal advantage_specified game.

  According to the transition lottery in the SCZ mode using the SCZ mode transition lottery table when reaching the normal advantage_specified game arrival, in the SCZ mode transition lottery when reaching the predetermined game, the more games that have passed during the normal advantage, It is easy to shift to a higher-order SCZ mode. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of elapsed games that are normally advantageous reaches 120G, the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated lottery mode (high accuracy D), and thereafter “high accuracy D” until the shift to ART. There is no transition from. The transition to “high accuracy D” is performed without performing the transition lottery, and the main control board 71 shifts the SCZ mode to “high accuracy D” when the number of elapsed games under normal advantage reaches 120G. .

<Normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table>
Next, the normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. Normally advantageous_SCZ mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”) It is a table referred when determining the transfer destination SCZ mode based on the internal winning combination for each mode. In the normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table corresponding to each mode, “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “ “Medium chance” and “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transfer destination SCZ mode) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the SCZ mode transition lottery using the normal advantage_SCZ mode transition lottery table, the SCZ mode shifts based on the internal winning combination during the normal advantage. In the example shown in FIG. 117, in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination, the SCZ mode is merely dropped or maintained, and is not promoted. In this regard, the SCZ mode may be promoted also in the transition lottery based on the internal winning combination.

<Normal advantage_SCZ lottery table>
Next, the normal advantage_SCZ lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The normal advantageous_SCZ lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the transition to the “SCZ” (“SCZ winning”) based on the SCZ mode in each normally advantageous game. As shown in the figure, the normal advantage_SCZ lottery table includes the current SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D” as reference items. “)” Is defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the SCZ lottery using such a normal advantageous_SCZ lottery table, in the “normally advantageous” state, for example, in the SCZ mode of “high accuracy A”, the winning of “SCZ” is a probability of 24/256. A lottery result is obtained, and then the state shifts to the “SCZ” state. In the example shown in FIG. 118, in the normally advantageous SCZ lottery, the transition to “SCZ” is determined by a uniform lottery regardless of the internal winning combination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, or in addition to a uniform lottery, an SCZ lottery based on the internal winning combination and the SCZ mode may be performed. In addition, when a lottery result of “SCZ” is obtained in the SCZ lottery, the type of “SCZ” (“normal”, “legend”) may be determined by lottery. The lottery result of the type “SCZ” may be different depending on the internal winning combination when the lottery result of “SCZ” is obtained. For example, when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy D”, “legend” can be easily determined, or “legend” can be determined without fail.

<SCZ_ART lottery table>
Next, the SCZ_ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. SCZ_ART lottery table is provided for each type of “SCZ” and SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”, “high accuracy C”, “high accuracy D”) This table is referred to when determining the transition to “ART” (“ART winning”) based on the internal winning combination for each mode. As shown in the figure, the SCZ_ART lottery table includes, as reference items, the type of SCZ (“normal”, “legend”), the type of SCZ mode (“low accuracy”, “high accuracy A”, “high accuracy B”). , “High C”, “High D”), internal winning role (“Battle Order Bell”, “Common Bell, 1 Sheet”, “Common Lip, Fake Clip”, “Weak Chance”, “Chance Lip”, “Medium” “Chance” and “strong bell”) are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the ART lottery using such an SCZ_ART lottery table, for example, in the case of “normal” “SCZ”, when the SCZ mode is “highly accurate D”, if “medium chance” is won, 128/256 The lottery result of “ART” win is obtained with the probability of “,” and then the state shifts to the “ART” state through the “addition special zone”.

<SCZ_SCZ end SCZ mode lottery table>
Next, the SCZ_SCZ end-time SCZ mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ is a table that is referred to when determining the transition destination SCZ mode for each current SCZ mode when “SCZ” is terminated without transition to “ART”. is there. As shown in the figure, in the SCZ_SCZ end-time SCZ mode lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the lottery result (transfer destination SCZ mode) are defined for each current SCZ mode.

  According to the lottery in the SCZ mode using the SCZ mode lottery table at the end of SCZ_SCZ, for example, when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy D”, the SCZ mode is maintained as “high accuracy D”.

<Normal advantage_Lottery end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table will be described. Normal advantage_Advantage section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode (“low accuracy”, “heaven preparation”, “heaven”, “super heaven”, “special”). It is a table referred when determining the end of an advantageous section based on an internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is “next sign”, an advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to “next sign” is not provided to prevent the advantageous section from ending. Further, as described above, even when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy D”, the advantageous section is not terminated. Therefore, when the SCZ mode is “high accuracy D”, the main control board 71 is advantageous regardless of the type of the normal mode. No lottery at the end of the section. As shown in the figure, the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode includes, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak”. “Chance”, “Chance Lip”, “Medium Chance”, “Strong Bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the advantage section end lottery using the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table, after reaching the advantage section, for example, 100G, in the “normal advantage” state, for example, the “low probability” normal mode. In this case, when the “batting order bell” is won, the lottery result of the advantageous section end is obtained with a high probability of 252/256, and the “normally advantageous” state from the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section from the next game is obtained. Transition to the state. On the other hand, for example, even when the “batting order bell” is won in the “low probability” normal mode, the lottery result of the advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being terminated. It should be noted that after the lottery result at the end of the advantageous section is obtained, the game may shift to the “normal” state of the normal section after a predetermined number of games have elapsed. In addition, after obtaining the lottery result at the end of the advantageous section, by providing a transition waiting state for a predetermined number of games until the transition to the “normal” state of the normal section, the advantageous section is continued by winning in the predetermined number of games. It may be possible to perform a continuous effect over a plurality of games such as / and ART winning or losing an advantageous section end, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest is reduced such that the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the continuous production, and the defeat is determined in the middle of the continuous production. It should be noted that the continuous production is configured so that a basic conclusion can be achieved with a number of games that is one or more games shorter than the predetermined number of games waiting to be transferred, and a pattern to be restored in the next game in which a defeat production as a basic conclusion has occurred It may be. For example, if the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of the third stop of the game in which the defeat definite effect has occurred, there is no possibility of continuing the advantageous section or winning the ART in the revival effect, so the willingness to continue the game of the next game is reduced Therefore, it is a consideration to avoid such a situation. A specific example is a case where the predetermined number of games is five, and the content up to the conclusion of the continuous production excluding one game for the revival effect is composed of a maximum of four games and the revival effect is performed in one game. Since the advantageous section lamp is turned off after the player confirms that the revival effect does not occur, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered on the way. When the limiter (limit processing) is activated, a transition waiting state cannot be provided before the transition from “normally advantageous” to “normal” in the normal section. It is preferable to suppress the occurrence of a continuous effect related to continuation and prevent a situation where the continuous effect is interrupted by a limiter.

[Game flow during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the flow of the game during “ART” (more specifically, the flow of the game regarding the addition during ART) will be described. As shown in FIG. 122 (A), in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 specializes to add the number of games to extend the number of games that can continue “ART” and the right to “addition specialization zone”. Two types of addition of zone stock and addition of zone stock are performed during “ART”. Here, as described above, during “ART”, the addition is controlled based on a plurality of modes such as an ART mode, a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode. Hereinafter, the relationship between the mode in “ART” and the addition will be described.

  FIG. 122B is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the ART mode and the addition. As described above, in the ART mode, there are a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage such as an extra lottery in the ART such as “mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, and “mode C”. The initial state of the ART mode at the time of shifting to “ART” is basically “mode A”. However, when shifting to “ART” triggered by “determining role”, “mode B” or “mode C” May start with "." More specifically, when shifting to “ART” triggered by “determined combination 1”, the ART mode starts from “mode B”, and when shifting to “ART” triggered by “determined combination 2”, ART The mode starts from “mode C”. The “determined combination 1” corresponds to “F_Red BAR Lip (No. 28)”, “F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29)”, and “F_Red 7 Lip B (No. 30)”. The “determined combination 2” corresponds to “F_black BAR lip (No. 37)”.

  As shown in FIG. 122 (B), the ART mode has a different expectation of addition, and basically, “mode 0” has little expectation of addition, and “mode A”, “mode B”, “ Mode C ″ is added with a predetermined probability. As described above, when the ART mode is other than “mode 0”, the expectation of the addition is the same, but the ease of falling to “mode 0” is different in each ART mode. , “Mode A”, “Mode B”, and “Mode C” differ in the degree of advantage regarding the addition in “ART”. Of course, it is also possible to vary the degree of advantage related to the addition in “ART” by changing the probability of winning an extra lottery in “Mode A”, “Mode B”, and “Mode C”. It is also possible to make the degree of advantage related to the addition different from both the probability of winning an extra lottery and the like and the ease of falling to “mode 0”. At this time, the ART mode that is unlikely to fall to “mode 0” may have a higher probability of winning a lottery or the like (for example, “mode C” has the highest probability of winning a lottery or the like). The ease of falling down to mode 0 ”and the probability of winning a lottery or the like may be mixed and adjusted. As an example, the probability of winning an extra lottery or the like in “mode A” that most easily falls into “mode 0” may be higher than the probability of winning an extra lottery or the like in “mode B”. In this way, when the ART mode falls to just before “mode 0”, it becomes easy to add.

  Further, the main control board 71 performs ART mode transfer lottery during “ART”, and shifts the ART mode according to the result of the transfer lottery. The ART mode transfer lottery is performed by lottery (normal processing) based on an internal winning combination, or by common processing during MB operation. In this embodiment, the ART mode is basically maintained or dropped in the transition lottery based on the normal process, but the ART mode is basically maintained or promoted in the transition lottery based on the common process. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ART mode may be promoted even in the transition lottery based on the normal process, and the ART mode may be allowed to fall also in the transition lottery based on the common process.

  Subsequently, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the chance mode and the addition. As described above, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of modes of a chance A mode, a chance B mode, and a chance C mode that have different triggers for management. Specifically, the chance B mode manages the addition based on “SP Lip A2”, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on “SP Lip A1”. “SP Lip A2” displays a combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Lip” in which three symbols “Red 7” are displayed side by side by performing a stop operation in the order of pressing “Right 1st”. , “SP Lip A1” displays a combination of symbols related to “Red BAR Lip” in which three symbols “Red BAR” are displayed side by side when the stop operation is performed in the order of “Middle 1st”. Therefore, it can be said that the chance B mode manages the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on the red BAR alignment. In addition, the chance A mode manages the addition based on the winning combination other than “SP Lip A1” and “SP Lip A2”.

  The chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode have a plurality of different degrees of advantage such as extra lottery in the ART of “normal”, “high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy”, and “ultra high accuracy”. There are modes. During “ART”, the main control board 71 performs individual mode transition lottery for each of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode, and shifts the mode of each chance mode according to the result of the transition lottery. . Therefore, the “chance A mode”, “chance B mode”, and “chance C mode” are individually managed during “ART”. For example, each mode may be a separate mode in a game, or some modes are common. Sometimes, all modes are common.

  Next, FIG. 122 (C) is a diagram illustrating a flow of last freeze which is a special addition in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs lottery as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the remaining number of games of “ART” is subtracted from 1 to 0. When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value until reaching the limit of the advantageous section (= 1500−the number of games in the advantageous section that has been consumed) to the remaining number of games of the ART, and performs a predetermined freeze process. . As an example, if the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 and the player wins the last freeze, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of the ART. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs a predetermined process at the end of the ART. In addition, when the lottery of the last freeze is won, since it is determined that the limit process is performed, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending”, and then does not perform any extra lottery.

  Also, the timing of the last freeze lottery may be an arbitrary timing of the “ART” final game, for example, at the start of the “ART” final game, or the “ART” final game. The first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The stop operation time may be when the stop switch 7S is turned on or may be turned off.

[Various data tables used during ART]
Next, the configuration of various data tables used for the extra lottery in “ART” will be described. Various data tables shown below are stored in the main ROM 32, and the main control board 71 performs various lotteries with reference to these various data tables.

  123 to 128 shown below are data tables used for control related to the ART mode. Specifically, FIGS. 123 and 124 are data tables used for the ART mode transition lottery, and FIGS. 125 and 126 are data tables used for the extra lottery based on the ART mode. FIG. 127 and FIG. 128 are data tables used for adding lottery stock of specialized zones based on the ART mode.

  FIGS. 129 to 135 are data tables used for control related to the chance mode. Specifically, FIG. 129 is a data table used for lottery of the chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) at the time of transition to “ART”, and FIGS. FIG. 133 to FIG. 135 are data tables used for adding lots of games based on each chance mode.

  FIG. 136 is a data table used for an extra lottery in the case where the number of games of 100 games or more is added, and FIG. 137 is a data table used for a lottery of whether or not to generate the last freeze.

<ART_ART mode transition lottery table>
First, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_ART mode transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the ART mode transition destination based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_ART mode transition lottery table is provided for each type of current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”) and as a reference item. , “Batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell” are specified, and lottery results for each reference item A lottery value corresponding to the (destination ART mode) is defined.

  According to the ART mode transition lottery using the ART_ART mode transition lottery table, the main control board 71 performs ART mode transition lottery (normal processing) based on the internal winning combination during “ART”. The ART mode is shifted based on the lottery result. For example, if the current ART mode is “Mode B” and the “batting order bell” is won, a lottery result of transition (falling) to “Mode A” is obtained with a probability of 12/256, and the ART mode is set to “Mode”. Transition from “B” to “Mode A”.

<MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table>
Next, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table is a table that is used in common processing during MB operation and is referred to when determining the transition destination of the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the MB operation_ART mode transition lottery table shows the lottery result (transition destination) for each type of current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”). The lottery value corresponding to the ART mode) is defined.

  According to the ART mode transfer lottery using such an MB operation_ART mode transfer lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an ART mode transfer lottery (common process) during MB operation during “ART”. The ART mode is shifted based on the result. For example, when the current ART mode is “mode 0”, a lottery result of transition (promotion) to “mode A” is obtained with a probability of 63/256, and the ART mode is changed from “mode 0” to “mode A”. And migrate.

<ART_normal addition lottery table>
Next, the ART_normal addition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_normal extra lottery table is used in extra lottery based on the ART mode performed during “ART”, and determines the number of extra games based on the internal winning combination (that is, the number of games that extend the period during which “ART” can be continued). It is a table that is referred to when As shown in the figure, the ART_normal extra lottery table is provided for each type of current ART mode (“mode 0”, “mode A”, “mode B”, “mode C”), and as a reference item , “Batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell” are specified, and lottery results for each reference item A lottery value corresponding to (the number of added games) is defined.

  According to the extra lottery using the ART_normal extra lottery table, the main control board 71 performs an extra game lottery based on the internal winning combination and the ART mode during “ART”, and based on the lottery result. Extend the period during which “ART” can be continued. For example, if the current ART mode is “mode A” and a “medium chance” is won, a lottery result of “30G” is obtained as the number of additional games with a probability of 28/256, and “ART” can be continued Will be extended by 30 games.

  Here, referring to the ART_normal extra lottery table, in this embodiment, “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” may be determined as the lottery result of the number of extra games. These “100A” to “100C” are lottery results in which at least 100 games or more are added, and when “100A” to “100C” are determined, the main control board 71 With reference to a common_upper game number lottery table shown in FIG. 136 to be described later, the number of games actually added is lottery.

  When the ART_normal extra lottery table corresponding to the ART mode “mode 0” and the ART_normal extra lottery table corresponding to the ART modes “mode A” to “mode C” are compared, in the ART mode “mode 0”, It can be seen that the extra lottery during the ART is suppressed. Specifically, when the ART mode is “mode 0”, an extra is performed only when a “strong bell” that is a strong rare role is won, and no extra is performed when other roles are won.

  When the number of additional games that extend the period during which “ART” can be continued (the number of remaining games) is determined, the main control board 71 updates the value of a predetermined counter managed by itself (that is, adds to the number of remaining games). The number of games is added) and the period during which “ART” can be continued is extended. At this time, the sub control board 72 may notify the player of the number of added games when the main control board 71 determines the number of added games, and the main control board 71 determines the number of added games. The number of added games may be temporarily held, and the number of games held may be notified to the player at a predetermined opportunity thereafter. For this reason, the sub-control board 72 counts the period (number of games already notified) to the player (notified counter) as a counter for counting the period during which “ART” can be continued (number of remaining games). ) And a counter (unnotified counter) that counts a period of time not yet notified to the player (number of unnotified games). The value of the counter that counts the period during which “ART” managed on the main (main control board 71) side can be continued is the value of the notified counter and the non-notified counter managed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Matches the sum with the value.

  Here, the fact that the main control board 71 determines the number of added games and “notifies” the number of added games is not limited to the game in which the main control board 71 determines the added number of games, This includes notifying after a predetermined number of games from the game. That is, in the pachislot, the determined number of added games may be notified by the result of continuous effects performed over a plurality of games, and the main control board 71 may notify the number of added games as a result of such continuous effects. It may be included in reporting the number of games added as an “opportunity” of the determination.

  In addition, the “predetermined opportunity” for notifying the number of added games temporarily held can be arbitrarily set. For example, the apparent remaining number of games (notified counter) has become a predetermined value or less. Even if a so-called rare role (in the case of this embodiment, for example, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”, etc.) is determined as an internal winning role, In addition, it may be a case where the extra lottery is non-winning, or after the predetermined number of games has elapsed since the main control board 71 determines the number of extra games, or the main control board 71 is the number of extra games. It may be after a predetermined time has elapsed since the determination.

  Note that, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games to be added, the sub control board 72 notifying the number of games to be added may be hereinafter referred to as “immediate notification”. The sub-control board 72 temporarily holding the determined number of added games may be referred to as “latency” below. Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery is performed with various conditions as an opportunity. However, the fact that the number of additional games is immediately notified or hidden is the result of the lottery result of the extra lottery using the ART_normal addition lottery table. In addition, the present invention can be similarly applied to the lottery results of other extra lotteries.

<MB operation_art game number addition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, an MB action_ART game number addition lottery table will be described. The MB action_ART game number extra lottery table is a table used in common processing during MB action and referred to when determining the number of extra games based on the ART mode. As shown in the figure, the MB operation_ART game number extra lottery table defines the current ART mode type ("mode 0", "mode A", "mode B", "mode C") as reference items. A lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (the number of added games) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the extra lottery using the MB action_ART game number extra lottery table, the main control board 71 performs the extra game number lottery based on the ART mode during “ART”, and based on the lottery result. Extend the period during which "ART" can be continued. Specifically, when the ART mode is in the “mode 0” state, the main control board 71 does not determine the number of additional games in the common processing during the MB operation (“0G” is always determined), and the “mode 0” In a state other than “”, “50G” is determined as the number of additional games, for example, with a probability of 12/256 in the common processing during MB operation, and the period during which “ART” can be continued is extended by 50 games.

<ART_history type lottery table>
Next, the ART_history type lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_history type lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to shift with high accuracy based on an internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the ART_history type lottery table has reference items “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium” “Chance” and “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

  According to such a lottery transition to lottery using the ART_history type lottery table, the main control board 71 performs lottery transition to the past record based on the internal winning combination during “ART”. When a lottery is won, a history high probability state between 5 games is set. During the history high accuracy state between these five games, a stock lottery of “addition specialization zone” is performed with reference to the ART_addition specialization zone lottery table which will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. One extra special zone stock is awarded. For example, if a “medium chance” is won, a lottery result of a highly accurate history is obtained with a probability of 32/256, and the subsequent 5 games are in a highly accurate state.

<ART_Add special zone lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the ART_addition specialization zone lottery table will be described. The ART_extra special zone lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining whether or not to give stock of the “extra special zone” based on the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, in the ART_addition specialization zone lottery table, as reference items, “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip” “Medium chance” and “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (non-winning, gusset 1, gusset 2, winning) is defined for each reference item. The lottery result “Non-winning, Gase 1, Gase 2” means that the lottery result “Gase 1, Gase 2” is non-winning for the stock lottery in “Additional specialization zone”. On the side of the sub-control board 72), a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of winning a prize that is non-winning) is executed.

  The main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the “addition-specific zone” with reference to the ART_addition specialization zone lottery table only during the history high accuracy in “ART”, and when this lottery is won, The type of “specialized zone” is determined by lottery, and the state shifts from “ART” to “add-on specialized zone”. According to such a stock lottery of “addition specialization zone” using the ART_addition specialization zone lottery table, if “medium chance” is won, for example, with a high probability of history, “exclusion specialization” is performed with a probability of 128/256. A lottery result of winning is obtained for the stock lottery of “ZONE”.

  Here, when comparing the ART_history type lottery table shown in FIG. 127 and the ART_superimposed special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128, both tables have lottery results when “batting order bell”, “common bell, one” are won. As can be seen, only “non-winning” is determined. Similarly, when “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, and “strong bell” are won, both tables may determine “win” with a predetermined probability. I understand. Therefore, in the present embodiment, if a winning combination that can be accurately transferred is won during the highly accurate history, a winning lottery is won with a predetermined probability. In other words, in the present embodiment, the rare role (“common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell”) is played twice in 5 games in “ART”. If you win, you may win a stock lottery in the “Additional Specialized Zone”. In the present embodiment, the control regarding the addition of “ART” is enabled based on the game result between 5 games without having history data (for example, the history of winning combinations between 5 games). The point will be described later.

  In addition, when comparing the two tables, in the ART_history type lottery table, the probability of winning the history lottery according to the type of the rare role won differs, whereas in the ART_addition special zone lottery table It can be seen that, regardless of the type of the rare role won, the stock lottery of the “specialization zone” is won with a uniform probability (for example, 50%). As a result, in the present embodiment, when the history can be shifted with high accuracy, it is possible to expect the stock of the “specialized special zone” regardless of the type of the rare role (even when the so-called weak rare role is won). become.

  It should be noted that the lottery transition to the history high accuracy with reference to the ART_history type lottery table is performed when the ART mode is other than “mode 0” and is not performed when the ART mode is “mode 0”. For this reason, the history does not shift accurately during “mode 0”. Since the stock lottery of the “extra special zone” with reference to the ART_extra special zone lottery table shown in FIG. 128 is performed only during the high accuracy of the history, the ART mode “mode 0” has a low expectation of extra I understand that.

<ART_ Initial high-precision lottery table>
Next, the ART_initial high-precision lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_initial high-precision lottery table is a table that is referred to when determining the initial state of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode at the start of “ART”. As shown in the figure, in the ART_initial high-precision lottery table, a transition opportunity to “ART” is defined as a reference item, and lottery results (ALL normal, chance A, chance B, chance A + B, chance) are defined for each reference item. C, chance A + C, chance B + C, ALL high probability) are defined.

  As described above, the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode include a plurality of modes of “normal”, “high accuracy preparation”, “high accuracy”, and “ultra high accuracy”. The lottery result determined by lottery referring to the ART_initial high-precision lottery table indicates the type of chance mode in which “high-precision” is set as the initial state when “ART” starts. For example, if the main control board 71 determines “chance A” as the lottery result, the chance A mode “high probability”, the chance B mode “normal”, and the chance C mode “normal” as the initial state at the start of “ART” When “chance B + C” is determined as the lottery result, the chance A mode “normal”, the chance B mode “high accuracy”, and the chance C mode “high accuracy” are set as initial states at the start of “ART”. When “ALL normal” is determined as the lottery result, the chance A mode “normal”, the chance B mode “normal”, and the chance C mode “normal” are set as initial states at the start of “ART”.

  In addition, the transition trigger to “ART” provided as a reference item can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the following transition trigger is used as an example. For example, when the main control board 71 shifts to “ART” via “SCZ” of “Legend”, the main control board 71 performs lottery using the reference item of “Trigger B” and “F_Red 7 Lip A (No. 29) ”and“ F_Red 7 Lip B (No. 30) ”, when the process shifts to“ ART ”, lottery is performed using the reference item of“ Trigger C ”, and“ F_Red BAR Lip (No. .28) ”, the lottery is performed using the reference item of“ Trigger D ”, and“ ART ”is triggered by the winning of“ F_Black BAR Lip (No. 37) ”. In the case of shifting to “ART”, lottery is performed using the reference item of “Trigger E”.

  According to the lottery using such an ART_initial high-precision lottery table, when “ART C” (“F_Red 7 Lip A” “F_Red 7 Lip B”) ”is used as an opportunity, the chance B The initial state of the mode is always “highly accurate”, and when “trigger D (“ F_red BAR lip ”)” is triggered and “ART” is entered, the initial state of the chance C mode is always “highly accurate”. become. Here, as described above, the chance B mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red 7 alignment, and the chance C mode is a mode for managing the addition based on the red BAR alignment. Therefore, when the transition to “ART” is triggered by red 7 (“F_Red 7 Lip A” “F_Red 7 Lip B”), the initial state of “ART” is given preferential treatment based on Red 7 assortment. When the state changes to “ART” triggered by a red BAR (“F_red BAR lip”), the initial state of “ART” is in a state of being preferentially added based on the red BAR alignment.

<ART_chance mode transition lottery table>
Next, the ART_chance mode transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The ART_chance mode transition lottery table is referred to in the chance mode transition lottery, FIG. 130 is a table referred to in the chance A mode transition lottery, and FIG. 131 is a table referred to in the chance B mode transition lottery. FIG. 132 is a table referred to in the chance C mode transition lottery. The ART_chance mode transition lottery table shows the types of chance modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "highly accurate preparation", "highly accurate", "ultra-highly accurate") ) And the reference items are “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, “common lip, fake lip”, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong bell” A lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (transition destination mode) is defined for each reference item.

  According to the transfer lottery using such an ART_chance mode transfer lottery table, when the main control board 71 wins “chance lip” in the state where the chance A mode is “normal” during “ART”, A lottery result of transition to “high accuracy preparation” is obtained with a probability of 256, and the chance A mode shifts from “normal” to “high accuracy preparation”. As described above, the main control board 71 manages the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode individually. That is, when determining the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 individually performs a lottery for each of the chance A mode, the chance B mode, and the chance C mode based on the internal winning combination.

<ART_chance mode extra lottery table>
Next, the ART_chance mode extra lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135. The ART_chance mode extra lottery table is referred to in the extra lottery based on the chance mode, FIG. 133 is a table referred to in the extra lottery based on the chance A mode, and FIG. 134 is an extra lottery based on the chance B mode. FIG. 135 is a table that is referred to in the extra lottery based on the chance C mode. The extra lottery table for ART_chance mode shows the type of chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) and the current mode ("normal", "high accuracy preparation", "high accuracy", "super high accuracy") )), And reference items are “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1 sheet”, “batting order lip”, “SP lip A1”, “SP lip A2”, “SP lip B1”, “SP lip” “B2”, “weak chance, common lip”, “chance lip”, “medium chance, fake lip”, “strong bell” are defined, and a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (number of added games) is defined for each reference item The

  According to the extra lottery using the extra lottery table for the ART_chance mode, the main control board 71 enters the internal winning combination and chance mode (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) during “ART”. Based on the lottery result, the period during which “ART” can be continued is extended. The main control board 71 performs an extra lottery based on the chance A mode, an extra lottery based on the chance B mode, and an extra lottery based on the chance C mode in the unit game in “ART”. However, as can be seen by comparing the same figure, the winning combination that may win the lottery is different for each chance mode. Therefore, the addition based on the chance A mode, the addition based on the chance B mode, and the chance C mode. There is no overlap with the extra.

  In the present embodiment, the extra lottery based on the ART mode is performed during “ART”, but the extra based on the ART mode and the extra based on the chance mode may overlap. For example, when “strong bell” is won, “30G” is determined as the additional game number based on the ART mode (see FIG. 125), and “50G” is determined as the additional game number based on the chance A mode. (See FIG. 133), “80G (= 30 + 50)” is added in the game.

  Here, referring to the ART_chance mode extra lottery table for the chance B mode shown in FIG. 134, in the extra lottery based on the chance B mode, the number of extra games may be determined when “SP Lip A2” is won. . As described above in FIG. 110, when “SP Lip A2” is won, if the stop operation is performed in the order of “Left 1st”, the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed, and “Middle 1st” is pressed. If the stop operation is performed in order, the combination of symbols related to “Red BAR Scroll” is displayed, and if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “Right 1st”, the combination of symbols related to “Red 7 Lip” is displayed. Is done. The fact that specific symbols that are usually difficult to align when an extra is made is related to the addition of the additional symbols and the uniform of the symbols, so that the interest of the game can be improved. When the winning lottery based on the chance B mode is won at the time of winning “SP Lip A2” (that is, when other than “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 As the first stop operation, it is preferable to stop the right reel 3R and perform an effect that prompts the user to aim for the symbol “red 7” (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “red 7 lip” is displayed). On the other hand, when the winning lottery based on the chance B mode is not won when “SP Lip A2” is won (that is, when “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect that prompts the left reel 3L to stop as the first stop operation (resulting in a combination of symbols related to "Replay"), and the inner reel 3C is stopped as the first stop operation. It is also possible to perform an effect that prompts the user to aim for “red BAR” (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “red BAR inscription” is displayed).

  The same applies to the chance C mode. When the winning lottery based on the chance C mode is won when “SP Lip A1” is won (that is, when a value other than “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and (Or) The sub-control board 72 stops the reel 3C in the middle as the first stop operation, and prompts the user to aim at the symbol “red BAR” (results in displaying a combination of symbols related to “red BAR lip”) When “SP Lip A2” is won and the winning lottery based on the chance C mode is not won (that is, when “0G” is determined as the lottery result), the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 is an effect that prompts the left reel 3L to stop as the first stop operation (as a result, a combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed), the first stop operation, To stop the right of the reel 3R Te, (as a result of a combination of symbols relating to the "red 7 tilt" display) production which urge that the aim of the design "red 7", it is also possible to carry out.

<Common _ top added game number lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the common_upper game number lottery table will be described. The common_upper game number lottery table is a table that is referred to when “100A”, “100B”, or “100C” is determined as the lottery result in the extra lottery in “ART”. In the common_upper added game number lottery table, “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” are defined as reference items, and a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (the number of added games) is defined for each reference item.

  When the main control board 71 determines any one of “100A”, “100B”, and “100C” in the extra lottery based on the ART mode and the extra lottery based on the chance mode performed during “ART”, the number of the common upper game added With reference to the lottery table, the number of extra games is lottery. For example, when “100A” is determined by extra lottery based on the ART mode, the main control board 71 determines “100G” as the additional game number with a probability of 246/256, and as the additional game number with a probability of 8/256. “200G” is determined, and “300G” is determined as the number of additional games with a probability of 2/256.

<ART_Last Freeze lottery table>
Next, the ART_last freeze lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The ART_last freeze lottery table is a table referred to when determining whether or not to perform the last freeze regardless of the internal winning combination at the end of “ART”. As shown in the figure, lottery values corresponding to lottery results (non-winning, winning) are defined in the ART_last freeze lottery table.

  When the value of the counter for counting the number of remaining “ART” games managed by the main control board 71 becomes 0, the main control board 71 performs lottery with reference to the ART_last freeze lottery table. The value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached is added to the number of remaining games of “ART”, and a predetermined freeze process is performed. On the other hand, when the lottery is not won, the main control board 71 performs lottery with reference to the common end time advantageous section end lottery table shown in FIG.

<Common_End advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, the common_end advantageous section end lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section regardless of the internal winning combination at the end of “ART”, for example. As shown in the drawing, a lottery value corresponding to a lottery result (continuation, end) is defined in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table.

  According to the end advantageous section end lottery using the common_end advantageous section end lottery table, for example, at the end of digesting the number of games of “ART”, 243/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. The lottery result at the end of the advantageous section is obtained with probability, and the next game shifts to the “normal” state of the normal section. On the other hand, for example, when the number of games “ART” is exhausted, a lottery result of advantageous section continuation may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by shifting from “ART” to “normally advantageous” without ending the advantageous section. In the present embodiment, a common table is used for all settings 1 to 6 in the ART (AT) -related processing. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling due to an extremely high ART (AT) setting difference, and to reduce the data capacity required for the ART (AT) lottery on the main control board 71. Can do.

[Flow of advantageous section]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 139 to FIG. 141 illustrate a specification example 1 for generating a bell navigation from the beginning of the advantageous section. In the specification example 1, the flow of the advantageous section is shown for three patterns in which the order of hitting bells and MBs is different. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to Example 1 of the third embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the first embodiment, a bell navigation suppression state (a bell navigation non-occurrence state) is immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 143 is a diagram for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section between the specification example 1 and the example 1, and shows the effect of the example 1 shown in FIG. 142. 144 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2, and FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second example of the third embodiment. It is. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining after power-on when there is no setting change and after power-on when the setting is changed as Example 3 of the third embodiment. Note that the specification example is a specification exemplified for explaining the effect of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technique and exhibits an effect according to each specification when adopted. Depending on the playability intended by the planner, this is a specification that can be adopted as a means for solving problems. In the following description, “MB” corresponds to both “SMB” and “LMB” shown in FIG. 109, and they are collectively referred to as “MB”. However, “SMB” having a high winning probability is mainly used. It is assumed that the state between flags is not shown.

<Conditions for advantageous section>
The end conditions of the advantageous section in the specification example 1 shown in FIGS. 139 to 141 and the embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 142 are as follows.
Condition 1: At least one occurrence of push order notification by winning the batting order bell Condition 2: At least one winning or operation of MB (because it operates by winning, it may be determined based on either)
Condition 3: Predetermined end condition is satisfied on the assumption that at least one of condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. An advantageous section is ended when a predetermined end condition in condition 3 is satisfied. There is no difference between Example 1 and Example 1.
In addition, a lottery of a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section (20 games or more have passed), or an end lottery of each game advantageous section has been performed from the beginning of the advantageous section. If the winning flag is set, an end flag may be set and the advantageous section may be terminated by assuming that the condition 3 is satisfied in the game satisfying the condition 1 by the occurrence of the bell navigation or the condition 2 satisfying the MB operation. Good. Also, a transition waiting state for a predetermined number of games of at least one game may be provided between the time when the condition 3 is satisfied and the time when the advantageous section is ended. For convenience of explanation, MB is shown, but the operation of a predetermined bonus other than MB may be the end condition. In addition, as a modification, in the case of a model not equipped with a bonus, or a model having only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for one game as a bonus, the occurrence of navigation due to establishment of a batting order bell without setting condition 2. It is no problem to set only as a precondition for the end of the advantageous section.

<Specification example 1>
Specification example 1 is characterized in that a bell navigation state is established from the start of an advantageous section until the first hitting bell is won. In this specification, after winning the batting order bell in the advantageous section, bell navigation (push order notification) is performed as soon as possible, and after the start of the advantageous section, the bell navigation confirmation state is established. After that, the advantageous section is ended according to the result of the end lottery of the advantageous section. The purpose of this specification is to shift an advantageous section to an endable state as soon as possible when the player does not win “ART”, which is an ART state in which medals increase uniformly. For example, when winning an “ordinary advantageous” advantageous section, despite the fact that the ART is non-winning, an excessively long number of games are reported as an advantageous section, and the game is difficult to stop in a situation where the player is difficult to stop the game. When forced to continue, a player who feels he has been shown to be extremely angry when he / she could not have finally hit it may significantly reduce his interest in the gaming machine, and appropriately suppress such a case It is a specification that can be.
As a flow until the end of the advantageous section, the three patterns of FIGS. 139 to 141 will be described in the order of the drawings.
First, FIG. 139 shows a case where the hitting bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, the batting order bell is acquired by the player through the navigation, so that “payout by bell navigation in the advantageous zone (CZ / high accuracy)” shown in FIG. 143 occurs. Since the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4 and there is a setting difference in the MB winning probability, it is about 1/15 to 1/17, so this pattern that the batting order bell wins before the MB is The frequency of occurrence is high. In addition, there may be a case where MB is won before the advantageous section ends after one or more push navigations have occurred after hitting the batting order bell, but the MB winning and MB winning numbers are It is not affected by the occurrence of forward navigation and does not affect the “payout by bell navigation in the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)” shown in FIG. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. As will be described together, the MBs in the present specification example and the embodiment are the same specification, and are the specifications in which 9 sheets are paid out when the correct position is correct and 8 sheets are discharged when the correct position is incorrect. In order to guarantee minimum skill intervention, there is a case where 8 cards are won, but for example, if you stop at least one of the reels with a red BAR symbol, you can get 9 cards. It is designed so that even beginners can play games with peace of mind, as it can be easily won.

  Next, FIG. 140 shows a pattern in the case of winning in the MB before the batting order bell in the specification example 1 and then ending the advantageous section without hitting the batting order bell. As described above, this pattern does not generate the “payout by the bell navigation in the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)” shown in FIG. 143, but the MB has a lower probability of winning than the batting order bell. The frequency of occurrence is lower than the pattern shown in 139. If only the winning probability is considered, if the MB winning probability is higher than the hitting bell, it may be possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of bell navigation, but even if the number of payouts due to the MB is small, Adopted a solution to increase the MB winning probability higher than the batting order bell because it may be non-conforming in the item ratio in the ball test (non-conformity reason based on the fact that the bonus payout ratio in all payouts is too high) When doing so, the degree of freedom in the design of the ball is extremely low.

  Next, FIG. 141 shows a pattern in which, in the specification example 1, the hitting bell hits ahead of the MB and a bell navigation occurs, but the MB wins before the end of the subsequent advantageous section. In this case, as a result, by satisfying the above condition 2 by winning and operating the MB, it was possible to establish the end condition of the advantageous section, so that the navigation by the navigation in the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section is suppressed. To increase the interest of the game by increasing the acquisition of the ball in the ART (sometimes referred to as this AT) and increasing the game's interest by winning the “ART” that is the “win” that the player is waiting for From the design idea of the ball, it can be said that the specification allowing the occurrence of the hitting bell navigation immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an unfavorable direction. Although this phenomenon can be suppressed by the method of immediately ending the advantageous section when the first bell navigation occurs, the striking order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, so immediately after the advantageous section lamp lights up. If, on average, about 4 games, a bell navigator occurs once and the advantageous section ends, a “normally advantageous” state is set and whether or not to win the ART for an appropriate number of games, etc. Since there are aspects that are difficult to entertain, it is possible to greatly reduce the degree of freedom in the ball design and production design when this method is adopted.

<Example 1>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
1st condition: Until 100G passes from the start of an advantageous section, even if it hits a batting order bell, it will be in a state where a bell navigation is not generated, and a bell navigation is not generated.
Second condition: The MB winning probability is set to about 1/17 (see FIG. 109).
Third condition: After the MB operation is completed, the advantageous section is terminated according to the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, even if the hitting bell is hit from the start of the advantageous section until it reaches 100G, the advantageous section cannot be ended (the state where no bell navigation is generated), while the MB winning probability is relatively high. It is easy to win MB before, and then, after the advantageous section end lottery state (bell navigation generation possible state), an advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game (unit game), and MB operation is performed by winning the advantageous section end The advantageous section ends after the end. According to the first embodiment, the number of balls played by the navigation in the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section is suppressed, and accordingly, the number of appearances in the ART (may be described as the AT) may be increased and the player may From the design idea of the ball appearance that wants to increase the interest of the game by acquiring enough ball at “ART”, which is the long-awaited “hit”, as shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. It is possible to suppress an undesirable phenomenon in which a bell is won by the occurrence and a ball is obtained. In addition, since the acquisition of medals by MB operation is not affected by navigation, the base value (input) of “normal” and “normally advantageous” in the normal section is suppressed by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in “normally advantageous” The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of payouts) can be suppressed to a value that is substantially close, and the corresponding amount of balls can be distributed to “ART”.

  In the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, it is possible to appropriately suppress the occurrence of push order navigation in the advantageous section, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the balls. Specifically, without increasing the number of balls in the “normally advantageous” state of the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. 143, the amount of the ball indicated by the white arrow can be allocated to the ball such as “ART”, The degree of freedom in designing the ball can be increased.

  In the description so far, the MB has been illustrated and described as “SMB” which is always won in the established game. On the other hand, in “LMB”, winning is hindered by replay in the established game, and a bonus flag state (carrying over) occurs. Here, in the state between the bonus flags, the specification may be such that the push order navigation is generated or may not be generated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of bell navigation in the above-mentioned “normally advantageous” state, it is effective to adopt a specification that does not generate push order navigation. Also, based on the fact that the LMB is won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 109 is a winning probability of 146/65536) during the advantageous section, “ART” is won. In such a case, since the game is advanced in the flow of “ART” during the inter-flag state, the LMB winning, and the LMB operation, the inter-flag state also becomes a gaming state that can be regarded as the ART winning state by the player. It is desirable to have specifications that generate In the case of the first embodiment, there is one type of bonus that can be carried over. For example, in the case of a model equipped with a plurality of types of bonuses that can be carried over, such as LMB1 and LMB2, push order navigation according to the type of bonus being carried over. May or may not be generated to allow the player to guess the type of bonus based on the presence or absence of navigation, and in the batting order bell winning game during carry-over, the specification must always generate navigation Alternatively, it may be processed uniformly as a specification that does not occur at all, and the bonus type may be narrowed down by stopping the main reel (so-called reach) because it is difficult to narrow down the bonus type due to the presence or absence of navigation.

<Specification example 2>
Next, the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the specification example 2, when the ART finishes after a predetermined number of games (for example, 100G) is completed, the advantageous section is also ended and the initialization process is performed. Thereby, after the end of ART, the next game is shifted to a normal section (non-advantageous section). According to the flow at the end of such an advantageous section, the game can be played while expecting to get a certain amount of balls during the ART, but in exchange, the transition to the normal section is made after the end of the ART. Since it is determined that the game will end, the player will always end the game at the end of the ART. That is, if the specification is such that the advantageous section ends with the end of the ART, not only the interest of the game cannot be enhanced, but also the operating rate of the gaming machine is likely to decrease.

<Example 2>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART finishes after a predetermined number of games (for example, 100G) is finished, the above-described end-time advantageous section end lottery is performed. If the end advantageous section end lottery results in “end”, as in the specification example 2, after the end of ART, the next game is shifted to a normal section (non-advantage section).

  On the other hand, when “continuation” is won as a result of the end advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, the normal mode is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to “normal” of the normal section, and the “ Transition to “usually advantageous”. At this time, in the “normally advantageous” state, since the predetermined number of games (100G) is basically exceeded from the beginning of the advantageous section, an advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game, and thus the advantageous section end lottery is performed. If it wins, it will transfer to the "normal" state of a normal area through the initialization process of an advantageous area.

  Also, in the “normally advantageous” state, if the rank of the normal mode is promoted and increased (for example, “super heaven” or “next sign”), it becomes easier to win the ART lottery, Then, after going through “ART precursor”, etc., it will shift to ART again.

  According to the flow at the end of the advantageous section of the second embodiment, the expectation that the advantageous section may continue to shift to ART even after the end of ART is increased, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Can also contribute to an increase in the operating rate of gaming machines.

<Example 3>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, for example, the mode displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening a store may be different.

  For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened without changing the setting, a general display corresponding to the “normal” state as shown in FIG. The mode is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, the gaming state is generally RT1.

  On the other hand, in the initial state after a setting change (for example, re-setting to the same setting such as determining setting 1 again from setting 1 of the one that has undergone the setting changing work) is performed before opening the store (b in FIG. In order to suggest that the player is in RT0 different from RT1 that would generally stay in the gaming state when the store is opened, a display mode such as “Early waking up is a three sentence virtue stage” is displayed on the display unit 100. Is displayed. That is, in the initial state when the store is opened after the setting is changed, the gaming state is RT0, and the display unit 100 suggests that the RT0 is in the “normal” state.

When an advantageous section is won in the “normal” state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), there is a difference in advantage in any of the first to third patterns as shown below. .
(First pattern)
In the case of winning an advantageous section at RT0, it is easy to win an ART with a ball in the push order navigation twice or more.
In the case of winning an advantageous section in other RTs: It is easy to win CZ with no push-out with one push order navigation.
(Second pattern)
In the case of an advantageous section win at RT0: ART win is confirmed.
In the case of winning an advantageous section at other RTs, it is possible to win either AR or CZ.
(Third pattern)
In the case of an advantageous section winning at RT0: The ratio of winning to ART is relatively high among ART and CZ. Note that “relatively high” may include a case where the ratio of winning for ART is 100% and the ratio of winning for CZ is 0%.
In the case of winning an advantageous section at another RT: The ratio of winning to ART is relatively low among ART and CZ. Note that “relatively low” may include a case where the ratio of winning for ART is 0% and the ratio of winning for CZ is 100%.

  According to the initial state of the third embodiment, it is possible to determine a state in which an advantage can be expected even in the “normal” state according to the display mode at the time of opening the store, and when the player selects a gaming machine in the morning, It can be used effectively as a guideline.

  Note that the above specifications also have a demerit that it is easy for the game arcade to change the settings. Re-setting to the same setting can make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the setting value has changed from the previous day, but if there are many installations, it can be a huge task to change the setting of all units. It takes effort. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the same screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) may be displayed after the power is turned on on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous power interruption. The predetermined time in this case is, for example, approximately 2 hours or 4 hours after a power interruption at midnight so that the suggestion screen as shown in FIG. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

  When the player performs an operation to turn on the mobile terminal interlock function on the gaming machine so that the user can actively use the service provided by the manufacturer such as the mobile terminal interlock function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). It is good also as a specification which displays the advantageous screen at the time of a store opening as shown only to Fig.146 (a). Further, a common customer waiting screen (demonstration screen) may be displayed so that it is not possible to determine whether or not the setting is changed on the customer waiting screen in which no player has inserted any medals. . By doing this, it is possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing medals and actually inserting medals, so first motivate to sit down and borrow medals from players and from the time of opening the store Can be motivated to visit. However, in a store where the number of players at the time of opening the store is extremely small, there may be a player who tries to monopolize advantageous RT0 by walking across a plurality of platforms with borrowed medals. As a countermeasure against such a player, the staff of the game hall can arbitrarily set whether or not the setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 146 (a) can be displayed, and the setting change can be made by the player. In stores that do not want to be discriminated, a function for enabling the setting to display a normal screen as shown in FIG. 146 (b) may be provided even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Next, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

  The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1 so as to control the variation control means, the internal winning combination determining means, the stop control means, the state control means, and the advantageous state notification. Functions as a means, a mode control means, and an RT control means. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification means. These functions will be described in the following supplementary notes, and the corresponding ones in the embodiment are parenthesized at the end.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be provided with functions as described below, for example.

  For example, when winning at the end advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART (winning), a guaranteed section state in which stay in an advantageous section of “normally advantageous” is guaranteed over a predetermined number of games may be provided. . When a guaranteed section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which, for example, the game ends in one game or two games, even though the advantageous section end lottery is won. It can suppress that a person feels stress.

  As the guaranteed section, a fixed period such as 20 games may be given. When the fixed period is set, the load due to the lottery lottery process performed by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game performance becomes clear. On the other hand, the number of games given as a guaranteed section may be determined by lottery based on conditions relating to the continuation and end of the guaranteed section. You may make it determine also about provision of the guarantee area itself. Further, the number of games in the guaranteed section may be determined together with the continuation that is won by the end advantageous section end lottery. In such a case, data necessary for lottery processing can be reduced. When the number of games in the secured section is determined by lottery separate from the end advantageous section end lottery, various game characteristics can be realized.

  Further, the guaranteed section may be continued until a predetermined combination (for example, bell, replay, MB, etc.) wins or wins a predetermined number of times without managing the number of games.

  The advantage section end lottery in “normally advantageous” may not be performed until the guaranteed section ends, or may be performed during the guaranteed section. When winning (end) in the advantageous section end lottery in the guaranteed section, the winning result is stored as a flag, for example, and the normal section (“normal”) is stored at the end of the guaranteed section or at the next game at the end. You may make it transfer.

  You may make it suggest or alert | report that it is in a guarantee area and the completion | finish condition of a guarantee area was satisfied. In such a case, it becomes easy to understand that it is a chance after the end of the ART, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation for the player, and in turn increase the operating rate of the gaming machine. For example, the display unit 100 may clearly notify by displaying “20 chance state continuation remaining remaining games” or the like, and an effect of displaying a stage or the like that suggests that ART is easy to win is performed. It may be. Further, it may be possible to execute an effect in an effect mode dedicated to the security section by an effect execution means such as video, sound, and lamp.

  Regarding the availability of the guaranteed section, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage regarding the determination regarding the guaranteed section may be varied based on the set value. For example, when the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by lottery, if setting 1 is set, an average of 20 games is set. If setting 6 is set, an average of 50 games is set. It is good also as a specification which is easy to generate | occur | produce after hitting ART again immediately. In such a case, the player can surely detect the end of the advantageous section by confirming that the status indicator 147b is turned off, and can reliably grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART. Further, the player can estimate the set value according to the grasped number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART, and even if the number of balls after the end of ART is reduced, the expectation of setting value estimation and pullback is expected. Playing games while holding the game will enhance the fun of the game.

[Another control peculiar to pachislot]
Subsequently, another control unique to the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 153.

<Relationship between the number of games in progress and the benefits>
First, with reference to FIG. 147, the relationship between the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” and the benefits will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 147, the termination condition in the first embodiment is used. Specifically, the first condition is that “until 100G elapses from the start of the advantageous section, even if the hitting bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated”. Of course, also in the following description, the end condition in the above specification example 1 may be adopted.

  As described above, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a gameability of performing a game from “normal (normal section)” to “ART (advantageous section)”, and the main control board 71 is in the “normal” state. We perform lottery transfer lottery. In this transition lottery, when “ART” is won, it is possible to directly shift from “normal” to “ART”, but in many cases “ART” via “normal advantage (advantageous section)”. Migrate to As shown in FIG. 102, the content of notification (push order instruction) is limited during “normally advantageous” compared to during “ART”, for example, notification for shifting to high RT (RT3) or maintaining high RT Is not advantageous as compared to “ART”, and in the case of this embodiment, it is designed as a section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1. Therefore, even if it is possible to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, if the transition is made to “normally advantageous” instead of “ART”, the medal is consumed as a result and the benefit is small. There is a risk that the willingness to play will be reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 gives a predetermined privilege to the player according to the number of elapsed games being “normally advantageous”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control board 71 gives the first privilege (privilege 1) when the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches “20G”, and sets it to “40G”. When it reaches, the second privilege (privilege 2) is granted, and when it reaches “80G”, the third privilege (privilege 3) is granted. The first privilege, the second privilege, and the third privilege are transitions (promotions) of the SCZ mode, and the higher the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous”, the easier it is to transition to the higher SCZ mode (see FIG. 116).

  As described above, although there is a setting difference, MB is won with a probability of about 1/15 to 1/17, so it is realistic that the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches “20G” and “40G” In addition, “80G” can be rarely reached. However, the privilege granted at this time is the promotion lottery in the SCZ mode, and when the SCZ mode is promoted, it is easy to move to the “ART” chance zone of “SCZ”. Does not move to. Therefore, even if the privilege of promotion of the SCZ mode is given according to the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous”, an excessive privilege is not given to the player, and the gambling ability can be improved. Absent. On the other hand, for players, as the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” increases, it becomes easier to shift to a state of gameability different from “normally advantageous” called “SCZ”, so the gameability changes in various ways. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, when the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches “120G”, the main control board 71 gives the fourth privilege (privilege 4). The fourth privilege is “hamari ceiling”, the SCZ mode becomes the dedicated mode “high accuracy”, and the SCZ mode does not fall down until it shifts to “ART”. Thus, in the pachi-slot 1, when the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” reaches “120G”, the subsequent transition to “ART” is confirmed. Here, the winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and even if the first condition in the first embodiment described above is adopted, neither the batting order bell nor the MB is won, and “normally advantageous” It is extremely rare for 120 games to elapse. Also, if “normally advantageous” has passed 120 games, a predetermined amount of medals may be consumed during “normally advantageous”, so “ART” is confirmed in such an extremely rare case. Even if it is a case where the “hamari ceiling” is selected, an excessive privilege is not given to the player.

  Since “normally advantageous” is an advantageous interval, the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous” is included in the count of the number of games for which limit processing is performed. Therefore, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying for “normal advantage” for a long time, an advantageous section (“ART”) for notifying the player of an advantageous stop operation mode continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from being raised.

  The main control board 71 only needs to be able to grant some benefit when “normally advantageous” continues for a predetermined period of time, and is not limited to the one that gives a larger privilege as the user stays for a long period of time. Absent.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the main control board 71 controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. Functions as control means and state control means.

  The main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of a predetermined push order, and the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to give the player a predetermined push order. In order to notify the order, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub-control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as an operation mode notification means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 counts the number of elapsed games that are “normally advantageous” and gives a player a privilege (SCZ mode promotion) according to the number of elapsed games. Functions as counting means and privilege granting means.

  Further, the main control board 71 is provided with a predetermined counter for managing the number of remaining “ART” games. Basically, when the remaining number of games becomes 0, the “ART” is terminated. When the number of games played (for example, the sum of the number of elapsed games in “ART” and the number of elapsed games in “normally advantageous”) reaches 1500, the advantageous interval regardless of the number of remaining “ART” games Therefore, the main control board 71 functions as a state control unit.

<Pseudo history lottery>
Next, a pseudo history lottery in “ART” will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 and 149. 148 is a diagram showing an outline of a pseudo history lottery in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an outline of another example of the pseudo history lottery.

  In a conventional pachislot machine, historical data relating to past games is held, and various lotteries may be performed based on the historical data. In such a conventional pachislot machine, various lotteries were performed on the side of the sub (sub control board 72) having a sufficient capacity, so this was not a problem. The main control board 71) has to perform the history data on the main side where the capacity is limited, and various lotteries are performed based on the history data. It will increase. On the other hand, since lottery is performed in consideration of past game histories, it is possible to realize a variety of games, so that interest is improved, and from the player's point of view, a rare role is won continuously. In such a case, a so-called feeling of loss is not felt, so that the game can be performed with peace of mind.

  Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, pseudo history lottery is realized by performing the control shown in FIGS. 148 and 149. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, pseudo history lottery is realized by combining the control by the main control board 71 and the control by the sub-control board 72.

  Here, FIG. 148A is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery specification of the pseudo history lottery, and shows an example of control by the main control board 71. FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to history high accuracy during “ART”, and when the transfer lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to high history accuracy between five games. . Then, the main control board 71 performs a stock lottery of the “additional specialization zone” during the high accuracy of the history between these five games, and if it wins, a privilege (stock of “additional specialization zone”) is given, When 5 games have passed in the winning state, the history accuracy is finished. Thereby, in this embodiment, a privilege can be provided when a rare combination is continuously won in a short period (between 5 games).

  Subsequently, FIG. 148 (B) is a diagram showing an example of the pseudo history lottery effect. The sub-control board 72 displays a history display window and a history icon in a predetermined display area of the display unit 100 in order to make the player have the illusion of referring to the past history. The history display window is a display area for displaying the history of past games, and is composed of, for example, five display areas corresponding to five games (note that the history display window has predetermined effect information (described later). The history icon) may be a display area that is displayed corresponding to a predetermined number of games, and is not necessarily limited to the window frame area. Even if not, it is preferable in that the player can identify that it is an area where the predetermined effect information is displayed. It is also possible to display only predetermined performance information when a rare role is won or won without providing a window frame or the like that clearly indicates that this is the case). Each of the five display areas is provided corresponding to each of the games for the five games from the current game to the previous game a plurality of times. For example, the leftmost display area (window) The game history is displayed, the second display area (window) from the left displays the game history two games before, and the third display area (window) from the left displays the game history three games before. The fourth display area (window) from the left displays the game history of the previous four games, and the rightmost display area (window) displays the game history of the previous five games (note that Specifically, from the start operation of the current game to the third stop operation, the history of the previous game is displayed in the leftmost display area, and the third stop operation of the current game to the start operation of the next game is performed. Until this is done, the game history of this time will be displayed in the leftmost display area (the same applies to other display areas) A)).

  The sub-control board 72 has a rare role ("common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "chance lip", "medium chance", "strong bell") that can win the history lottery. When determined as an internal winning combination, predetermined effect information (history icon) is displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window. As shown in FIG. 148 (B), this history icon includes a “red icon” and a “green icon”. ”Or“ green icon ”is displayed with a predetermined probability, and“ green icon ”is always displayed when a lottery for shifting to high accuracy is not won. As a result, the “red icon” is not displayed when the lottery for the transition to the history high accuracy is not won, so the “red icon” has a role of reporting that the history is highly accurate. It will be.

  The sub control board 72 may display a history icon on the condition that the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and on the condition that a combination of symbols corresponding to the rare combination is displayed. A history icon may be displayed. Here, since the combination of symbols corresponding to the rare combination is not displayed unless the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 states that “the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In response, it can be said that a “history icon” is displayed. This also applies to another example of the pseudo history lottery shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 displays the corresponding display on the display window when “batting order bell”, “common bell, 1”, which do not win the lottery for the transition to high accuracy, are determined as the internal winning combination. Neither “red icon” nor “green icon” is displayed in the area. As a result, the winning history of rare roles between five games is displayed using the “red icon” and the “green icon” in the display window for five games. Note that the position of the display area displaying the history icon slides as the game progresses. In the example shown in FIG. 148 (B), the “red icon” displayed in the leftmost display area slides one display area to the right at the end of the next game. As a result, the history icon disappears from the display window after five games after the rare role is won, so that the history icon is displayed in the display window when the history is highly accurate.

  Thereafter, when the rare combination is determined again as the internal winning combination during the history high accuracy, the sub control board 72 displays the history icon in the corresponding display area of the display window. The type of the history icon to be displayed at this time may be determined based on the history highly accurate transition lottery based on the rare role won this time, and the “higher special zone” in the history highly accurate It may be performed based on the result of the stock lottery, or may be performed in consideration of both. As a result, when a rare combination is won while the history is high, at least two history icons are displayed in the display window for five games.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 148 (A), a stock lottery of “addition specialization zone” is performed based on only the result of the game as a rare role with a high history history, and the past history is referred to. Although not performed, the sub-control board 72 performs effects such as lighting a plurality of history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself. From the point of view of the player, the display window for displaying the past history and the history icon indicating the past history emit light, so that it feels as if the history lottery has been performed. On the other hand, as the main control, the main control board 71 only needs to be able to recognize that the history is highly accurate only when a specific condition is satisfied. Since there is no need to update and hold data every game, the data capacity and processing load do not increase.

  Here, the case where the display of the history icon is updated every time the game progresses is illustrated, but the update condition of the display of the history icon is not limited to this and can be arbitrarily set. As an example, the sub control board 72 may update the display of the history icon every time an internal winning combination corresponding to the history icon is established, and each time an internal winning combination other than the re-game player is established. The icon display may be updated. Thus, by updating the display of the history icon every time a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the state in which the pseudo history lottery effect is performed can be continued for a predetermined period without setting a certain number of games. it can. In addition, the sub-control board 72 sets a certain condition for ending the history accuracy, such as ending the history high accuracy when the internal winning combination (non-winning internal winning combination) is determined five times, and ending when the batting order is established five times. You may link with conditions other than game number digestion. Note that the batting order is established five times may mean that the batting order is determined five times as an internal winning combination, and when the batting order is determined as an internal winning combination, it stops in the correct push order. As a result of the operation, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player may be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72, when the batting order combination is not established five times, that is, although the batting order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed in the incorrect order of pushing, When a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player is stopped and displayed, it is possible to end the history with high accuracy. In this case, history icon display rules and update timings may be appropriately determined so that a plurality of icons are not displayed in one history display window. For example, when the history accuracy is terminated after 5 loses, the update rule may be such that the history icon is updated by one every time a loss or a rare combination is won.

  The sub-control board 72 may change the aspect of the effect using the display window and the history icon in accordance with the stock lottery result of the “addition specialization zone”. For example, when winning a stock lottery in the “specialization zone”, at least one of the display window and the history icon performs an effect associated with the stock lottery (for example, a large amount of light is emitted around the display window). When the stock lottery in the “additional special zone” is not won, at least one of the display window and the history icon performs an effect associated with the stock lottery (for example, light emission around the display window is small). It is good as well.

  Subsequently, FIG. 148 (C) is an effect example 2 in the pseudo history lottery. FIG. 148 (B) shows an example of the presentation when the rare combination is won again during the high probability of history, but FIG. 148 (C) wins the transition lottery with high probability when the first rare combination is won. After that, an example of an effect in the case where a rare role is won again within 5 games will be shown. In this case, since the history is not highly accurate at the time of the second rare role winning, the main side does not carry out the stock lottery of the “specialized zone”, but the sub-control board 72 does not perform the rare winning in the historical highly accurate. Similarly to the time, effects such as lighting a plurality of history icons displayed in the display window and the display window itself are performed. In this way, even if the history is not highly accurate, it can be felt as if a history lottery has been performed.

  In addition, since there are few restrictions on the sub side compared with the main side, the sub control board 72 can perform the same effect in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy by an arbitrary method. As an example, the sub-control board 72 may store the history data so as to perform the same effect when the history is highly accurate and when the history is not highly accurate, and a history icon is displayed in the display window. Based on the information that a plurality of times are displayed, the same effects may be performed in the history high accuracy and other than the history high accuracy.

  In the example shown in FIG. 148, as a pseudo history lottery, a case where a rare role is won a plurality of times (twice) during a predetermined number of games (5 games) has been described as an example. In addition to such a history lottery, a history lottery performed when a predetermined combination wins “continuously” is also included. Next, with reference to FIG. 149, a pseudo history lottery method when a predetermined combination is won continuously will be described. In addition, FIG. 149 demonstrates the method of providing a predetermined privilege, when a bell wins 4 times continuously.

  FIGS. 149 (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an example of internal lottery specifications for pseudo history lottery, and show examples of control by the main control board 71. FIG. As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the main control board 71 has "non-high accuracy", "history high accuracy A", "history high accuracy B", and "history high accuracy C" as the state of high history accuracy. . As shown in FIGS. 149 (A) and (B), when the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in “non-high accuracy”, the main control board 71 ends the history high accuracy state in one game. Move to certain A ″. When the bell is determined as an internal winning combination during this “history high probability A” (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high probability state to “history high probability B”. If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during “history high accuracy A”, “history high accuracy A” is terminated, and the history high accuracy state is shifted to “non-high accuracy”.

  Further, when the bell is determined as an internal winning combination during “history high accuracy B” (that is, the next game), the main control board 71 shifts the history high accuracy state to “history high accuracy C”, If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during “history high accuracy B”, “history high accuracy B” is terminated, and the history high accuracy state is shifted to “non-high accuracy”. Then, the main control board 71 gives a privilege such as extending the period during which “ART” can be continued when the bell is determined as an internal winning combination during “history high probability C” (that is, the next game). If the bell is not determined as an internal winning combination during “history high accuracy C”, “history high accuracy C” is terminated, and the history high accuracy state is shifted to “non-high accuracy”. When the bell is determined as an internal winning combination during “history high accuracy C”, the main control board 71 may maintain the history high accuracy state as “history high accuracy C”. It is also possible to shift to “non-high accuracy”.

  Next, FIG. 149 (C) is an example of an effect in the pseudo history lottery when the bell is won continuously. When the bell is determined as an internal winning combination, the sub-control board 72 displays a “bell icon” indicating the winning or winning of the bell in the corresponding display area of the display window. If not determined, the “bell icon” is not displayed in the corresponding display area of the display window.

  Then, when four “bell icons” are continuously displayed on the display window, the sub-control board 72 produces a plurality of “bell icons” displayed in the display window and the display window itself. I do. Thereby, it can be made to feel as if the privilege was given based on having won the bell continuously, without having history data on the main side.

  In the example shown in FIG. 149, when the bell is won, the history high accuracy state is always promoted by one, and when the history high accuracy state is the highest state ("history high accuracy C"), If you win, you will always be granted benefits, but this is not a limitation. For example, the main control board 71 may promote one history high probability state with a predetermined probability when the bell is won. Further, for example, the main control board 71 may be promoted to a plurality of stages in a highly accurate state at the time of winning the bell (for example, one promotion with a probability of 95% and two promotion with a probability of 5%). Etc.) In these cases, the probabilities may be made different for each current state of high history. In addition, the main control board 71 may grant a privilege with a predetermined probability when the player wins the bell when the highly accurate state is the highest state.

  Although the case where the pseudo history lottery is performed by combining the processes of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 has been described so far, in order to further reduce the processing load of the main control board 71, the main control board 71 A pseudo history lottery effect may be performed only by the effect display controlled by the sub-control board 72 without having a highly accurate state in the substrate 71.

  In this case, the main control board 71 has only to determine the provision of the privilege based on the winning of the predetermined role, and can have no history high accuracy state equivalent to five games. The sub control board 72 displays the first history icon corresponding to the case where the predetermined combination is won. Thereafter, within 5 games, when a privilege is given by the main control board 71 according to the internal winning combination, the sub control board 72 displays the second history icon in the display area corresponding to the game, It is good also as what produces the effect as if it referred to the log | history using the 1st and 2nd log | history icon, and a log | history display window. In this way, it is possible to further reduce the processing of the main control board 71 while giving the player the impression that a history lottery has been performed.

  The internal winning combination in the display game of the first history icon and the second history icon may be the same combination or different combinations. For example, the display game of the first history icon may be a cherry role that is a kind of rare role, the display game of the second history icon may be a watermelon role that is another rare role, and the like.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  In addition, the sub-control board 72 has five display areas provided corresponding to each of the games for five games from the current game to the previous game when performing pseudo history lottery. In order to display the display window on the display unit 100, the pachi-slot 1 has a display window.

  In addition, when the main control board 71 wins a lottery transition to the historical high accuracy performed in response to a rare role in “ART”, the historical high accuracy is started, and five games are played during the historical high accuracy. When this occurs, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to end the history accuracy. If the main control board 71 wins a rare role during the history high probability, it can give a privilege of granting the stock of the “specialization zone”, so the main control board 71 functions as a privilege granting means.

  The sub-control board 72 has a rare role out of a plurality of display areas of the display window displayed on the display unit 100 in response to the rare role being determined as the internal winning combination during “ART”. When the history icon is displayed in the display area corresponding to the game determined as the winning combination, and the main control board 71 gives a privilege in accordance with the rare winning combination with a high history (ie, the history icon is displayed on the display window). When two or more are displayed), the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect executing unit in order to perform an effect associated with the stock lottery in at least one of the display window and the history icon.

<Additional notice during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, an additional notification (addition effect) in “ART” will be described. In pachislot, it is common practice to perform a lottery with a rare role that is easily noticed by players such as watermelons and cherries during ART (AT). However, if there is a high frequency that the player is not added even though he won the rare role, the player will be discouraged and the interest of the game will be reduced. In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown below, the frequency at which the extra notification is performed at the time of winning the rare role that is easily noticed by the player is increased. In the following, a rare role means a role that can win an extra lottery during ART. For example, in the case of an extra lottery based on ART mode, “weak chance”, “chance lip”, “medium chance”, “strong” Corresponds to “bell” (see FIG. 125).

  FIG. 150A is a diagram showing an outline of the additional notification by the sub control board 72. In this embodiment, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games to be added, the sub control board 72 may notify the addition immediately or may hide. As shown in FIG. 150 (A), in the state where the number of added games is hidden, the sub-control board 72, for example, when the added lottery performed by the main control board 71 is non-winning, for example, Instead, the number of games is notified. On the other hand, even if the added number of games is hidden, if the sub-control board 72 wins an additional lottery performed by the main control board 71 thereafter, the sub-control board 72, for example, adds the number of hidden games. The number of extra games determined as a result of the extra lottery is informed while holding. Thereby, in the state where the number of added games is hidden, the addition notification is performed regardless of the result of the addition lottery, and therefore the frequency of the notification of the addition can be increased.

  Here, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery (see FIG. 125) based on normal processing when a rare role is won, and also displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB when the MB is activated (that is, the MB combination). When the operation is performed), an additional lottery (see FIG. 126) is performed based on the common process. However, when the additional control lottery during the MB operation is won, the sub control board 72 basically notifies the number of additional games immediately. Without being informed, it is kept (hidden). Then, the sub-control board 72 informs instead of the number of additional games at the time of the MB operation that has been hidden during the extra lottery triggered by the winning of the rare role. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the frequency at which an extra notification is performed when a rare role that is easily noticed by the player is won. On the other hand, while the MB is not activated, the player is not notified of the addition, but the player only feels that the MB is activated and the lottery itself is not performed at all, and the frequency of the additional notification when the MB is activated occurs. That doesn't mean players won't be discouraged.

  Next, FIG. 150 (B) is a diagram showing a control example 1 when the sub control board 72 notifies the addition. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games “50G” in the extra lottery during the MB operation. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notification, the sub-control board 72 adds “50G” as the number of games for latent at this time.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of winning the rare role, the main control board 71 performs extra lottery and determines the number of additional games “10G”. At this time, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of hidden games, but since it has won the extra lottery triggered by a rare role, the sub-control board 72 holds it. While maintaining “50G”, the number of additional games “10G” determined this time is notified. Therefore, the player is informed that 10 games have been added with the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 maintains the number of latent games, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of latent games at this time.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), as a result of winning a rare role, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery but does not win the extra lottery. At this time, the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of latent games, so the sub-control board 72 reports the number of games to be added within the range of “50G” held. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the extra lottery within the range of the number of games held as the number of hidden games. Referring to FIG. 125, for example, in the extra lottery triggered by “weak chance”, “10G”, “20G”, “30G” may be determined as the number of extra games, and the number of latent games “50G” held as is not determined. Therefore, in this case, the sub control board 72 notifies any one of “10G”, “20G”, and “30G”. For example, in the extra lottery triggered by “strong bell”, “30G”, “50G”, and “100A (100G or more)” may be determined as the number of extra games, but the number of latent games Only “50G” is held. Therefore, in this case, the sub-control board 72 notifies either “30G” or “50G” and does not notify “100 G or more” exceeding the number of latent games held. The sub-control board 72 only needs to be notified in the range of the number of hidden games, and it is necessary to notify the maximum number of games that can be added by the rare role that triggered the extra lottery. In the range of the number of hidden games, some or all of them can be notified appropriately.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 may be added by the rare role that triggered the extra lottery from the range of the number of games held as the number of hidden games. “50G” is determined as the number of games with “50G”, and the number of games added to “50G” is notified. As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games have been added with the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for latent, the number of games for latent held by the sub-control board 72 is “0G” at this time.

  Next, FIG. 150 (C) is a diagram illustrating a control example 2 when the sub control board 72 notifies the addition. In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150 (B), the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of games to be added instead of the number of hidden games when the extra lottery at the time of rare combination is not won. In the control example 2 shown in (C), when the sub-control board 72 wins the extra lottery at the time of the rare role winning, the sub-control board 72 notifies the addition of the number of hidden games to the number of extra games won.

  Specifically, in the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150C, first, the main control board 71 determines the number of additional games “50G” in the extra lottery during the MB operation. As a result of the sub-control board 72 holding the number of additional games at the time of MB operation without notification, the sub-control board 72 adds “50G” as the number of games for latent at this time.

  In the control example 1 shown in FIG. 150C, as a result of winning the rare role, the main control board 71 performs an extra lottery to determine the number of additional games “10G”. At this time, since the sub-control board 72 holds “50G” as the number of games for the latent game, the sub-control board 72 notifies the “10G” won in the extra lottery by adding the number of games for the latent game. To do. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 holds the number of games that may be added by the rare role that triggered the extra lottery as the number of extra games won in the extra lottery and the number of latent games. Notification is made in the range of the sum of the number of added games. In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150C, the sum of the number of added games won in the extra lottery and the number of added games held as the number of hidden games is “60G”. It is assumed that there is “60G” instead of “60G” as the number of games that may be added due to the rare role. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 reports the number of additional games “50G”. As a result, the player is notified as if 50 games have been added even though only 10 games have been added due to the winning of the rare role. Since the sub-control board 72 has notified the number of games for latent, the number of games for latent held by the sub-control board 72 at this time is “10G”.

  In the control example 2 shown in FIG. 150 (C), as a result of winning the rare role after that, the main control board 71 performs the extra lottery. However, since the extra lottery was not won, , The number of added “10G” games is informed. As a result, the number of latent games held by the sub-control board 72 is “0G”.

  Note that the sub-control board 72 may notify the number of additional games that are always held in the case that the extra lottery based on the rare role is not won in the state where the additional game number is retained. It is also possible to notify the number of games added to the latent portion held with a predetermined probability.

<Additional notice during ART and setting suggestion>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control board 72 increases the frequency of the notification of the addition at the time of the rare role by increasing the number of games to be added at the time of the rare role, and is notified at a time. The number of added games is increased. According to the control using such a latent, the following setting suggestion control is also possible.

  In recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery (normal processing) on ART (AT) based on an internal winning combination or the like with a common probability regardless of a set value. Thereby, the blur of profit balance can be suppressed and the game can be played with peace of mind, but there is a problem that the setting estimation factor is reduced. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a new setting estimation element is realized by hiding the lottery result using the common process while eliminating the setting difference from the lottery based on the normal process related to ART (AT). .

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 150 (D), in pachislot 1, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in order to completely eliminate the setting difference from the extra lottery based on the normal process triggered by the rare combination. Both the probability and the extra lottery when the rare role is won are performed with a common probability regardless of the set value. In order to simplify the explanation, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination is approximately 1/60 for all settings, and is determined in an extra lottery when a rare combination is won. The expectation level per game that can be added is about “10G” common to all settings.

  The extra lottery based on the common process at the time of SMB operation makes a setting difference in the probability that the SMB is determined as an internal winning combination although the lottery probability of the extra lottery is common to all settings. In order to simplify the explanation, in the example shown in FIG. 150 (D), the probability that the SMB is determined as an internal winning combination is about 1/18 in setting 1 and about 1/15 in setting 6. The expected degree per additional game that can be determined in the extra lottery is about “5G” common to all settings.

  In such a case, for example, when 180 games are played, the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination three times regardless of the set value, and it can be expected to add “30G” with the rare combination as an opportunity. On the other hand, regarding SMB, in setting 1, SMB operates 10 times, and it can be expected that “50G” will be added when triggered by SMB. In setting 6, SMB operates 12 times and triggered by SMB. Expected to add “60G”.

  At this time, as described above, the sub-control board 72 hides the added amount at the time of the MB operation, and sends it to the additional notification at the time of the rare role winning, so that in the setting 1, the total number of additional games of “80G” is notified. In setting 6, the total number of games “90G” is notified. By hiding the added amount during MB operation, the player feels that no additional operation has been performed during MB operation, so the setting difference is completely eliminated from the lottery regarding ART (AT) based on normal processing. However, a setting inference element can be provided to the player.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  The main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols corresponding to the MB, and when the MB is operated, determines the number of games to be added to “ART” and determines the rare combination as an internal winning combination. The main control board 71 functions as a first addition determination unit and a second addition determination unit in order to determine the number of additional games “ART”. At this time, when the number of added games is determined, the main control board 71 extends the period during which “ART” can be continued by the determined number of added games, so the main control board 71 functions as an addition control means.

  Further, since the sub control board 72 holds the number of added games due to the extra lottery during the MB operation without notification, the sub control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Then, the sub control board 72 notifies the player of the number of added games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100 and is not notified when the extra lottery is not won in the rare role winning. The sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as a notification unit in order to notify the number of added games that are held as they are instead.

<Direction stage during ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151 and FIG. 152, the effect stage in “ART” will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 151 (A) and 151 (B), a control example different from that in FIG. 150 regarding the notification of the number of added games hidden in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games that are being hidden by using the pattern alignment.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)” are determined as the internal winning combinations, the symbols displayed according to the pressing order are displayed. When the combination is different and the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “1st middle” or “1st right”, the combination of symbols (“Red BAR Lip”, “Red 7 Lip”, “W Matched Lip”) is displayed. The In the pachi-slot 1, when there is an additional number of games to be hidden, a combination of symbols such as “red BAR lip”, “red 7 lip”, and “W matching lip” is displayed to notify the number of additional games to be hidden. Specifically, when there is no number of additional games to be hidden or when the number of additional games to be hidden is not notified, the pressing order of “left 1st” is notified, and the combination of symbols related to “replay” Prompt display. In this case, the notification of the pressing order is at least performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100. However, the main control board 71 may also be provided via the notification lamp 147a together with the sub control board 72. .

  On the other hand, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games to be hidden for 50 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “Red 7 Lip” and adds 50 games. An extra notification effect indicating that has been performed is performed. Similarly, when the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of additional games to be hidden for 100 games, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order for prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “red BAR lip”, and adds 100 games. In the case of performing an additional notification effect indicating that has been performed and notifying the number of hidden additional games for 150 games, a notification is made of a pressing order for prompting display of a combination of symbols related to “W uniform lip”, An extra notification effect indicating that the extra 150 games have been added is performed.

  Next, FIG. 151 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of hidden additional games held by the sub-control board 72 without notification and the pressing order notified by the sub-control board 72. 151, in addition to “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)” to “F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)”, “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)”, “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)”. ) ”Is also illustrated. Here, “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)” and “F_SP Lip A2 (No. 21)” are roles used in the extra lottery based on the chance C mode and the chance B mode, as shown in FIG. Moreover, since it is good also as using for the alerting | reporting of the number of additional games of a latent part, it demonstrates collectively.

  First, “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)” can display “Red BAR Lip” used for “100G notification” as a combination of symbols in which symbols are aligned. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 notifies the pressing order of “left 1st” when the number of added games to be hidden is “0-49G”, “50-99G”, and the symbol related to “replay”. The display of the combination of symbols related to “red 7 roaring” is urged by prompting the display of the combination or urging to aim the symbol “red 7” together with the pressing order of “right 1st”. In addition, the sub-control board 72 urges the player to aim for the symbol “red BAR” along with the pressing order of “medium 1st” when the number of additional games being hidden is “100 to 149 G” or “150 G or more”. And prompting the display of the symbol combination related to “red BAR lip” and performing an extra notification effect indicating that the extra 100 games have been added.

  The same applies to “F_SP Lip A1 (No. 20)” to “F_SP Lip B3 (No. 24)”. As shown in FIG. A predetermined push order and a symbol to be aimed are notified according to the number of additional games to be hidden, and an additional notification effect indicating that the predetermined number of games has been added is performed. For example, when “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 22)” is won, the sub-control board 72 is “left 1st” when the number of additional games being hidden is “0 to 49G” or “50 to 99G”. Is displayed, prompts the display of the symbol combination related to “Replay”, and when the number of additional games to be hidden is “100 to 149G”, the symbol “ An effect that encourages aiming at “Red BAR”, an indication of a combination of symbols related to “Red BAR lip”, an additional notification effect indicating that 100 games have been added, and an incubation If the number of added games is “150G or more”, the effect of prompting the user to aim for the symbol “red BAR” is performed together with the pressing order of “right 1st”, and the display of the symbol combination related to “W uniform lip” is prompted. With , It performs a plus notification effect indicating that the 150 game plus were made. In this embodiment, since the symbol “red 7” is arranged next to the symbol “red BAR” in all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the combination of symbols relating to “W uniform lip” is displayed. In the case of prompting, an effect that prompts the user to aim for the symbol “red BAR” may be performed.

  In this way, the sub-control board 72 associates the number of added games to be notified for each combination of symbols with matching symbols, and the number of additional games to be hidden can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination. When the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols is equal to or greater than the number of additional games associated with the combination of symbols Announcement of addition is performed. As a result, the number of additional games that are informed in one additional effect can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is sure to be displayed when the number of additional games that are hidden is equal to or greater than the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed in the combination determined as the internal winning combination. It is good also as notifying for an extra effect, and good also as notifying for an extra effect with a predetermined probability.

  In addition, there is a role that can stop and display a plurality of combinations of symbols associated with the number of added games to be notified, and it is hidden rather than any of the number of additional games to be notified associated with the combination of the plurality of symbols. There may be many additional games. As an example, “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 20)” can stop-display “Red BAR Lip” associated with “100G” and “W Matched Lip” associated with “150G”. Therefore, the case where the number of additional games to be hidden when “F_SP Lip B1 (No. 20)” is determined as the internal winning combination corresponds to “150 G or more”. In this case, the sub control board 72 may perform any notification, for example, may determine the type of notification according to the following stage.

  Next, the production stage in “ART” will be described. The pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of effect stages as effect stages in “ART”, and the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of adding notification according to the effect stage that is staying. The production stage is a kind of production state and is determined according to the gaming state. As the stage, for example, in addition to the background and the scene (scene), the type of character to be displayed or the action of the character, or a combination thereof can be used. Here, the sub-control board 72 uses, for example, various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition in “ART” as the gaming state for determining the production stage. In addition to the mode, the number of additional games hidden is also taken into account.

  FIG. 151 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the correspondence between the number of added games that are hidden and the stage. In the example shown in FIG. 151 (C), for example, “stage A”, “stage B”, “stage C”, and “stage C” are provided as stage effects in “ART”. For example, “Stage A” is a basic stage, and “Stage B” is a stage where the stage “Red 7” is aimed at the player and the stage “Red 7 Lip” is displayed relatively easily. It is a stage. “Stage C” is an effect stage in which the design “red BAR” is aimed at the player and the effect of prompting the player to display “red BAR lip” is relatively easy. “Stage D” Is an effect stage that is relatively easy to produce an effect that prompts the player to display “W-equipped lip”.

  The sub-control board 72 determines the production stage according to the number of added games to be hidden, and gives the player the number of added games (a part of which) is hidden by the additional notification production corresponding to the decided production stage. To inform. For example, the sub-control board 72 is more likely to determine “stage D” as the stage of production as the number of additional games being hidden is larger, and “stage A” is the stage of production as the number of additional games being hidden is smaller. Easy to decide. From the player's point of view, when the player moves to a higher stage, the player can have an expectation for the subsequent game, and the interest is improved. In addition, since there are a large number of additional games that are hidden, it is possible to realize a variety of presentation controls such as performing more lively presentations at the higher stage.

  In addition, if the stage is simply determined based on the number of additional games that are simply hidden, even if it is a high-level stage, it is merely a notification of the latent part, and from a skilled player who understands the specifications , The interest will be cut off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sub control board 72 determines the stage of production from various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition in “ART” and the number of additional games that are hidden. To do. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to know whether the notification is an addition of the latent portion or the addition lottery as a result of the extra lottery based on various modes. There is nothing. In particular, in the present embodiment, the chance B mode manages the addition based on “red 7 lip (red 7 aligned)”, and the chance C mode manages the addition based on “red BAR lip (red BAR aligned)”. Similarly, since the notification of the addition of the latent amount is also performed based on “Red 7 Lip” or “Red BAR Lip”, the chance B mode and the chance C mode and the number of additional games to be hidden are added. By determining the stage of production, it is possible to make it harder to grasp the trigger of the additional notification, and it is possible to attract the player's interest in the additional notification effect.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an effect stage during “ART” in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 152 (A), the type of effect stage in “ART” in the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The pachislot 1 has five stage stages, “ART stage 1”, “ART stage 2”, “ART stage 3”, “ART stage 4”, and “ART stage 5”, as stage stages in “ART”. In detail, there is a stage called “Ending Stage” as the stage during “ART”. This “Ending Stage” is a dedicated stage corresponding to “Ending” Since the transition is performed according to the dedicated transition condition, it is omitted in the description of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (A), “ART stage 1” is a basic stage in “ART”, and “ART stage 2” has a chance A mode of “high accuracy” or higher (“high accuracy”). It is a stage that suggests that the number of additional games that are hidden is “small” (0 to 49G). In “ART stage 3,” the chance B mode is “high accuracy” or higher (“high accuracy”, “ultra high accuracy”), or the number of additional games being hidden is “medium” (50 to 99G). “ART stage 4” is a stage that suggests that there is a chance C mode of “high accuracy” or higher (“high accuracy”, “super high accuracy”), or the number of additional games that are hidden is “ It is a production stage that suggests that it is “large” (100 to 149G). In the “ART stage 5”, a plurality of modes of “chance A mode”, “chance B mode”, and “chance C mode” are more than “high accuracy” (“high accuracy”, “ultra high accuracy”), or are hidden. It is an effect stage that suggests that the number of added games is “extra large” (150G or more).

  In this way, in the five stage stages, the frequency at which the sub-control board 72 performs the additional stage is different, and “ART stage 1” has the lowest frequency in which the sub-control board 72 performs the stage-up stage. “ART stage 2” corresponds to the stage where the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect, and “ART stage 3” corresponds to the stage where the sub-control board 72 performs an additional effect. The “ART stage 4” corresponds to the next stage stage, the “ART stage 4” corresponds to the stage stage in which the sub-control board 72 performs the next stage stage, and the “ART stage 5” includes the sub-stage board 72. This corresponds to the production stage with the highest frequency of performing.

  FIG. 152 (B) is a sub_effect stage transition lottery table that is referred to when the sub control board 72 moves the effect stage. The sub_effect stage transition lottery table is provided for each current effect stage (in FIG. 152 (B), the sub_effect stage transition lottery referred to when the current effect stage is “ART stage 1”). Only the table is shown, and the table that is referred to when staying at another stage is omitted).

  In the sub-stage stage transition lottery table, as reference items, “chance C + chance B highly accurate”, “chance C highly accurate”, “chance B highly accurate”, “chance A highly accurate”, “latency” “Extra large”, “Large latent”, “During latent” and “Small latent” are defined, and a lottery value for a lottery result (transition stage production stage) is defined for each reference item. According to such a sub_effect stage transition lottery table, for example, when “chance C is highly accurate”, the effect stage is maintained as “ART 1 stage” with a probability of 16384/32768, and 16384/32768. The production stage shifts from “ART 1 stage” to “ART 4 stage” with probability.

  The reference item “chance C + chance B highly accurate” means that the chance C mode and the chance B mode are “highly accurate” or higher, and “chance C highly accurate” means the chance C The mode is “high accuracy” or more, “chance B high accuracy or more” means the chance B mode is “high accuracy” or more, and “chance A high accuracy or more” This means that the chance A mode is “high” or higher. “Hidden oversize” means that the number of added games that are hidden is “extra large” (150G or more), and “Large size” means that the number of added games that are hidden is “large” ( 100-149G), “latent” means that the number of additional games being hidden is “medium” (50-99G), and “small latency” means This means that the number of added games is “small” (0 to 49G).

  These conditions defined by the reference item may be satisfied in duplicate. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 searches for the condition specified by the reference item in accordance with the search order shown in FIG. 152C, and uses the condition that is initially satisfied as the reference item to perform a lottery for the stage stage. In this manner, by determining the stage stage from various modes (chance A mode, chance B mode, chance C mode) related to the addition in “ART” and the number of additional games to be hidden, notification of the addition of the hidden portion Therefore, it can be made difficult to grasp whether it is a notification of the extra as a result of the extra lottery based on various modes.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means and a stop control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 determines the number of “ART” additional games when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and extends the period during which “ART” can be continued by the determined number of additional games. Functions as addition determination means and addition control means.

  Further, since the sub control board 72 can hold the number of added games without notification, the sub control board 72 functions as an additional latent means. Since the sub control board 72 notifies the player of the number of added games determined by the main control board 71 using the display unit 100, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as notification means. .

  Further, the sub control board 72 can determine one stage from among a plurality of stage stages depending on the number of additional games that are hidden (the number of additional games that have not been reported), and the number of additional games that are hidden. When the information is notified, since it is possible to execute an additional notification effect that promotes the matching of the symbols according to the effect stage, the sub control board 72 functions as an effect stage determination means.

<Ending control during ART>
Subsequently, ending control during “ART” will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, for example, when it reaches 1500G, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the remaining number of games remains, but it is determined that the limit process will be performed in the future At the stage where the sum of the number of games that have been consumed in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than a specified value, the main control board 71 shifts the payout state to “ending”. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the production state on the sub side to “ENDING (END)”, even if the main ball shifts to the “ENDING” state. The production state is shifted to “ending” in response to the condition. Hereinafter, in particular, details of the control in which the sub control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” will be described. In this embodiment, since the advantageous section includes “ART”, “normally advantageous”, and the like, the advantageous section and “ART” do not completely coincide, but in the control described below, the advantageous section and “ART” Since the difference with "" is not related, the following description will be made assuming that the advantageous section and "ART" are in exactly the same gaming state.

  First, FIG. 153 (A) shows the relationship between the main counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and the sub counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side in relation to the advantageous section. FIG. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games that have elapsed during the advantageous period (the number of games that have been consumed), and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous period (the number of remaining games). ). The main control board 71 performs limit processing when the value of the first counter reaches “1500”, ends the advantageous interval regardless of the value of the second counter, and sets the value of the first counter to “1500”. If the value of the second counter becomes “0” before reaching, the advantageous section is ended.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games (digested games) that have passed during the advantageous period, and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous period ( The number of remaining games (number of remaining games) is reported to the player (the number of games that have been notified), and the games within the period (number of remaining games) in which an advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter An unreported period (the number of unreported games (= the number of additional games hidden)) is counted. Note that, when the number of additional games being hidden is notified, the sub-control board 72 adds the notified number of games by the notified number of games and subtracts the number of unreported games.

  Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side coincide (the advantageous interval) When “ART” does not match “ART”, the limit processing is not performed on the sub-side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub-side, and count the number of digested games in “ART” Therefore, although the values of both counters do not completely match, there is no relation to the control described below).

  Also, on the sub side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are separately counted in order to separately count the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that have not been notified. And the value of the second counter on the main side does not match the value of the fifth counter on the sub side. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that have not been notified matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub-count The sum of the value of the fourth counter on the side and the value of the fifth counter coincide with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (B), the main control board 71 performs the transition control to “ending” based on the total value of the number of games that have been consumed and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. As a result of the addition of, when the sum of the number of games that have been consumed and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or greater than a specified value, the appearance state is shifted to “ending”.

  On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 changes the effect state on the sub side according to the total value of the number of games that have been digested in the advantageous section and the number of notified games (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games). END) ". Here, FIG. 153 (C) is a conceptual diagram of the sub-side “ending” transition control, and FIG. 153 (D) is referred to when the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending”. It is a sub_ending transition lottery table.

  As shown in FIG. 153 (D), the sub_ending transition lottery table defines a sum value of the number of digested games and the number of informed games as a reference item, and whether or not to shift to “ending” for each sum value. The lottery value information about the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the sum of the number of digested games and the number of informed games is “1000 to 1199G”, the probability of “ending” is set to 24576/32768. The winning lottery is not won, and the winning lottery to “ENDING” is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

  As shown in FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D), the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to “ending” with a higher probability as the sum of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. . Then, when the production state is shifted to “ending”, the sub control board 72 shifts the production stage to a dedicated “ending stage” and maintains the “ending stage” until the advantageous section ends. In addition, when the appearance state is not shifted to “ending” on the main side, it is not necessary to perform lottery transfer to “ending” on the sub side, so that the sub-control board 72 is in the appearance state on the main side. Only when the status shifts to "Ending" (that is, when the sum of the number of games played in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side) It may be determined whether to shift the state to “ending” or not.

  Thus, the player can grasp in advance that the limit processing is performed by shifting to the dedicated production stage during the “ending” transition. It should be noted that after the transition to the “ending stage”, it is determined that the limit process will be performed, so there is no point in performing an additional notification effect for the number of games. For this reason, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the “ending stage”.

  In addition, the transition to the “ending stage” is performed with a higher probability as the sum value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases in a state where the sum value on the main side has reached a predetermined value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the “ending stage” is higher as the number of added games that are kept unreported (the number of unreported games) is higher, and as the number of added games that are kept unreported is larger. Low probability. 151 and 152, the stage stage transition control during “ART” is the same even when the transition to the “ending stage” does not occur despite the fact that the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. The sub-control board 72 shifts to an effect stage with a relatively high frequency of performing the additional notification effect with a high probability when the number of additional games held without notification is large. From the viewpoint of the player, the interest is improved when the additional notification effect is performed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by controlling the effect mode according to the notification state of the number of remaining games.

  In addition, after moving to the “Ending Stage”, the “Ending Stage” effect will be continued until the end of the advantageous section in principle. At the time or when the next game is started, the stage is shifted to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

  Further, during the stay of the “ending stage”, it is desirable to maintain the “ending stage” because there is no change in the situation where the limit process is still performed even if a bonus such as LMB is activated. Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game whose first counter value is “1499”), a predetermined number of games such as LMB is won for a bonus required for digestion, and the bonus is activated. During the operation of the bonus, the first counter reaches “1500”, the limit process is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the “ending stage” is ended and a transition is made to another stage (the stage corresponding to the normal section or the stage in which the bonus is in operation) while the bonus is in operation, in which the number of balls is increasing, , There is a risk of discomfort to the player. Therefore, when the advantageous section is ended by the limit process during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage in the “ending stage” until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (the advantageous section It is good also as making it transfer to the production | presentation stage corresponding to a normal area (with an end alert | report, a display prevention display, etc.).

  Further, even if the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is “1498” to “1500”, and the sub-control board 72 is carried over without winning a prize, It is preferable to continue the “ending stage” and perform a delay process for ending the ending state in which the “ending stage” is ended after waiting for the bonus that has been carried over and the bonus to be activated to end. In this case, since the advantageous section is ended by the limit processing and the “ending stage” is temporarily continued even when the notification of the push order or the like is not performed (normal section), the sub control board 72 is In such an “end stage” of the non-advantageous section, it is preferable to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order by making the production different from the “ending stage” in the advantageous section. In addition, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won (a game that does not win the role of a bonus role such as replay) in the “ending stage” of the non-advantageous section. It is also possible to notify the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by giving a notification that the player has been instructed or a notification that the “ending stage” has ended after the bonus has ended. Further, when the advantageous section is ended by the limit process during the bonus operation or when the possibility that the limit process is performed during the bonus operation is high, the sub control board 72 is different from the other bonus operations. An effect (for example, an effect that congratulates mass acquisition or an effect including some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, during operation, or at the end of the bonus.

  Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an automatic re-insertion or a start operation by the operation of the next game medal or the re-game) for a predetermined time after all the reels are stopped. It is good also as performing the freeze process at the time of the advantageous section end which does not accept. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals, the number of digested games, or the number of sets acquired in the advantageous section. It is also possible to display the anti-slip display in accordance with these. In addition, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section by the limit process occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 generates a freeze at the end of the advantageous section by the limit process so as not to disturb the bonus. Instead, freezing at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. Regardless of the end of the advantageous section, a predetermined time at the end of the bonus for the purpose of securing a display time for displaying information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the end of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freezing at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus. Only the freezing at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freezing at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information relating to the advantageous section, a stagnation prevention display, and the like. By suppressing the occurrence of a plurality of game delays due to freezing, it is possible to prevent the game tempo from deteriorating. The contents described so far may be applied to the case where the advantageous section is ended during the bonus operation by another example of limit processing to be described later, and the specification designer determines whether the above-mentioned limiter is activated according to the type of limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not applied can be arbitrarily determined in consideration of the flow of production.

<Variable limiter>
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit process for ending the advantageous section have been described on the assumption that the execution conditions of the limit process are constant, for example, when the limit section reaches 1500G after the advantageous section is started. However, the execution condition of the limit process by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and if the advantageous section does not continue beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the advantageous section start), it is sufficiently excessive euphoria. It is possible to exhibit the effect of suppressing the above. Therefore, when the first counter (digested game number) satisfies a predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous interval before the first counter (digested game number) exceeds the upper limit value. It is good also as performing the limit process to complete | finish.

  For example, in a set number management type pachislot machine in which “ART” is fixed at 50G per set, a halfway timing with respect to the number of games of one set (for example, “normally advantageous” period or bonus during “ART”) (for example, In this case, the “ART” of the current set may end at 1480 G, which is the remaining 20 G up to the upper limit value. In such a case, the next set of “ART” cannot be performed for all the sets (50G), and limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even if the next set of “ART” is started, the player may feel dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, the main control board 71 may perform an advantageous section limit process at the end of the “ART” of the present set with good separation, even before the upper limit is reached. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a good timing, so the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

  In addition, depending on the pachislot, it may be possible to perform predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, and therefore, a case where such ending control is performed will be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot where “ART” is fixed at 50 G per set, the total value of the number of games already played and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (for a predetermined end condition) When reaching the setting range), the main control board 71 sets a 50G advantageous section (“ART”) as one set for ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending The limit process may be executed on the assumption that a predetermined termination condition is satisfied at the time of termination, and the advantageous section may be terminated. That is, the limit process is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500G. In this way, by allowing a certain range of execution timing of limit processing, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing an advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of incongruity. . Also, even if the number of games per set of “ART” is fixed, the timing at which one set for ending is determined by adding bonus operation or specialization status different from the basic set in the middle is added. Since it is not necessarily just 1400 game that is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to give a range to a predetermined end condition setting range (a period during which limit processing can be reserved).

  As will be described later, the limit processing is not limited to the number of games but can be performed based on the number of medals obtained by the player during the advantageous section or the number of times of navigation (a number limiter, a payout number limiter described later, Navigation number limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the limit processing execution timing when the limit processing activation counter (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.) reaches the limiter activation threshold (upper limit). When a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold is reached. Although the predetermined end condition is arbitrary, as an example, if “ART” of the next set is started in “ART” of the set number management type, the limiter is activated in the middle of “ART” of the next set. (In pachislot, the amount of medals per game in “ART” and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when a sheet number limiter, a payout sheet number limiter, or a navigation number limiter, which will be described later, is used, it can be predicted that the limiter is activated during the “ART” of the next set).

The technical idea regarding this point is summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games, the number of differences, the number of times of navigation that can continue the advantageous section) is set to the end threshold (the remaining 0 games, 0, 0 times) that can continue the specific gaming state (the advantageous section) When it reaches, the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (digested number of games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined termination condition (for example, an advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed) Alternatively, when the limit processing execution timing is allowed as in the modification example, if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, the second numerical value is ended. Specific state ending means (main control board 71) for ending the specific gaming state even when the threshold is not reached.
The specific state ending means collectively describes both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section such as “ART” is zero and the case where the advantageous section is ended by the limit process. The program may be provided as a separate process.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes 0, or when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, it functions as a specific state start unit and a specific state end unit in order to end the advantageous section when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached.

  In addition, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are numerical values related to the advantageous period (for example, the number of informed games out of the number of games in the advantageous area, the number of remaining games in the advantageous area, and the number of remaining games in the advantageous area Alternatively, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 function as counting means.

  In addition, the sub control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section and manage it as the notified number of games. It functions as remaining period notification means. And since the sub control board 72 keeps the remaining number of games for the non-notification of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section as it is not notified, the sub control board 72 functions as a remaining period latent means. Then, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to notify a part of the number of unnotified games that are kept unnotified as an additional number of games, and to notify according to the notified number of additional games. In order to update the number of completed games and the number of unreported games, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an additional notification means. Since the sub control board 72 determines one stage from among the plurality of stage stages, the sub control board 72 functions as a stage stage determining unit.

<Last freeze during ART>
Next, the last freeze performed by the main control board 71 at the end of “ART” will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, the main control board 71 performs lottery as to whether or not to generate the last freeze at the timing when the remaining number of games of “ART” is subtracted from 1 to 0. When the lottery is won, the main control board 71 adds a value until reaching the limit of the advantageous section (= 1500−the number of games in the advantageous section that has been consumed) to the remaining number of games of the ART, and performs a predetermined freeze process. . As an example, if the number of games digested in the advantageous section is 200 and the player wins the last freeze, the main control board 71 adds 1300 to the number of remaining games of the ART. In addition, since the limit process is performed when the number of games digested in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, for example, the game in “normally advantageous” is played 50 times, and then the process shifts to “ART”, and in “ART” When the last freeze lottery is won after 100 games have been played, the number of games consumed in the advantageous section is 150 times (= 50 + 100), and 1300 is added to the remaining number of games in the ART. In addition, when the main control board 71 wins the lottery of the last freeze, it is sufficient to allow the continuation of “ART” until the limit process is performed, and the value until the limit of the advantageous section is reached in the remaining number of games of ART. It is not always necessary to perform the addition process of adding. For example, the main control board 71 may permit the continuation of “ART” until the limit process is performed by prohibiting the end of the advantageous section other than the limit process. Regardless of the number of games in the advantageous section that has been digested so far, by adding a value (9999) exceeding the limiter to the number of remaining games of ART, continuation of “ART” is permitted until limit processing is performed. Also good.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  In addition, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the case where the number of completed games in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times or a case where the limit processing execution timing is widened is an example. When the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as is reached, the advantageous section is ended, so that it functions as a specific state start unit and a specific state end unit.

  In addition, the main control board 71 functions as a counting unit because the main control board 71 counts numerical values related to the advantageous section (for example, the number of games that have been consumed in the advantageous section and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section). When the remaining number of games of “ART” reaches 0, the main control board 71 determines whether or not to perform the last freeze, and if it is determined to perform the last freeze, the main control board 71 limits the number of remaining games of “ART”. While adding the number of games until the process is performed and determining that the last freeze is not performed, the main control board 71 terminates the “ART”. Function as.

[Modification of Third Embodiment]
Further, as a modified example of the third embodiment, for example, a game state flow as shown in FIG. 154 may be used, and a game appearance state as shown in FIG. 100 may be applied to such a game state. .

  Moreover, although 3rd Embodiment demonstrated that the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous area lamp (status indicator 147b) respond | corresponds to an advantageous area and a non-favorable area (normal area), for example, it shows in FIG. As described above, a standby section related to a bonus (such as BB with no setting difference) may be set as a section in the middle of the transition from the non-favorable section (normal section) to the advantageous section.

  The standby section means a section in which the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is not lit until the bonus is won even when the advantageous section is won at the time of winning the bonus without setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to winning, the advantageous section lamp is not lit and the standby section is set, and when the bonus winning is made, the advantageous section lamp is lit and the advantageous section proceeds.

  For such a waiting section, for example, the waiting section flag is set by winning “BB1 + watermelon”, and the waiting section progresses until winning of BB1, while the waiting section flag is not set in winning of “BB1 + cherry”. Whether or not the standby section is set may be determined for each flag so that the advantageous section is started without passing through the standby section. However, it is desirable that the same flag does not indicate whether the standby section is set. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the waiting zone, even if the bonus zone is won at the same time as the winning of the bonus, the advantageous zone lamp can be turned off as the waiting zone while the bonus is carried over.

[Another control example]
Subsequently, another control example unique to the pachislot machine 1 different from the above-described unique control will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 163.

<Addition control during advantageous section>
First, with reference to FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the addition control in the advantageous section in the pachislot 1 will be described. Depending on the pachislot, there may be provided a role (hereinafter referred to as a specific role) that can easily give a privilege to the player when it is determined as an internal winning combination, such as a so-called fixed combination or premier combination. Usually, such specific roles (determined role or premier role) have a lower probability of being determined as an internal winning role than other roles, while the probability of granting a privilege to a player is different. Benefits are given preferential treatment such that they are higher (for example, 100%) or the benefits to be given are larger than the benefits to be given at other occasions.

  By the way, in the case of a pachislot that performs a limit process as described above for a game in an advantageous section, a specific combination that is preferentially granted a privilege is determined as an internal winning combination immediately before the limit process is performed. Even if a big privilege is given along with the specific combination, the limit process is applied, so that the big privilege given along with the specific combination is wasted and there is a possibility that the game motivation is impaired. On the other hand, if a privilege is given without restriction during a gaming state advantageous to a player such as an advantageous section (ART), the player's gambling will be raised and the gambling will be too high There is also the problem of being shunned by some players.

  In this regard, as will be described below, the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention executes the addition control in the advantageous section that does not impair the game motivation while balancing the joyfulness by the limit processing. Although details will be described later, in the pachi-slot 1, the main control board 71 restricts the granting of privileges according to the timing at which the specific combination is won. Here, in normal pachislot machines, the combination of unique symbols is displayed at the time of winning the specific role, so that the player can grasp the winning of the specific role, so it is displayed for the player The winning combination of a specific combination is known from the combination of symbols. In this regard, in the pachislot 1, when the main control board 71 grants a large privilege based on the specific role, the main control board 71 performs stop control so that a combination of unique symbols is displayed, and grants the privilege based on the specific role. In the case of restriction, stop control is performed so that general-purpose symbol combinations that can be displayed in other combinations are displayed. From the player's point of view, since it is impossible to grasp that the specific role is won, even if the provision of the privilege is restricted, there is no sense of loss.

  First, with reference to FIG. 156 (A), a combination of a combination of symbols and symbols used to explain the addition control of the advantageous section will be described. In the following, the addition control in the advantageous section will be described with reference to the combination of symbols described in the first embodiment. In the explanation of the addition control in the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. 156 (A), as the specific combination (determined combination or premier combination), “F_Single Drip Lip”, “F_2 Double Drip Lip”, “F_3 Drip Set” Three types of roles are used. Note that the winning probability of each specific combination is not relevant in this control, and is omitted.

  “F_Single Chile Lip”, “F_2 Double Chile Lip”, and “F_3 Single Chile Lip” have different combinations of symbols that are displayed in a stop mode depending on the mode of the stop operation. When a stop operation is performed in a mode other than a specific mode, a combination of general-purpose symbols is displayed along the active line.

  Specifically, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols related to “Single Chilli Lip” along the effective line when a stop operation is performed in the order of “Left 1st” when “F_Single Chilli Lip” is won. When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “middle 1st” or “right 1st”, the combination of symbols related to “replay” is displayed along the active line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st” when the “F_2 continuous dust lip” is won, the main control board 71 displays the combination of symbols related to the “double chill tip” along the active line, When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “1st” or “1st right”, the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed along the active line. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of “left 1st” when the “F_3 continuous dust lip” is won, the main control board 71 displays the combination of symbols related to the “3 continuous dust lip” along the effective line, When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing “1st” or “1st right”, the combination of symbols related to “Replay” is displayed along the active line.

  As described in the first embodiment, in the symbol combination related to “single dust”, the Chile symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. This is a combination of symbols. The combination of symbols related to “Two Chilli Lips” is a combination of symbols where the Chile symbol is displayed on two reels. The combination of symbols related to “Third Chilli Lips” This is a combination of symbols that displays Chile symbols. However, in the first embodiment, “single chilli lip”, “double chilli lip”, and “triple chilli lip” were not combinations of symbols specific to one role, but in the following description, “single chilli lip” "Is a combination of symbols unique to" F_Single Chilli Lip "," Double Chilli Lip "is a combination of symbols unique to" F_2 Chilli Lip ", and" Triple Chili Lip "is unique to" F_Triple Chili Lip " Assume a combination of symbols.

  On the other hand, the symbol related to “Replay” displayed when the stop operation is performed in the order of “Middle 1st” or “Right 1st” on “Single Chilli Lip”, “Double Chilli Lip”, and “Triple Chilli Lip”. Is a general-purpose symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination displayed at the time of winning “F_Replay” regardless of the mode of the stop operation. In addition, the mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is arbitrary and is not limited to the pressing order. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 156 (A), the mode of the stop operation for stopping and displaying the combination of unique symbols for all the specific combinations is common, but this is not a limitation, and each stop is a separate stop. It may be an operation mode, or only a part of specific roles may be another stop operation mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (B), an outline of the extra lottery when each specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination will be described. Note that in this control, the provision of a privilege is limited when a specific role is won, but in the following, in order to simplify the description, an example in which a privilege is not provided will be described as a limitation of privilege provision. Of course, restricting the granting of a privilege is not limited to invalidation, but includes lowering the probability of granting a privilege than when not limiting when limiting. Here, reducing the probability includes making the probability 0%.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (B), the extra lottery based on the specific combination differs depending on whether it is a valid section or an invalid section. Here, the valid section is a section where extra lottery is performed based on the specific combination, and the invalid section is a section where no additional lottery is performed based on the specific combination. In the case of the valid section, the main control board 71 gives “small privilege” when “F_Single Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination, “Privilege” is granted, and “Big Bonus” is granted when “F_3 Series Chile Lip” is determined as an internal winning combination. In this description, “small privilege”, “medium privilege”, and “big privilege” are comparative, and “medium privilege” is larger than “small privilege” and more than “big privilege”. It means small and does not mean that “small benefits” are absolutely small benefits. The type of privilege to be granted is arbitrary and depends on the management method of the duration of the advantageous section. As an example, when the duration is managed by the number of games, it corresponds to the number of additional games that extend the duration and the right (stock) of an additional specialized zone that makes it easy to acquire the number of additional games.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (C), an outline of push order navigation in the valid lot and invalid zone of the extra lottery based on the specific combination will be described. In FIG. 156 (C), only the case of winning the “F_3 series dust” will be described, but the same applies to the “F_single series” and “F_2 series”. As shown in the figure, in the effective section, when “F_3 consecutive chili lip” is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are connected to the “left 1st” via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. "Push order of" and the symbol to be aimed at are notified. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, a combination of symbols related to “triple chili lip” is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, when the “F_3 series chip” is determined as the internal winning combination in the invalid section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are, for example, “medium 1st” via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Announces the pressing order. When the player performs a stop operation in accordance with this notification, the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line. Note that whether or not to grant a privilege is determined regardless of the pressing order to be notified, so that the notification in this case is performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display unit 100 and not by the main control board 71. Also good.

  During the valid section, “Big Bonus” is given in response to the determination of “F_3 Chile Lip” as an internal winning combination. It is possible to grasp that the “big privilege” has been granted, and to enjoy the privilege. On the other hand, no benefits are given during the invalid section, but since the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed, the player has been determined that “F_3 consecutive chili lip” is an internal winning combination I can't figure it out, and there's no loss of interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, an example of a method for setting the additional lottery valid section and invalid section based on the specific combination will be described. FIG. 157 (D) is a diagram illustrating a first method of setting a valid section and an invalid section. In this first method, based on the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit process is performed (in other words, the period that has elapsed since the advantageous section started), the additional lottery valid section and invalid section based on the specific combination Set. In addition, since the magnitude | size of the privilege provided for every specific combination differs as mentioned above, in this 1st method, the period set as an effective area or an invalid area is varied for every specific combination.

  As an example, “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which “big benefit” is given is “500G” until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit process is performed becomes “1000G” (in other words, “500G "Until elapses") is set as an effective section, and the subsequent sections are set as invalid sections (in the normal section, it is set as an effective section regardless of the type of specific role). In addition, “F_2 consecutive chili lip” to which “medium privilege” is given is “700G” until the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “800G” (in other words, after the advantageous section starts, "Until elapses") is set as the valid section, and the rest is set as the invalid section. In addition, “F_single lip” to which “small privilege” is given is “900 G” after the advantageous section starts until the remaining period of the advantageous section reaches “600 G” until the limit process is performed (in other words, “900 G”). (Until elapses) is set as the valid section, and the rest is set as the invalid section. Needless to say, the setting method illustrated in FIG. 157 (D) is merely an example, and the valid section and the invalid section can be set according to the size of the privilege to be granted.

  When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section (until the specified number of games elapses after the advantageous section starts), the main control board 71 may grant a privilege corresponding to the specific combination. On the other hand, if the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the invalid section (after the prescribed number of games has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section), no privilege is given. Then, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the effective section, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, through the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100, a combination of symbols unique to the specific combination. Announces the mode of the stop operation necessary for the stop display (notifies the pressing order of “left 1st” and the symbol to be aimed at), and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 have a specific role in the invalid section. When the winning combination is determined, the mode of the stop operation necessary for stopping and displaying the combination of general-purpose symbols is notified via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100 (the pressing order of “medium 1st” is notified). To do.

  In this control, the granting of a privilege is limited when the specific role is won. Including lowering the probability of granting. Here, the control process of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 in the case where the probability of granting a privilege is lowered will be described. Note that the following description applies similarly to the case where an effective section and an invalid section are set as shown in FIGS. 157 (E) and (F) described later. In the following description, the invalid section is re-read as “reduced section”. The reduced section refers to a section that lowers the probability of granting a privilege when a specific combination is won.

  When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the effective period (until the specified number of games elapses after the advantageous period starts), the main control board 71 has a first probability (may include 100%). If the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the reduced section (after the specified number of games has elapsed since the start of the advantageous section), the first combination is determined. It is determined that a privilege corresponding to the specific combination is given with a second probability (which may include 0%) lower than the probability. And if it determines that the main control board 71 gives a privilege according to the specific winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are connected via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. A stop operation mode necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols unique to the specific combination is notified (the pressing order of “left 1st” and the symbol to be targeted are notified), and the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination. If the main control board 71 determines that the privilege is not granted in spite of this, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 stop and display a general-purpose symbol combination via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. Therefore, the mode of the stop operation necessary for this is notified (the pressing order of “medium 1st” is notified). Note that the second probability of granting a privilege during the reduced section may be changed, for example, in a period that has elapsed since the advantageous section started (in other words, the remaining period until the limit process is performed). The longer the length, the lower the second probability may be, and the lower the second probability, the higher the specific role that is granted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (E), a second method of setting the additional lottery valid section and invalid section based on the specific combination will be described. In the second method, a special section in the advantageous section is set as an invalid section, and the other sections are set as effective sections. Note that the special section refers to a state in which a plurality of stocks in the added special zone are owned, for example. Depending on the pachislot, if you win the premier role during the regular section, you will move to the advantageous section (ART) and the advantageous section (ART) may start with multiple stocks in the specialized zone from the beginning. is there. If the player wins a premier role in such a state, an excessive profit will be given to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (E), in the second method, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in such a state, the provision of the privilege is limited. Specifically, when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can grant a privilege corresponding to the specific combination, If the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the invalid section (that is, during the special section), no privilege is given. When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 (in other words, when it is determined that the main control board 71 gives a privilege), the notification lamp 147a and the display are displayed. Via the unit 100, a stop operation mode necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols unique to the specific role is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are in the invalid section. Is determined as an internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines not to give a privilege), in order to stop and display a combination of general-purpose symbols via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. A necessary stop operation mode is notified.

  The special section can be arbitrarily set, and as described above, it may be in a state of having a predetermined number or more of the specialization zone stock, and the advantageous section (ART) can be continued. A state in which an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period is not less than a predetermined amount may be held. Further, during the special section, the player may stay on a dedicated production stage so that the player can grasp that the special section is in progress.

  Moreover, in FIG. 157 (E), although the range of a special area is common in each of the some specific role from which the magnitude | size of privilege differs, it is good also as making it different. For example, “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which “big privilege” is given is a special zone where the stock of the specialization zone added is more than the first predetermined number, and “F_2 in which“ medium privilege ”is given The “continuous chili lip” is a special section that has more than the first predetermined number of stocks in the additional special zone, and the “F_single lip” to which “small benefits” are granted is added. A state in which the stock of the specialized zone is held by a third predetermined number or more, which is larger than the second predetermined number, may be set as the special section.

  Next, FIG. 157 (F) is a diagram illustrating a third method of setting the additional lottery valid section and invalid section based on the specific combination. In the third method, an effective interval and an invalid interval are set in combination with the first method and the second method. That is, in the third method, regardless of the type of the specific role, the special section in the advantageous section is set as the invalid section, and the “F_3 consecutive chili lip” to which the “big privilege” is given is advantageous other than the special section. Among the sections, the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit process is performed becomes “1000G” (in other words, “500G” elapses after the advantageous section starts), and the rest is invalid Set as interval. Similarly, for “F_2 consecutive chili lip” to which “medium privilege” is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit processing is performed becomes “800G” (in other words, And from the start of the advantageous section until “700 G” elapses) is set as the valid section, and the rest is set as the invalid section. In addition, for “F_single lip” to which “small privilege” is given, among the advantageous sections other than the special section, the remaining period of the advantageous section until the limit process is performed becomes “600G” (in other words, From the start of the advantageous section until “900 G” elapses) is set as the valid section, and the rest is set as the invalid section.

  Then, when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section (that is, other than the special section), the main control board 71 can grant a privilege corresponding to the specific combination while being in the invalid section If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, no privilege is granted. When the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the effective section of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 (in other words, when it is determined that the main control board 71 gives a privilege), the notification lamp 147a and the display are displayed. Via the unit 100, a stop operation mode necessary for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols unique to the specific role is notified, and the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are in the invalid section. Is determined as an internal winning combination (in other words, when the main control board 71 determines not to give a privilege), in order to stop and display a combination of general-purpose symbols via the notification lamp 147a and the display unit 100. A necessary stop operation mode is notified.

  In this way, the advantageous section is divided into an effective section in which a privilege based on a specific role can be granted and an invalid section (reduction section) that restricts the granting of the privilege, and the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed is different in each. By notifying the player, the benefits given to the player will not be excessive, and not only can the balance of euphoria be moderate, but also the player will not feel defeated. There is no loss of player's willingness to play.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the main control board 71 controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a control means.

  Further, the main control board 71 starts an advantageous section when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section becomes 0, or when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches 1500 times, In the case where the execution timing of the process is widened, the advantageous section is terminated when the number of games from 1450 to 1500 set as an example is reached, so that it functions as a state control means.

  In addition, when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the main control board 71 can grant a privilege related to an advantageous section with a predetermined probability. In the main control board 71, the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In order to change the probability that a privilege can be given according to the state (effective section or reduced section) when it is done, it functions as a probability changing means. Further, if the main control board 71 satisfies a predetermined condition during the advantageous section, a state satisfying the condition can be set as a special section (special state). Therefore, the main control board 71 serves as a state control unit. Function.

  Further, when the specific role is won, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the player of a predetermined pushing order, and the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to control the player. Therefore, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

<Granting benefits when migrating ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, privilege grant at the time of ART transition in the pachislot 1 will be described. First, a game state transition flow in this control will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the pachislot machine 1 of this control has a normal section and an advantageous section, and further divides the advantageous section into “normally advantageous” and “ART” appearance. The normal section is a non-notification state in which the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72 does not notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section is the main control board 71 and / or the sub control board 72. In this state, the control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation. In addition, “normally advantageous” and “ART” indicate that the main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, but “ART” is more than “normally advantageous”. This is a state where the frequency (possibility) of notifying the mode of the stop operation is higher. This is the same as the relationship between “normally advantageous” and “ART” in the third embodiment (see FIG. 102). In this control, the normal section and “normal advantage” are sections in which the payout rate does not exceed 1, and “ART” is a section in which the output rate is higher than the normal section and “normal advantage” (for example, the payout rate). Is a section exceeding 1).

  As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section. This transition condition is arbitrary, for example, may be a lottery of transition lottery, may be a lapse of a predetermined number of games, or a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination Alternatively, a specific symbol combination may be displayed along the active line. In this control, the transition from the normal section (1) to “normally advantageous” is performed with a relatively high probability, for example, with a probability of about 1/30.

  Further, in this control, the main control board 71 can shift the advantageous state from (2) “normally advantageous” to “ART”. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, but in this control, the transition from “normally advantageous” to “ART” in (2) is performed with a lower probability than the transition from the normal section to “normally advantageous”. For example, it is assumed that the transition takes place with a probability of about 1/100. Further, the main control board 71 may transition from “normally advantageous” to “ART” as a ceiling when a predetermined number of games (for example, 500 games) have passed while being “normally advantageous”.

  In this control, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (3) “ART” to the normal section. The transition condition is that “ART” is ended. For example, when the period during which “ART” can be continued reaches the end threshold, or the number of games consumed in the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold. When the limit process is performed, the main control board 71 ends “ART” and shifts the gaming state to the normal section.

  As shown in the figure, in this control, the main control board 71 may shift the gaming state from (4) “normally advantageous” to the normal section. This transition condition is also arbitrary as described above, and the transition probability is also arbitrary. For example, it may be similar to the transition probability from the normal section of (1) to “normally advantageous”, may be higher than the transition probability of (1), It may be a probability between the transition probability and the transition probability from “normally advantageous” to “ART” in (2), may be the same as the transition probability in (2), and ( The probability may be lower than the transition probability of 2). In the example shown in the figure, as in the transition probability of (2), it is assumed that the transition from “normally advantageous” to the normal section has a probability of about 1/100, for example.

  In the pachislot machine 1 having such a game state transition flow, the transition to the first stage of the advantageous section (“normally advantageous”) is made at a high frequency. Because of the diversification of the nature, it becomes an element to continue the game even during non-ART. On the other hand, the transition to the second stage advantageous section ("ART") is less likely than the transition probability to the first stage advantageous section, making it difficult to transition to the second stage advantageous section. Yes. In this control, the main control board 71, in the advantageous zone of the first stage (“normally advantageous”), according to the length of the period that has passed without transitioning to the advantageous zone of the second stage (“ART”), A privilege is given at the time of transition to “ART”. Specifically, the main control board 71 is set at the start of the “ART” initial game number (ie, “ART” start time) as the number of games that have passed “normally advantageous” without shifting to “ART” increases. The number of games is given as a period during which “ART” can be continued.

  Here, FIG. 158 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a privilege to be given at the time of shifting to “ART” in the present control. As shown in the figure, when shifting from “normally advantageous” to “ART”, the main control board 71 determines that “ART” indicates that the number of games that have passed “normally advantageous” is “0 to 99G”. “50G” is assigned as the initial number of games. When the number of games is “100 to 199G”, “100G” is assigned as the initial number of games of “ART”, and the number of games is “200 to 299G”. In some cases, “200G” is assigned as the initial number of games for “ART”, and “300G” is assigned as the initial number of games for “ART” when the number of games is “300 to 399G”. When the number is “400 to 499G”, “500G” is assigned as the initial game number of “ART”, and when the number of games is “500G”, “1000G” is set as the initial game number of “ART”. The It is given to. If 500 games of “normally advantageous” have elapsed and 1000 games of “ART” have elapsed thereafter, the advantageous section will continue for 1500 games and limit processing will be started. Therefore, the “ART” initial game to be given when the number of games is “500G” is the same as the number of remaining games until the limit process for the advantageous section is performed.

  According to such control, the duration of “ART” is determined according to the period from the “normal advantage” to the transition to “ART”. The longer the duration, the longer the duration of “ART”. . As a result, even if “ordinary advantage” continues for a long time, not only medals are consumed, but also “ART” can be expected to continue for a long time thereafter. , It is possible to suppress a reduction in gaming motivation. On the other hand, in this control as well, the main control board 71 performs the limit processing of the advantageous section, so that “ART” is not continued more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from being increased. .

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  In addition, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition (first start condition) in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal section to “normally advantageous”, and the transition condition (second start condition) in “normally advantageous”. If the condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from “normally advantageous” to “ART”. If the transition condition (end condition) is satisfied in “normally advantageous”, the game state is shifted from “normally advantageous” to the normal section. The control board 71 functions as first state control means, second state control means, and third state control means.

  The main control board 71 gives a larger number of games as the initial number of games of “ART” as the number of games that have passed “normally advantageous” without shifting to “ART” is increased. Function as.

<Re-recognition of state reset>
Next, the re-recognition of the state reset in the pachislot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot 1, the main control board 71 initializes (resets) all the information related to the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section. There is a risk that the subsequent game may become monotonous because it cannot be grasped. Therefore, in the present control, the main control board 71 bypasses the initialization of information by reset via the symbol combination (output) displayed at the time of reset, and recognizes it again after reset.

  FIG. 159A is a diagram showing the concept of this control (reset re-recognition). In this control, a combination of symbols (outcomes) displayed when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped is associated in advance with a specific state. Then, as shown in the figure, the main control board 71 reads the specific state associated with the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed after returning from the initialization of the information by reset, and the specific state Re-recognize that after reset.

  Subsequently, FIG. 159 (B) is a diagram illustrating a flow of this control (reset re-recognition). In the example shown in the figure, when the predetermined symbol combination “replay down right” is stopped and displayed, the main control board 71 ends the predetermined gaming state and shifts to another gaming state. At the end of the gaming state, all information related to the predetermined gaming state is initialized (reset). And the state of completion | finish of a predetermined | prescribed gaming state is matched with "the lower right of replay" which is a predetermined symbol combination.

  As shown in the figure, when the symbol combination of “replay right-down” is displayed, the main control board 71 ends a predetermined gaming state and resets various information. Here, until the next game is started, the symbol combination “lower right of replay” remains displayed, and the reset control by the main control board 71 is performed in a very short time. Even after returning from, the symbol combination “lower right of replay” remains displayed, and the main control board 71 can read the symbol combination “lower right of replay”. Therefore, in the present control, after returning from the initialization of the information by reset, the main control board 71 pre-associates with the symbol combination from the read symbol combination “lower right of replay”. A state of “end of predetermined game state” is read, and it is recognized again that the predetermined game state is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 159 (C) and (D), the game property of the pachislot 1 using this control will be described. FIG. 159 (C) is an example of a game state transition flow when this control is suitably used. Note that the details of each gaming state are the same as described above, and are therefore omitted. As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from “normally advantageous” to “normally advantageous” from the normal interval, and (2) gaming state from “normally advantageous” to “ART”. (3) The game state can be transferred from “ART” to the normal section, and (4) The game state can be transferred from “normally advantageous” to the normal section. Note that each transition condition and transition probability will be omitted except for those related to game play using this control.

  Referring to the figure, when the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the advantageous section to the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from “ART” to the normal section as in (3), and “ There is a case where a transition is made from “normally advantageous” to a normal section. When this control is used, a combination of specific symbols (end appearance) is displayed for either the transition condition from "ART" to the normal section or the transition condition from "normally advantageous" to the normal section. And the specific symbol combination is associated with the end of the corresponding gaming state. In the example shown in FIG. 159, the end condition of “ART” is used as a display of a specific symbol combination, and the end time of “ART” is determined for a specific symbol combination. Correlate.

  In this way, even if the information related to the advantageous section is reset when the game state is transferred from the advantageous section to the normal section, it is possible to grasp which advantageous section has passed to the normal section Can do. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (D), since “normally advantageous” ends regardless of the combination of symbols associated with a specific state, the “normally advantageous” advantageous section changes to the normal section. In the case of transition, the main control board 71 does not re-recognize that it is in a specific state from the displayed symbol combination after returning from reset. On the other hand, since “ART” ends when a combination of symbols associated with a specific state is displayed, the main control board 71 returns from reset when it shifts from the advantageous section of “ART” to the normal section. After that, it is possible to re-recognize that it is the end of “ART” from the displayed symbol combination.

  That is, in order to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of “normally advantageous” and “ART”, any advantageous section (“normally advantageous” or It is not possible to know whether "ART") has ended. On the other hand, according to this control, information on the advantageous section is initialized at the end of the advantageous section having a plurality of states of “normally advantageous” and “ART”, but at the end of “ART”, “at the end of ART Therefore, it is possible to grasp what advantageous section ("normally advantageous" or "ART") has ended after the end of the advantageous section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG.

  The main control board 71 ends “ART” and performs reset control when “ART” ends in response to a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed. And, since the main control board 71 re-recognizes that “it is the end of ART” from the displayed combination of specific symbols after returning from the reset control, the main control board 71 includes state control means, It functions as an end means and an initialization means.

<Arbitrary reset of advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the arbitrary reset control of the advantageous section in the pachislot 1 will be described. In a pachislot that has a normal section and an advantageous section, and has “ART” and a state other than ART (for example, “normally advantageous”) as the advantageous section, the advantageous section is terminated at the end of “ART” and the normal section is entered. It is possible to do. However, since it is difficult to change the probability of transition to the advantageous section during the normal section, it is not possible to expect a pullback after the end of “ART” (= after the end of the advantageous section), and the timing when “ART” ends. This makes it easier to stop the game and the operation of the gaming machine may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, after the end of “ART”, it is possible to shift to “normally advantageous” without ending the advantageous interval (see FIG. 138), but there is a limit in the advantageous interval. For example, if “ART” ends just before the limit and then remains in the advantageous section, even if it can return to “ART” immediately after the end of “ART”, The “ART” that is pulled back ends immediately.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 160A, in the pachislot 1, the player can arbitrarily reset the advantageous section. Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when the player performs a reset operation. The main control board 71 can accept any reset operation. For example, the main control board 71 can accept a reset operation by the player in accordance with an operation of an arbitrary operation unit or the like. In addition, the timing at which the player can reset the advantageous section may be any timing in the advantageous section, but in the following explanation, the player performs the reset operation of the advantageous section at the end of "ART". Shall be able to.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 determines whether or not a reset operation has been received from the player at the end of “ART”. When the reset operation is accepted, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from “ART” to the normal section. On the other hand, if the reset operation has not been accepted, the main control board 71 continues the advantageous section and shifts the gaming state from “ART” to “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section.

  Next, FIG. 160 (B) is an example of a game state transition flow when this control is suitably used. Note that the details of each gaming state are the same as described above, and are therefore omitted. In addition, the description of each transition condition and transition probability is omitted except for those related to game play using this control.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can (1) shift the gaming state from the normal section to the “ART” in the advantageous section. This control is characterized in that it can be shifted to “normally advantageous” without ending the advantageous interval after the end of “ART”. However, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the normal section may be shifted to “ART” via “normally advantageous”.

  Further, when “ART” is finished, the main control board 71 (2) transitions the gaming state from “ART” to the normal section when receiving a reset operation from the player, and (3) resets from the player. When the operation is not accepted, the gaming state is shifted from “ART” to “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section. The correspondence between the main control board 71 receiving the reset operation and the player performing the reset operation is arbitrary. That is, when the player performs an intentional operation, the main control board 71 may accept a reset operation. When the player does not perform any operation, the main control board 71 accepts a reset operation. It is good as well.

  Further, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (4) “normally advantageous” to “ART”, and (5) can shift the gaming state from “normally advantageous” to the normal section. . As shown in the figure, the degree of expected transition to “ART” is higher in “normally advantageous” than in the normal section. In other words, the probability that the transition condition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in the normal section and the probability that the transition condition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in “normal advantage” Then, the latter is a higher probability.

  According to such a control, after the end of “ART”, the “ART” pull-back chance zone (“normally advantageous”) can be set, and a decrease in operation after the end of “ART” can be suppressed. . When the end of “ART” is close to the limit of the advantageous section, the player can clear the advantageous section on his / her own intention and reset the period until the limit. As a result, for the player, it is possible to select whether or not to perform the reset operation in consideration of the advantages and disadvantages, so that the selection after “ART” is finished should have a strategy. And the range of game play can be expanded.

  The “normal advantage” after the end of “ART” is continued for a maximum of 100 games. If the transition to the “ART” cannot be made within the 100 games, the main control board 71 is advantageous. It is good also as ending a section and changing a game state to a normal section.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The main control board 71 performs limit processing when the number of games digested during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold, and can accept a reset operation from the player at the end of “ART”. 71 functions as an operation receiving means.

  Further, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to “ART” when the condition for shifting to “ART” is satisfied, and if the reset operation is accepted, the main control board 71 changes the gaming state to the normal section after “ART” ends. If the reset operation is not accepted, the main control board 71 functions as a state control means in order to shift the gaming state to “normally advantageous” after the end of “ART”.

<Number of games using advantageous sections>
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the ceiling of the number of games using the advantageous section in the pachislot 1 will be described. FIG. 161 (A) is an example of a game state transition flow when this control is suitably used. In this control, the main control board 71 manages the RT state and the state related to notification. The RT state is a state in which the type of “replay” related to the replay operation and the probability that “replay” is determined as an internal winning combination are different. In the following description, “replay” is determined as an internal winning combination. “Low RT” having a low probability and “High RT” having a high probability that “Replay” is determined as an internal winning combination. Moreover, the state regarding notification is a state in which the probability of notifying the player of the mode of the stop operation is different, and in the following description, it has a normal section and an advantageous section. Note that the normal section is basically a state in which the stop operation mode is not notified to the player, and the advantageous section is a state in which the stop operation mode can be notified to the player, as described later. The state of the stop operation is not notified until the game number ceiling is reached.

  As shown in the drawing, the main control board 71 displays (1) “Low RT” from “Low RT” to “Low RT” when a combination of symbols related to “7-match replay” to be described later is displayed along the active line. The RT state is shifted to “High RT”. The main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “high RT” to “low RT” when (2) “high RT” satisfies a predetermined condition (arbitrary first condition). The predetermined condition that triggers the transition from “high RT” to “low RT” is arbitrary. For example, a bonus-related role is determined as an internal winning combination, a bonus operation is performed, , The bonus operation ends.

  The main control board 71 shifts the state related to the notification from the normal section to the advantageous section when (3) the specific condition (arbitrary second condition) is satisfied in the normal section. Note that the specific condition that triggers the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is not related to this control, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. Further, the main control board 71 shifts the state related to the notification from the advantageous section to the normal section when the combination of symbols related to “7-match replay” is displayed along the effective line in the advantageous section (4). Further, the main control board 71 also performs a limit process even when the number of times reached 1500 times that is consumed in the advantageous section, and shifts the state related to the notification from the advantageous section to the normal section.

  In this way, in this control, when the symbol combination related to “7-match replay” is displayed along the active line, the main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “low RT” to “high RT”. The state related to notification is shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section. As will be described later, in this control, the RT state in the advantageous section is set to “low RT”, and the RT state in the normal section is set to “high RT”. Therefore, when the advantageous section (“low RT”) is compared with the normal section (“high RT”), the normal section is more advantageous.

  Subsequently, FIG. 161 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the combination of the combination used in the present control and the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination. In this control, “selection number lip” (“F_selection number lip_01” to “F_selection number lip_ ??”) is provided as a role to be notified during the advantageous section. Note that “choice number rep” is a combination (replay) in which the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed differs depending on the mode of the stop operation, and the stop operation is performed in a mode in which each “choice number rep” is correct. The symbol combination related to “7 replays” is displayed along the active line, and when the stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed along the active line. Is displayed.

  During the advantageous section (“low RT”), since the notification is not performed until the game number ceiling is reached, the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) is determined to have “selection number rep” as an internal winning combination. However, the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) does not notify the stop operation mode while the stop operation mode is reached. Inform. As a result, after reaching the ceiling of the number of games, the symbol combination related to “seven replays” is displayed along the active line when the “choice number rep” is won, and the normal section (“high RT”) is entered. It will be. Even in the case where notification is not performed, the player may perform a stop operation in a manner in which the player accidentally becomes correct, and in this case as well, the symbol combination related to “7-match replay” is along the active line. Displayed, and shifts to the normal section (“high RT”). In order to avoid such a case, it is preferable to increase the number of “selection number rep” as much as possible. For example, when the number of choices is provided only by pushing the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, there are only six choices at the maximum. Can be increased.

  Next, FIG. 161 (C) is a diagram showing an outline of the game flow in this control. As shown in the figure, in this control, the advantageous section is set to “low RT”, and the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) in the advantageous section (“low RT”) reaches the ceiling of the number of games. No notification is made until. After that, when the game number ceiling is reached during the advantageous section (“low RT”), the main control board 71 (and the sub control board 72) releases the notification, and then “selection number rep” is determined as an internal winning combination. Then, the mode of the stop operation that is correct for each “choice number rep” is notified. As a result, the combination of symbols related to “7-match replay” is displayed along the active line. As a result, the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) shifts the gaming state to the normal section (“high RT”). To do. Thereafter, for example, the game is played with “high RT” until the bonus is won. That is, according to this control, when a predetermined number of games elapses without winning a bonus in a state of “low RT” (advantageous section), the game is changed to a ceiling state, and thereafter, the game until winning the bonus is “high RT”. (Normal section) can be performed.

  Note that the number of games on the ceiling can be appropriately set according to the period (number of games) during which no notification is made during the advantageous section. Therefore, the main control board 71 may determine and set a period during which the notification is not performed at the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section by lottery. Thereby, the period during which no notification is performed during the advantageous section changes each time, and as a result, the number of games until the ceiling is reached also changes. In the description shown in FIG. 161, the description has been made taking the ceiling of the number of games as an example, but the method of realizing the ceiling is arbitrary, for example, realizing the ceiling according to the number of times that the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination It is good as well. Specifically, the main control board 71 (and the sub-control board 72) reaches the predetermined number of times without performing notification until the predetermined number of times determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number. Notification may be performed later.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control means.

  The main control board 71 shifts the RT state from “low RT” to “high RT” when the symbol combination related to “7-match replay” is displayed along the effective line, and from the advantageous section, The state regarding notification is shifted to the section. In addition, the main control board 71 shifts the state relating to the notification from the normal section to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied in the normal section. Therefore, the main control board 71 includes the RT state control means, the state end means, and It functions as a state starting means.

  The main control board 71 counts the number of games that have passed during the advantageous section, and when the number of games that have passed reaches the number corresponding to the ceiling of the number of games, when the “choice number rep” is won, “7 matches” The main control board 71 functions as a counting unit and a notification unit in order to notify the mode of the stop operation necessary for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to “Replay”. In addition, since the main control board 71 can determine the number of times corresponding to the number of games at the start of the advantageous section (that is, a period during which no notification is given during the advantageous section), the main control board 71 has a predetermined value setting means. Function as.

<Gameability using advantageous sections>
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, a new method for realizing game play using an advantageous section in the pachislot 1 will be described. In a pachislot having a normal section and an advantageous section, it is difficult to change the probability of transition to the advantageous section during the normal section, while lottery can be performed with various probabilities during the advantageous section. Therefore, “normally advantageous” and “ART” are provided as advantageous sections so that it is possible to shift from “normally advantageous” to “ART”, and the probability of transitioning from “normally advantageous” to “ART” of the advantageous section and “normally advantageous” ”To“ ART ”is made different from each other, thereby realizing a plurality of states having different transition probabilities to“ ART ”(for example,“ normal ”in the third embodiment is normally advantageous) Normal mode “low accuracy” “heaven”, etc.).

  By the way, since there is an upper limit (limit) in the advantageous section, if the transition from “normally advantageous” is the main transition route as the transition route to “ART”, the limit process is performed. The “ART” period during which games can be played in the “ordinary advantage” (advantageous section) is lost. Therefore, in this control, the transition from the normal section to “ART” is set as the main transition route to “ART”, and even when the limit process is performed, the period of “ART” that can be played is set. Prevent waste.

  FIG. 162 (A) is an example of the transition flow of the gaming state when this control is suitably used. Note that the details of each gaming state are the same as described above, and are therefore omitted. In addition, the description of each transition condition and transition probability is omitted except for those related to game play using this control.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 can shift the gaming state from (1) the normal section to the “normally advantageous” section from the normal section, and (2) “ART” from the normal section to the advantageous section. The gaming state can be shifted to. Further, the main control board 71 can (3) shift the game state from “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section to the normal section, and (4) “ART” in “normally advantageous” in the advantageous section. The gaming state can be shifted to. Here, as shown in the figure, the expected degree of transition to “ART” is higher in the normal section than in “normally advantageous”. In other words, the probability that the transition condition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in the normal section and the probability that the transition condition to “ART” (start condition of “ART”) is satisfied in “normal advantage” Then, the former is a higher probability.

  By controlling the gaming state in this way, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), during non-ART, the expected transition to “ART” from “ordinary advantage” having a lower expected transition to “ART” A game is played aiming at a normal section with a high. In other words, during non-ART, there is a game of how to exit the advantageous section ("normally advantageous") and shift to the normal section. And since it will transfer to "ART" directly from a normal area, even if it is a case where a limit process is performed according to this control, the period of "ART" which can be played will not be wasted. .

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachislot 1 performs limit processing when the number of games consumed during the advantageous section reaches the limit threshold, and the main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the progress of the game shown in FIG. The main control board 71 functions as game control means.

  In addition, when the first condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to “normally advantageous”, and when the second condition is satisfied in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state to “ART”. When the third condition is satisfied in “normally advantageous”, the gaming state is shifted to the normal section, and when the fourth condition is satisfied in “normally advantageous”, the gaming state is shifted to “ART”. The main control board 71 functions as state control means because the main control board 71 is more easily shifted to “ART” from the normal section than from “normally advantageous”.

<Gameability using bonus combination with no set difference during normal section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 163, control using a bonus combination without a setting difference in the normal section in the pachislot 1 will be described. In a pachislot that has an advantageous section, various benefits can be given by using the bonus combination as an opportunity, for example, when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the advantageous section and then the bonus is activated, the main control The board 71 can give a privilege when the bonus is activated (common processing). The bonus associated with the bonus operation during this advantageous section can be given in common to a plurality of bonus combinations, and even if the bonus combination has a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, Benefits can be granted during operation. Although the common process is performed when the bonus is activated during the advantageous section, the bonus is not performed unless the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination. It can be said that this is a process to be performed.

  Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, the main control board 71 can give a privilege (normal processing). Although bonuses during the regular section can be granted separately for each of the bonus combinations, bonus combinations that have a setting difference in the probability of being determined as an internal winning combination can be given. It can be done only when winning a bonus combination with no setting difference.

  In this control, the following playability is realized by using the difference between the normal process and the common process. First, with reference to FIG. 163 (A), a configuration of a bonus combination that can be suitably used in the present control will be described. In this control as shown in the figure, BB1 and BB2 are provided as bonuses, and these bonuses can be determined as internal winning combinations by overlapping with other combinations. Specifically, in this control, the role “F_BB1” that BB1 wins alone, the role “F_BB2” that BB2 wins alone, and “F_BB2 + special role” that BB2 wins together with a special role. Have the role. “F_BB1” is set so that there is no setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination, and “F_BB1” is set so that there is a setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination, and “F_BB2 +” The special role is set so that there is no setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination.

  In such a configuration of bonus combination, during the advantageous period, even if any of “F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, and “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination (at the time of subsequent bonus operation) The main control board 71 performs common processing. As a result, during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 gives a common privilege regardless of the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the main control board 71 can perform a specific process (normal process) according to the type of bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination. When “F_BB1” is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section, processing unique to “F_BB1” (normal processing) is performed, and “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section. Then, processing (normal processing) unique to “F_BB2 + special role” is performed. On the other hand, even if “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination during the normal section, “F_BB2” is a bonus combination having a setting difference, and thus no processing is performed. As a result, during the normal section, the main control board 71 gives a unique privilege according to the type of bonus combination (“F_BB1”, “F_BB2”, “F_BB2 + special combination”).

  In this control, a game characteristic peculiar to this control is realized by providing a difference between the common privilege by the common process in the advantageous section and the unique privilege by the normal process (inherent process) in the normal section. To do. As an example, as shown in FIG. 163 (A), the probability that “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination is set lower than other bonus combinations, while “F_BB2 + special combination” in the normal section The unique privilege based on the “comb” is made larger than the common privilege based on the common process in the advantageous section. More specifically, “F_BB2 + special combination” is a so-called premium bonus combination (for example, winning about 1/16384 common to settings 1 to 6), and when it is determined as an internal winning combination during the normal section , Give a very big privilege according to the premier role. On the other hand, when it is determined as an internal winning combination during an advantageous section, a bonus common to other bonus combinations is granted.

  By doing in this way, according to this control, it can be made into the period which can receive a premium privilege during a normal section, and on the contrary, the period which cannot receive a premium privilege during an advantageous section can do. In a pachislot that has a normal section and an advantageous section, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the advantageous section, so that it is informed that it is staying in the advantageous section. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the player is in the advantageous zone from the lighting state of the status indicator 147b. There is a possibility. In this respect, according to this control, since it is possible to receive a premium privilege when it is not in the advantageous section, even if it is found from the lighting state of the state indicator 147b that it is in the normal section, the operation of the game is continued. It can suppress that it falls.

  In this control, when “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous section, only a small privilege based on the common process is granted, and the player may feel a loss. Therefore, the main control board 71 basically uses a combination of common symbols when the “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination and when the “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination. The stop control is performed so as to be displayed along the line. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 163 (C), when the stop operation is performed in the “first operation mode”, the main control board 71 is the case where “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination. Even if “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination, stop control is performed so that a common symbol combination is displayed along the active line. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed in the “second operation mode”, the main control board 71 sets “F_BB2 + special role” even if “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination. A combination of symbols that is different from the case where it is determined as an internal winning combination (for example, a combination of symbols corresponding to “F_BB2”, a combination of symbols corresponding to “special role” when winning “F_BB2 +” special combination) is effective. Stop control is performed so that it is displayed along the line.

  At this time, in the “first operation mode” in which a combination of common symbols is displayed, the timing of the stop operation is that a missing role other than “special role” occurs (not a pull-in 1). It is preferable that there is no timing (so-called “small role recovery batting method”). More preferably, the “second operation mode” in which individual symbol combinations are displayed is a timing at which the timing of the stop operation is missed for a small role that causes a missed event other than “special role”. More preferably, the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to the “special role” is displayed along the active line is a symbol corresponding to a small role for which a missing portion other than the “special role” occurs. Is less than the number of medals to be paid out when the combination is displayed along the active line.

  By doing in this way, as long as the game is played in the “first operation mode (small role collection batting method)”, whether “F_BB2” is determined as the internal winning combination from the displayed symbol combination, Since it is not possible to determine whether “F_BB2 + special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination, there is no sense of loss. Note that the example shown in FIG. 163 has a combination of “F_BB2” and “F_BB2 + special combination”, but is not limited thereto. That is, in this control, the bonus combination (BB2) is common, and it is only necessary that the type of combination that is won in combination with the bonus combination is different.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R that are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and the main control board 71 controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. It functions as a control means.

  In addition, when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the advantageous section, the main control board 71 executes a common process for giving a common privilege regardless of the determined bonus combination type, When "F_BB2 + special combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, it functions as a common processing unit and an individual processing unit in order to give a premium privilege.

[Modification]
Subsequently, a modification of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 to 173.

<Another control for advantageous lottery lottery>
First, with reference to FIG. 164 to FIG. 167, a modified example related to the advantageous section transition lottery will be described. FIG. 164 (A) shows the probability of winning the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section (advantageous section transition probability (= P (X))) for each gaming state in the normal section. Note that the reference item “when an accessory is not activated” in FIG. 164 is a state where an accessory (such as a first-type special accessory) is not operating. In addition, “general during non-actual operation (hereinafter referred to as“ general medium ”)” is a state in which a combination is not activated and a bonus combination is not determined as an internal winning combination. In addition, “inside when the character is not activated (hereinafter“ inside ””) is a state in which the character is not activated and a bonus character is determined as an internal winning character (between flags) It is. In addition, “in general when BB is not activated (hereinafter,“ in general when BB ”)” is a state in which a bonus is not being activated, but a bonus is being activated. Further, the reference item “when the accessory is activated” is a state where the accessory is operating. Further, “in RB operation at the time of actuating an accessory (hereinafter,“ in operation of RB ”)” is a state in which a first-type special accessory (RB) among the actors is in operation. In addition, “when the CB is operating (hereinafter referred to as“ CB is operating ”)” is a state in which the second type special accessory (CB) is operating.

  In the pachi-slot 1, the main control board 71 can perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section, but it is necessary to ensure that the advantageous section transition probability is uniform. Therefore, this lottery cannot be performed except for “general medium” when the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination (excluding replay) varies depending on the gaming state. The principle pattern in FIG. 164 (A) shows a pattern in which the advantageous section transition probability varies depending on the gaming state. In such a principle pattern, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 can perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section only in “general”, and cannot perform it in other cases. .

  Here, since it is only necessary to ensure that the advantageous section transition probability is uniform, if the lottery value used for the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination is common, the uniformity guarantee is ensured. Therefore, the main control board 71 can exceptionally perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section.

  As an example, exception pattern 1 in the figure is a lottery value used for an internal lottery regarding a small role (a winning combination with a payout) and a replay (hereinafter referred to as “favorable zone lottery target role”) whose winning probability does not change even when the RT state changes. Shows a case where “general medium”, “internal medium”, and “BB general medium” are common (in other words, the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common). In the case of this exceptional pattern 1, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 can perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section for “medium inside” and “BB medium” as well as “general medium”. it can.

  In addition, exception pattern 2 in the figure shows a case where “RB in operation” is “general medium”, “inside medium”, and “BB general medium” and the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common. In the case of this exceptional pattern 2, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71, as shown in FIG. It can be performed.

  In addition, exception pattern 3 in the same figure shows a case where the winning probability of the advantageous section lottery target combination is common among “in CB operation”, “inside”, “inside”, “in BB”, and “in RB operation”. In the case of this exceptional pattern 3, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), the main control board 71 is advantageous in that “inside”, “in BB in general”, “in RB operation”, “in CB operation” and “in general”. Transition lottery to the section can be performed.

  “Inside”, “RB in operation”, “BB in general”, and “CB in operation” are provided according to the specification of the pachislot, and may not be partly depending on the specification of the pachislot. As an example, BB (Continuous Actuator for Type 1 Special) and RB (Type 1 Special) are not installed, and CB (Type 2 Special) is installed (MB (Type 2 Special) A continuous differential device) may be included), or a BB or RB installed, but “BB in general” or “RB in operation” will be subjected to lottery transfer to an advantageous section. In the pachislot, the main control board 71, as shown in the exception pattern 4 in FIG. 164 (B), makes the “general medium” and the “inside medium”. It is possible to perform lottery transfer to an advantageous section when “CB is in operation”.

  The main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to an advantageous section based on not only a role having no setting difference in the probability determined as an internal winning combination (setting unquestioned role) but also a role having a setting difference (setting difference role). It may be done. Further, the main control board 71 may perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, or may be performed with different probabilities according to the set value.

  Here, FIG. 165 performs the lottery to the advantageous section based on both the unquestioned setting and the setting difference, and performs the lottery to the advantageous section with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value. It is an example of the transfer lottery table to the advantageous section used suitably in the case.

  In principle, the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the advantageous section only during “general during” “when the accessory is not in operation”. As an exception, even in a state other than “general medium”, it is possible to guarantee that the result of lottery transfer to the advantageous section is uniform only when the same configuration as “general medium” is used. Transfer lottery can be performed. For example, in the example shown in the figure, the internal winning probabilities of “Replay 1”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Push order bell 1” to “Push order bell 6” are “BB in general” and “RB in operation”. If it is the same as “general medium”, lottery transfer to the advantageous section may be performed in the same manner as “general medium”. In addition, when the specification is such that “no replay” is won during the bonus state such as “BB in general” or “RB in operation”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section at the time of the “general” replay is not performed (lottery processing) Uniformity can be ensured if the lottery value is set to “0” even if the lottery process is performed, even if it is excluded from the target itself.

  In the figure, “Replay 1” is a replaying player whose winning probability does not change even if the RT state changes, and “Replay 2” is a replaying player whose winning probability changes when the RT state changes. (Note 1) As shown in (Replay 2), if a lottery for the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the transition probability for the advantageous section differs depending on the RT state, and uniformity cannot be ensured. No. 71 does not perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section even when “Replay 2” is won. On the other hand, since “Replay 1” can ensure uniformity, the main control board 71 can perform lottery transfer to an advantageous section when winning “Replay 1”. Even if the replay has a different winning probability in the RT state or the like, the main control board 71 may perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section only during the non-acting replay probability non-variable state (RT0) in which the RT state is inactive. Good.

  In the figure, “Cherry” may be determined as an internal winning combination alone, “Cherry (No. 3)”, or may be determined as an internal winning combination together with BB1 “BB1 + Cherry (No. 11). ) " In this case, since both of the reference lotteries are “cherry”, as shown in (Note 2), the main control board 71 uses the lottery value of the transition lottery linked to “cherry” to enter the advantageous section. Perform transition lottery.

  On the other hand, regarding watermelons, “Watermelon 1 (No. 4)” and “BB2 + Watermelon 2 (No. 12)” have different reference lots for “Watermelon 1” and “Watermelon 2”. For this reason, as shown in (Note 3), the main control board 71 can perform lottery transfer to an advantageous section using different lottery values.

  In addition, the bonus combination determined as an internal winning combination alone such as “RB (No. 13)” is an internal winning combination in “inside”, “in BB general”, “in RB operation”, and “in CB operation”. The probability determined as fluctuates from “medium”. Therefore, as shown in (Note 4), even if the main control board 71 wins “RB” determined as an internal winning combination alone, the main control board 71 does not perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section.

  Subsequently, FIG. 166 is preferably used when the lottery to the advantageous section is performed based on both the setting unquestioned role and the setting difference and the lottery to the advantageous section is performed with different probabilities according to the set values. It is an example of the transfer lottery table to the advantageous section to be performed.

  As shown in the figure, the main control board 71 may perform lottery transfer to the advantageous section with different probabilities according to the set values. In addition, the method of providing the setting difference in the transition lottery to the advantageous section is arbitrary. For example, the winning probability of the transition lottery to the advantageous section may be made different in all setting values such as “Replay 1”. Moreover, it is good also as common in a part of setting value like "push order bell 1"-"push order bell 6". In addition, for a combination having a different probability determined as an internal winning combination such as “Cherry”, the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section may be performed with a different probability according to the set value. Further, as in “watermelon 2”, the winning probability of lottery transfer to the advantageous section may be made common to all set values. In “push order bell 1” to “push order bell 6”, the winning probability of transition lottery to the advantageous section in “push order bell 1” to the winning probability of transition lottery to the advantageous section in “push order bell 6” However, the winning probability may be made different depending on the type of “push order bell”.

  Subsequently, FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating a method for calculating a proportion of an accessory in the present modification. FIG. 167 (A) shows a method for calculating the proportion of an accessory in a model having no instruction function (AT) for informing (instructing) a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. In the case of such a model, the main control board 71 is paid out while one of the objects is operating (in bonus operation) with respect to the total number of medals (= X + Y) paid out in all gaming states. The ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as the accessory ratio.

  FIG. 167 (B) shows a first method for calculating the proportion of an accessory in a model having an instruction function, and FIG. 167 (C) shows a second method for calculating the proportion of an accessory in a model having an instruction function. is there. In the case of having the instruction function, medals to be paid out to the player are (X) medals to be paid out during the bonus operation, (Y) medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation, and (Z) bonus It can be divided into medals to be paid out in a state where the instruction function is not activated.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (B), in the first calculation method, the main control board 71 is paid out during the bonus operation with respect to the total number of medals (= X + Y + Z) paid out in all gaming states. A ratio occupied by the total number of medals (= X) is calculated as an accessory ratio. In addition, as shown in FIG. 167 (C), in the second calculation method, the main control board 71 pays out the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states (= X + Y + Z) during the bonus operation. The proportion of the sum (= X + Y) of the total number of medals awarded and the total number of medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation is calculated as an accessory ratio.

  In a model having an instruction function, the accessory ratio may be calculated using the first calculation method, or the accessory ratio may be calculated using the second calculation method. In addition, by using the second calculation method, it is easy to detect not only the goth that activates the bonus illegally but also the goth act that illegally activates the instruction function, thereby improving security. it can. Note that the first calculation method and the second calculation method may be switched manually or automatically after time has passed.

  Moreover, it is good also as changing the method of calculating an accessory ratio according to the transfer lottery method to an advantageous area. For example, when the main control board 71 performs the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section with the same probability regardless of the set value as shown in FIG. 165, the main control board 71 calculates the ratio of the accessory by the first calculation method. It is good also as displaying on the ratio display 422. In addition, for example, when the main control board 71 performs lottery transfer to the advantageous section with different probabilities according to the set values as shown in FIG. 166, the proportion of the objects is calculated using the first calculation method and the second calculation method. It is good also as calculating both and displaying both on the ratio display 422.

  If there are too many items to be displayed on the ratio indicator 422, the calculation load on the main (main control board 71) side becomes large. Therefore, when displaying the proportion of an accessory calculated by the second calculation method, It is also possible not to display the specific section ratio (advantageous section ratio (= a value indicating the ratio of the number of games staying in the advantageous section out of the total number of games)).

  In addition, the calculation method of (Y) medals to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function in a state other than the bonus operation is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 may add the number of medals actually paid out to a payout number counter for calculation so as not to deviate from the actual payout number. In this case, if the batting order (pressing order) is missed as a result of a stop operation different from the instruction (navigation), the value of the payout number counter is maintained or the value is changed by processing +0 sheets. do not do. On the other hand, when the instruction (navigation) is performed, the main control board 71 may calculate a medal to be paid out during the operation of the instruction function, assuming that a medal corresponding to the batting order has been paid out. Good. In this case, the main control board 71 may update the value of the payout number counter by the number of medals corresponding to the batting order when the batting order is determined as the internal winning combination. Thereby, it is possible to grasp the behavior of the gaming machine that is not affected by an accidental operation error of the player.

  In addition, the medal for calculating the payout number of (Y) may be a medal paid out during the operation of the instruction function, or a medal paid out in response to the instruction function being activated. May be. Here, in the pachislot, during the ART (while the instruction function is in operation), a combination (for example, a pushing order bell (batting order bell)) in which a game result (for example, the number of medals to be paid out) differs depending on the mode of the stop operation is an internal winning. When a role is determined, the player is notified of a mode of advantageous stop operation to the player, while a role having a different game result regardless of the mode of the stop operation (for example, a so-called rare role such as watermelon or cherry) When it is determined as a winning combination, there is no need to notify the player, so the stop operation mode is not notified to the player.

When the payout number of (Y) is calculated from the former (medals paid out during operation of the instruction function), the main control board 71 pays out during ART (in operation of the instruction function) regardless of the presence or absence of notification. Using all the medals (for example, including medals paid out with a rare combination), the payout number of (Y) is calculated. On the other hand, when calculating the payout number of (Y) from the latter (medals paid out in response to the activation of the instruction function), the main control board 71 is in the ART (operation of the instruction function) as a result of the notification. Only the medals paid out in (medium) are used to calculate the payout number in (Y), and the medals paid out without notification are used in calculating the payout number in (Z).
In the latter case, the main control board 71 may perform the following control.

  As described above, during the operation of the instruction function, when the winning combination that displays a combination of different symbols depending on the stopping operation mode is determined as the internal winning combination, the mode of the stopping operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. To do. As a role to be notified by such an instruction function, for example, a predetermined symbol combination (Bell-Bell-Bell) is displayed at the correct push order, and a specific symbol combination (Bell spilling) at the incorrect push order Is displayed (push order bell (batting order bell)), but depending on the pachislot (retraction 1), a combination in which a predetermined symbol combination (bell-bell-bell) is displayed. (Common bell) may be provided. Although such a “common bell” does not need to notify the player of the mode of the stop operation, whether the winning combination is “push order bell” when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed. Since it is possible to grasp whether it is a "common bell" from the presence / absence of notification, the main control board 71 and / or the sub-control board 72 is a case where the "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, It is also possible to notify the push order in a dramatic manner.

  Here, the notification of the pressing order when the “common bell” is won is an effect and does not affect the game result (the number of medals to be paid out). Therefore, when the payout number of (Y) is calculated from the latter, it is not necessary to include the number of medals paid out by the “common bell” in the payout number of (Y). ”May or may not be included in the (Y) payout number.

  When the number of medals paid out by the “common bell” is included in the payout number of (Y), a counter for counting the number of payouts is uniformly added when the instruction function is activated (the notification lamp 147a is turned on). Since the processing can be performed uniformly, the program capacity on the main (main control board 71) side can be reduced.

  The notification of the pressing order when the “common bell” is won can be performed by the main control board 71 using the notification lamp 147a, but can also be performed by the sub control board 72 using the display unit 100. It can also be performed on both the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Here, when only the sub-control board 72 notifies the pushing order when the “common bell” is won and the main control board 71 does not, the instruction function is not activated and the “common bell” is issued. The number of medals awarded may not be included in the payout number of (Y).

  Further, the main control board 71 gives an instruction at the time of winning the role of the pull-in 1 such as “common bell” when the ratio of the accessory is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (for example, 60%) close to a predetermined value (70%). If the function activation (lighting of the notification lamp 147a) is reduced or prevented from being activated, etc., and the percentage of the accessory is less than a predetermined threshold (for example, less than 60%), the pull-in 1 It is also possible to change the frequency of activation of the instruction function when the winning combination of the pull-in 1 is won, such as allowing the instruction function to be activated when the combination is won.

<An example of another advantageous section configuration>
In the examples and specification examples up to this point, the advantageous section is based on the concept of one advantageous section, and in that state, it is easy to generate a batting order instruction (navigation), and to devise a state where it is difficult for it to occur. We have described the inventions that enhance the fun of games while increasing the whiteness of the ball design. From here, the concept of advantageous sections will be further subdivided to organize the game,
It is also possible to increase the efficiency of development. Hereinafter, as an example, as illustrated in FIG. 168, a description will be given of a scheme in which, among advantageous sections, a section in which the number of balls is difficult to increase is defined as an “effect section” and a section in which the number of balls is generally increased is defined as an “increase section”. .

First, each section is defined as follows as a premise.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the generation of instructions is arbitrary), and the transition ratio to the production section or the increase section is set at a ratio of one.
Production section: A section where the payout rate does not exceed 1 (the generation of instructions is arbitrary), and the transition ratio to other production sections or increased sections is the same as the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function) Sections with different contents. It is included in the advantageous section. Note that “ordinary advantage” in the above description may be a gameability defined as an effect section as in the present plan.
Increase section: This is the section where game medals increase by pushing (always, the payout rate does not always exceed 1). Unlike the normal section and the performance section, instructions are given for each state of the predetermined increase section in the increase section. A section where processing related to the function can be performed freely. It is included in the advantageous section.
On the premise of this definition, the advantageous section lamp should be turned on when the stage or winning section is won, and turned on when the payout rate exceeds 1, and turned off when initialized. . By doing so, there is no situation where medals are not increased even though the advantageous section lamp is lit, so that at least the number of medals increases, so that the gaming machine can be easily understood by the player.
In addition, when the increase section is terminated, the parameters relating to the performance related to the instruction function are initialized and transferred to the normal section, thereby ensuring fairness among the players. Then, as in the case of winning in the advantageous section continuation lottery at the end of the above-mentioned “ART”, the state where the number of balls is reduced in the gaming state in which the transition to the production section after the increasing section is expected and the “ART” villa is expected Even so, the specification may be made in consideration of maintaining the advantageous section lamp in a lit state and preventing the player from stopping the game in a state where there is a possibility that “winning” may continue.

The transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same, and the transition destination (contents of processing related to the instruction function) is different, for example, refers to the following game specifications.
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in normal section Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100
Destination distribution direction stage (CZ) 75% increase section (ART) 25%
Probability of transition Production section (CZ) about 1/133 Increase section (ART) about 1/400
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in effect section (CZ) Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the transition ratio is the same.
Destination distribution stage Production section (upper CZ) 10% Increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) about 1/1000 Increase section (ART) about 1/111
In this way, by changing the distribution of the transfer destination, the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery is referred to the same value, and the advantageous section is shifted to an increasing section where medals increase like “ART”, Like “ordinary advantage” and “SCZ”, although the increase in medals cannot be expected very much, it is possible to widen the distribution of whether or not to get the chance to win the ART and simplify the overall processing flow. However, various game state transition variations can be created.
Note that if the performance section is too long, the player is excessively forced to play a game in a state where an increase in medals cannot be expected, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable. A certain number of games, such as a game, may be set as the upper limit. The number of games that function as an index that does not restrict the player excessively, such as when the number of consumed medals reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of hitting bells reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8). It is good also as end conditions of an effect section with reference to parameters other than.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination having no setting difference. However, in this modification, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the determination of the internal winning combination having the setting difference. To do. Even in this case, referring to a lottery table common to all settings without any difference in the lottery table related to the advantageous section, the difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination To create a difference. Thereby, it is possible to create a difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate without increasing the capacity of the lottery table itself related to the advantageous section.

When the “effect section” is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous section lamp because it is possible to expect an increase in the number of game medals due to the advantageous section, the production section and the bonus operation. During the bonus operation, you can enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section lamp without digesting work. In this case, when the transition to the production section (CZ or the like) is once performed after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp is turned off when the bonus ends. When shifting to an increased section (such as ART) after the bonus, it is preferable that the advantageous section lamp is kept on as it is.
During the so-called ART preparation to transfer RT to high RT, it is not necessarily in a state where the payout rate exceeds 1, but it is definite that the right to shift to ART that is very advantageous for the player has already been granted. By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is inadvertently stopped while leaving the ART right.

In addition, not only the internal winning combination but also the lottery and determination related to the advantageous section may be performed based on the display appearance on the effective line of the main reel (also referred to as symbol combination, winning result, result display). For example, there is an internal winning combination A that can win either a three-piece combination or a one-piece combination depending on the timing of pushing. In this case, if 3 winning combinations are won, no advantageous section related lottery will be performed, or if a single winning combination is won under conditions that are less favorable than if 1 winning combination is awarded, an advantageous section related lottery will be performed. As a result, it is recommended to use a batting method that deliberately avoids the winning of the three-piece role by deliberately aiming at the player. It is possible to make the specification that an ART is easy to win for a player who selects a low hitting method.
By adopting such a specification, instead of reducing the number of medals by aiming at the three-piece role in normal times, you can enjoy a game for a long time with a game characteristic that is difficult to win ART, or aim at the one-piece role at normal times Thus, the player can arbitrarily select whether to enjoy the short-time gameability that is easy to win the ART instead of the speed at which the medals decrease, and the range of the gameability is expanded.
Note that the above is only an example, and is not limited to a condition that requires a small number of payouts such as a single winning combination, but an RT transition outcome that shifts to an RT with a low degree of advantage by pushing (small role spilling or falling replay) ) Is displayed or a small combination is missed, the advantageous section-related lottery may be performed under better conditions than when an advantageous display result is derived.
When this idea is organized, when a predetermined internal winning combination having different display results depending on the stop operation mode is determined, it is most advantageous in terms of benefits due to winning determination for awarding a game value (medal), RT transition, or bonus operation, etc. Content that is more advantageous than the case in which a lottery related to a predetermined advantageous section is drawn based on the fact that a display result that is not is derived, or the lottery content of the advantageous section related lottery is derived from the most advantageous display result regarding the benefit of the expense determination It can be expressed as it is done in.

Increased the number of bonuses per game during ART to about 3 by making the internal winning combination redundantly determined so that the medals can be substantially reduced while some bonuses are active. During the method or bonus operation, only the net increase will be established and the bonus will be zero. By using the bonus in the game machine type test, the speed of increase during ART is offset and adapted. Specifications are also conceivable. In addition, as a bonus lot related lottery is performed inside the bonus, it is possible to contain the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win by increasing the small role probability by staying in the bonus zone RT also in the normal zone, the production zone, and the advantageous zone. Such a specification may be adopted in accordance with the modified example to provide a gaming machine with an appropriate payout speed that is highly desired by the player and the game hall.
In addition, some players feel that gambling is high when the ball speed is high, so the number of limiter games should be shortened from 1500 games to 1200 games, etc. to appropriately suppress gambling and prevent so-called encroachment. You may consider it from a viewpoint.
In addition, the number of games serving as the limiter activation condition may be counted from the start of the advantageous section including the effect section or from the start of the increase section. In addition, in the game of the day, starting from the difference number at the most negative time point when viewed from the customer side, the limiter is activated when 3000 medals increase from that point. With reference to the situation such as the number of games, gambling may be suppressed by a limiter according to factors other than the number of games.

  Moreover, it is good also as using the game specification shown in FIG. 169 as an example from which the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production area or an increase area is the same, and the transition destination (the content of the process related to the instruction function) is different.

  Specifically, FIG. 169 (A) shows an example of a transfer lottery table used for transfer lottery to the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, lottery value information regarding the lottery result is defined for each reference item (internal winning combination) in the transition lottery table. Here, as a lottery result, a process to be performed at the time of winning (winning process) is defined. As shown in FIG. 169 (B), this winning process varies depending on the state of stay when the winning process is determined. For example, even when “winning process 1” is determined, When the staying state is the “normal section”, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the effect section A, and when the staying state is the “effect section A”, the main control board 71 The control board 71 performs a transition from the effect section A to the effect section B. By doing so, it is possible to realize control with the same transition ratio (winning probability) and different transition destinations (contents of processing related to the instruction function), and as a result, guarantees the uniformity of the advantageous section transition probability. It is possible to achieve fair game play and to reduce the data capacity.

  Note that the main control board 71 may perform free lottery or the like by referring to a table or the like determined in advance during the “increase section”. For example, a plurality of states (additional low accuracy, high accuracy, ultrahigh accuracy, specialized zone) and the like can be provided in the “increase section”, and additional lottery can be performed according to the current state.

<Another example of the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp>
Subsequently, referring to FIG. 170, the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147 b) in pachislot 1 having “effect section” and “increased section” as advantageous sections, in particular, “increase section”. The relationship between the notification effect that notifies that the determination has been made and the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 having the “effect section” and the “increase section”, the main control board 71 can turn on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of transition to the “increase section”, not the timing of transition to the advantage section. Further, in the pachi-slot 1, the sub control board 72 can execute an effect (a precursor effect) regarding whether or not it is possible to shift to the “increase interval” during the “effect interval”. As shown below, in this control, when it is determined to shift to the “increase section”, the sub-control board 72 performs the sign effect during the “effect section” and the “increase section as a result of the sign effect. The main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp when performing a notification effect informing that the decision to shift to "" is made, and then shifting from the "effect section" to the "increase section". In other words, in the present control, the main control board 71 turns on the advantageous section lamp after the notification of the warning result by the sub-control board 72.

  First, FIG. 170 (A) is a first pattern showing a relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of notifying the result of the warning (timing of notification effect). In the same figure, in the lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the main control board 71 determines to shift to the “increase section” after shifting to the “effect section”. Due to this determination, the main control board 71 has shifted the gaming state to the “effect zone” of the advantageous zone from the timing when the transition to the “increasing zone” has been won, but the advantageous zone lamp has not been lit yet. In order to use the “effect section” as a precursor to the “increase section”, the sub-control board 72 performs a precursor effect that encourages the transition to the “increase section” during the “effect section” via the display unit 100. Thereafter, when the sign is about to end, the sub-control board 72 performs a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “increasing section” via the display unit 100. In the example shown in the figure, since it is determined to shift to the “increase interval” in the lottery to the advantageous interval performed during the normal interval, the sub-control board 72 changes to the “increase interval” in the notification effect. Informs that it has been decided to shift. Thereafter, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the “effect section” to the “increase section”, but turns on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of transition to the “increase section”.

  Next, FIG. 170 (B) is a second pattern showing the relationship between the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp and the timing of the notification effect. In the same figure, in the lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section, the main control board 71 determines to end the advantageous section without moving to the “increasing section” after moving to the “effect section”. . As a result of this determination, the main control board 71 has shifted the gaming state to the “effect section” of the advantageous section, but the advantageous section lamp has not been lit yet. The main control board 71 performs the lottery even during the “effect section”, and in the example shown in the figure, the transition to the “increase section” is determined as a result of the lottery in the “effect section”. Similarly to FIG. 170 (A), the sub control board 72 performs an indication effect that shifts to the “increase interval” during the “effect interval” via the display unit 100. Thereafter, when the sign is about to end, the sub-control board 72 performs a notification effect for notifying whether or not to shift to the “increasing section” via the display unit 100. In the case of the example shown in the figure, the transition lottery to the advantageous section performed during the normal section has not been determined to transition to the “increase section”, but the transition lottery performed during the subsequent “production section” “increase” Since it is determined to shift to “section”, the sub-control board 72 notifies that it is determined to shift to “increase section” in the notification effect. Thereafter, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the “effect section” to the “increase section”, but turns on the advantageous section lamp at the timing of transition to the “increase section”.

  By performing the lighting timing of the advantageous section lamp after the notification effect in this way, according to this control, the player moves to the “increase section” when performing the warning effect or notification effect in the “effect section”. There is no way of knowing whether or not he / she has won the transition, and his interest in the production will not be lost.

  Next, FIG. 170 (C) is another example of the lottery result (winning process) of the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, when the “winning process 1” is determined in the lottery for the transition to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the “effect section” and the “effect section”. After 15 games have elapsed, the advantageous section is ended and the normal section is started. Further, when the “winning process 2” is determined in the lottery to the advantageous section in the normal section, the main control board 71 shifts from the normal section to the “production section”, and 15 games have elapsed in the “production section”. Later, the process proceeds to ART (“increase section”) in which the initial number of games is 50.

  By doing in this way, the length of the “direction section (precursor)” depending on whether the transition lottery during the normal section has won the transition to the “increase section (ART)” or not. Can be the same. From the player's point of view, the subsequent development cannot be predicted during the “production section (precursor)”, so that the game is played without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the main control board 71, for the “effect section” of the advantageous sections, performs the push order navigation when winning the push order, that is, push order navigation that has the benefit of increasing the number of balls due to the occurrence of the navigation even once. It may be possible to end without generating. Because the “performance section” is a section where the advantageous section lamp is not lit, the player does not feel that there is no benefit even though it is lit, and there is no risk of discouraging the player. is there. In addition, the main control board 71 may allow a slight increase in the number of balls or a reduction in the consumption of medals by notifying the pressing order in the game won in the pressing order during the “effect section”. It is desirable that the notification frequency of the push order in the game winning the push order is relatively low as compared with the “increase section”, so that the number of balls is not increased so much. This is because, if the increase in medals in the “direction section” is increased, the payout to be paid out in the “increase section” may be relatively reduced for balance adjustment of the ball.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub-control board]
In order to realize the control peculiar to the pachislot 1 as described above, the main control board (main control circuit 91, main CPU 93) and the sub control board (sub control circuit 101, sub CPU 102) of the pachislot 1 are as follows. It has a function.

  The pachi-slot 1 has a plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R having a plurality of symbols drawn on the surface, and a plurality of stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R which are provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and can be stopped by the player. The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S and controls the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, so that the main control board 71 functions as a game control unit.

  Further, the main control board 71 can determine the transition of the gaming state, and at the same time, the main control board 71 sets the gaming state to at least a normal section and an advantageous section having an “effect section” and an “increase section” that are more advantageous than the normal section. Since it can be controlled, the main control board 71 functions as a transition determination unit and a state control unit.

  Further, the main control board 71, when the gaming state becomes the “increasing section”, lights the advantageous section lamp that can notify that the gaming state is the “increasing section”, the main control board 71 and the advantageous section lamp It functions as a notification means.

  Further, the sub control board 72 can control the effect via the display unit 100 and can execute a notification effect (specific effect) for notifying that the game state has been determined to shift to the “increasing section”. Therefore, the sub control board 72 and the display unit 100 function as an effect control unit and a notification effect executing means.

  Further, the main control board 71 controls the notification lamp 147a to notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to perform the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. In order to notify the mode, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub control board 72, and the display unit 100 function as notification means.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)>
Next, another example of the limiter used for the limit process of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. So far, the limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter referred to as “game number limiter”) has been described as the advantageous section limiter. However, the type of advantageous section limiter is not limited to the game number limiter. Absent. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a “number limiter”.

  FIG. 171 (A) is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis represents the difference number (= the number of payouts-the number of input), which is also referred to as a net increase. The plus and minus of the difference number is a value seen from the player. If the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of inserted medals (the player's plus), it is plus or minus. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis represents the number of games, and the further to the right, the more games are consumed from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 is obtained, starting from the point when the number of medals has decreased the most so that the player does not acquire an extremely large number of medals at once. It is something to be made.

  In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased since the start of the advantageous section. This is because, for example, the number of medals has decreased during ART preparation or a precursor state. The medal continues to increase from the time when the advantageous section starts to be −100, and finally the medal increases to about +2300. At this point, at the player's perspective, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter and forcibly ends the advantageous section. Thereby, euphoria can be suppressed appropriately.

  The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the game number limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter. It is good also as performing the limit process of an advantageous area using both a limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when either limiter activation condition is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this description, the game number limiter is 1500 games and the number limiter is 2400. However, this is only an example, and a smaller value or a larger value is adopted according to the game specifications to appropriately improve gambling. It is good also as what controls.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, the slope value A (the expected net increase per game, the expected net increase including the increase due to the bonus operation) for the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) and the trigger condition for the game number limiter The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is the trigger condition for the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the slope value A for increasing medals in the advantageous section is “3”, and the number of games B that is the trigger condition for the number of games limiter is “100 games”.

  In the first specification, the specification of the relationship of inclination value A × game number B of game number limiter = difference number C of number limiter (example: A (3) × B (100 games) = C (300)) Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and the advantageous section can be stably controlled, and the joyfulness can be appropriately suppressed.

  In the second specification, there is a specification (e.g., A (3) × B (100 games) <C (400)) with a relationship of slope value A × game number B of game number limiter <difference number C of number limiter. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, the case where the limiter is activated is considered as follows.

  If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are consumed, the number limiter is activated, and if 100 games are consumed before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games The limiter is activated. If the bonus is pulled more than expected or the pusher with a large number of net increases is pulled extremely much more than expected, the number limiter will be activated, and if the game progresses close to the expected value, the number of games The possibility that the limiter is activated increases. Since the inclination value is “3”, as a result, when the limiter is activated, the game number limiter reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is more than the difference number game. It will be inclined to the number.

  That is, since the inclination value is “3”, 400 medals are paid out in an average of 133.3 games, and it is highly possible that the game number limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is game number limiter> number limiter. If you do not want to worry too much about the number limiter triggered by the difference in number, you can use this type of specification. For example, in the case of a type in which the termination condition (not the limiter) is managed by a difference number of sheets, such as termination of ART with a net increase of 100 sheets per set, such a limiter specification can suppress the limiter activation frequency, and the player can The frequency with which the advantageous section is terminated by the limiter can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In the third specification, the specification of the relationship of inclination value A × game number B of game number limiter> difference number C of number limiter (eg, A (3 sheets) × B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, the case where the limiter is activated is considered as follows.

  When more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are consumed, the number limiter is activated, and when 100 games are consumed before more than 200 medals are paid out, The limiter is activated. Since the slope value is “3”, 200 medals are paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are consumed. Accordingly, the ease of activation is such that the game number limiter <the number limiter. If you don't want to worry too much about the game number limiter triggered by the number of games, this is a good specification. For example, for a specification such as a net increase of 0.1 to 1 per game that is relatively low but continues for a long number of games, such a specification can suppress the limiter activation frequency, and the player can Thus, the frequency at which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In any specification, the rate at which the advantageous section ends due to the termination conditions of the advantageous sections other than the limiter (such as the number of ART games and the set number stock being zero) rather than the ratio at which the limiter is reached. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is eliminated as a result of the limiter being activated.

  Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end effects using the display unit 100 when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. When each is made a dedicated production, it leads to a gaming motive to see each production once. Further, the sub control board 72 may vary the distribution of effects performed at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter. For example, when the number limiter is used, the setting suggestion accuracy may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference between the coefficients for each setting is large, or an effect in which a specific setting is confirmed is likely to appear). When specific information such as setting suggestions is obtained or a special effect is seen, it is possible to reduce discomfort that the advantageous section is terminated by the limiter. In addition, the distribution of effects performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-described limiter specifications. For example, the sub-control board 72 is more preferable for the player (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion) is easier to determine when the limiter that is difficult to activate is activated than the limiter that is easy to activate. Also good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub-control board 72 has an ending effect 1 when the number limiter is activated, and an ending effect 2 when the game number limiter is activated. There is no big difference in the ratio of occurrence, but when it becomes rich that at least one of them occurs, ending effect 3 (may be an effect having a branch to ending effect 1 or 2), etc. It may be possible to provide an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) before the limiter is activated so that the player is suddenly terminated at the end of the advantageous section and does not give the player a sense of incongruity. For example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period is used. The sum of the number (for example, “number of remaining games × slope value” in the case of ART for game number management) is set to a threshold value (for example, a difference number at which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number). For example, when the ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number so far and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. In addition, “the situation where the activation of the game number limiter has become rich” means that, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games, it is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period. The sum of the number of games to be played (for example, “remaining difference number / inclination value” in the case of ART of difference number management) is slightly larger than a threshold value (for example, the number of games for which the game number limiter is activated or the number of games) For example, when the ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that have passed so far and the number of remaining games has reached a threshold value.

(Notification or suggestion of the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen for the type of limiter activated or the type of effect (corresponding to the type of ending effect) generated in accordance with the type of limiter. Also good. In this case, since a lot of balls have been acquired in the first place, it is possible to arouse a game motivation that a high setting can be expected.

(External signal output according to limiter type)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hole side can be grasped by a hall computer or the like, which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from a different pin of the external terminal board. For example, if the number of game limiters is activated in the model where the game number limiter is activated and the number limiter is not activated very often in the case of the original play specification, if some number of limiters are activated The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

  In the same game, when the triggering condition for the number limiter and the triggering condition for the game number limiter are satisfied, the main control board 71 may output either one of the predetermined signals or two kinds of signals. May be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is preferable to leave a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the next signal output so that the signal can be reliably received. In the same game, when the number limiter triggering condition and the game number limiter triggering condition are satisfied, only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed. The main (main control board 71) In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal corresponding to the type of limiter performed.

(A single external signal is output regardless of the limiter type)
Also, when there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be varied as described above, but the same external signal regardless of the type of limiter May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and at the end by the limiter so that the fact that the advantageous section has ended can be detected by a hall computer or the like. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(External signal output example when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
When the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start outputting the external signal immediately after the game or the game ends. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots acquired exceeds the number of limiters, there was no deficiency in the limiter function, and the bonus acted near the arrival of the number limiter accidentally and the ball was acquired The hall side can be confirmed.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (at the end of the bonus))
When the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start outputting the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such specifications may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of a gaming state that substantially increases the number of balls.

(Direction when a player misses a small role in a game that may trigger the number limiter)
For example, even though the remaining number of cards until the number limiter is activated is a three-ply game, the winning order bell that wins 9 medals at the correct answer is won, and the correct pushing order is notified. When the player misses the order of pushing, it is assumed that the number limiter is activated in the game in view of the situation at the start of the game, and the effect at the time when the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. In such a case, although the number limiter is not activated as a result of pressing in the wrong order, the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that was started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is activated). The effect may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily ended or interrupted when it is determined that the number limiter is not activated.

(Direction when the limiter to be activated is changed by the player's operation)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may be different due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the remaining number of cards until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the remaining number of games until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out when the answer is correct in a three-game game This applies to cases where the correct bell is pushed and the correct push order is notified. In such a case, when the player performs a stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but when the player makes a mistake in the push order without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (Note that the number limiter may be activated in the next game, but here, the game number limiter is activated with priority when a plurality of limiter activation conditions are satisfied).
In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game that hits the pushing order bell, and the arbitrary timing of the transition when the non-activation of the number limiter is determined (first stop operation to all At the time of reel stop, at any timing after the display of the missing symbol combination or the small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), it is switched to the effect when the game number limiter is activated, or the effect that does not correspond to any limiter activation suggestion It is preferable to perform a process for returning to control so as to avoid a contradiction between the limiter to be activated and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, the delay of the end effect and the extension of the ending effect due to the internal limiter activation)
As for the effects and controls performed in connection with the limit processing described so far, when the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus generation timing is determined according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying until time or immediately after completion and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect until then, it is possible to reduce the player's uncomfortable feeling.

<Method for controlling the number limiter>
Next, a method for controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased most from the start of the advantageous section is used as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the number limiter. . In the figure, an example is shown in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, and the increase / decrease in medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then increases to reach the number limiter.

  In the figure, since the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased most from the start of the advantageous section is “−9”, the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference number becomes “+2391” in the Nth game. ing. It should be noted that the counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. As a result, the correct number of bells in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game is collected. As a result, although the number of difference from the starting point exceeds “+2400”, the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. It is only temporary and there is no problem.

  Although the figure shows the absolute difference from the start of the advantageous section at the end of payout of the game, this is an explanatory value, and the corresponding counter need not win the gaming machine. Of course, it is also possible to use the corresponding counter to win the player and indicate to the player the number obtained.

  The starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. Although it may be recognized that the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, it may be recognized as the lowest point, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. The main (main control board) is produced by directing the value of the number counter without sending it to the sub side with reference to the start flag that can be performed only by the ON / OFF determination. 71) can be reduced. In this case, the sub-side receives the information on the number of inserted sheets and the number of paid-out sheets transmitted from the main, and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub-side to produce the effect (number notification until the number limiter is activated) as the number counter status. Etc.).

  The lowest point (starting point) may be updated with either the same value as the latest lowest point or a smaller value. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number increases once after becoming “−3”, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference number becomes “−3” again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is “−9” as a starting point in the number limiter.

  In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the end of one game at the start of the advantageous section (when the absolute difference number is zero) Set as the first lowest point, and when the end of one game is the second lowest point, minus 9 is the third lowest point, and the number limiter is activated when 2400 is increased from the third lowest point It is good. Further, in the same figure, when the replay is won, the number counter is updated so that the number of inserted sheets is 0 and the number of paid-out sheets is 0. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number at the time of replaying, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, the payout number corresponding to the inserted number may be performed at the time of replay winning, and the number counter may be updated by setting the inserted number to 3 in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay is won and the start operation of the next game is performed can be made to match the actual difference number number behavior, and the value of the number counter is actually increased or decreased. As a result, it can be easily used for displaying the number of productions.

  Note that the sub-control board 72 may notify the player of the remaining number of sheets until the sheet limiter is activated by informing the value of the sheet counter on the display unit 100 (liquid crystal screen) or the like. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the sheet number limiter is activated. If the remaining number of sheets is 2000 or more until the sheet number limiter is activated, the first stage is produced, and if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets are produced, the second stage is produced. If the number is less than the number, it may be suggested that the stage such as the background is made different according to the number range until the number limiter is activated like the third stage.

  Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal and display it on a data display for viewing game data installed on the upper part of the hall computer or pachislot. In addition, it is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the start point flag and the number counter without being erased even when the power is interrupted. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may delete the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when changing the setting.

<Adjusting the number limiter>
Next, with reference to FIG. 173 (C), a method of adjusting the number limiter will be described. In the specification for forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the number limiter is activated can be considered. For example, when the pushing order is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, “9” medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification in which the payout of medals is “0”, three medals are required in one game. Therefore, when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order when the push order is won, If the stop operation is performed in the incorrect answer pressing order when the pressing order combination is won, the number counter is set to “−3 sheets”. Therefore, for example, when the winning combination is won three times, if the incorrect answer is made twice and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

  By adjusting the number limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for a bonus to be held in the ART just before the number limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment batting method starts from the Mth game, and the adjustment batting method is performed up to the Xth game winning the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10 game, +2512 medals exceeding +2400 where the number limiter is activated can be obtained.

  In the pachi-slot 1, it is possible to obtain an effect that suggests or notifies that it is advantageous to deliberately defeat the notification of the pressing order, so that the player can obtain the maximum benefit (a stop different from the hitting order navigation). Operation). Such effects may be performed by the sub control board 72 via the display unit 100 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

  If there are multiple types of bonus combinations such as a net bonus of about 15 bonuses with a relatively high probability of winning (15 bonus combinations being inoperable or difficult to miss) and a net increase of 120 bonuses, the number limiter An effect that recommends the above-described adjustment striking method may be performed on a line having a number of remaining differences until reaching the number more than the net increase in the mini bonus. Further, for the small combinations other than the push order combination, the number of payouts may not be increased and the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3). In this way, the game interest can be enhanced by making it possible to improve the game play rate by ingenuating how to hit.

  If the emphasis is on demerits such as the complexity of gameplay being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not incremented by the actual net increase, but only by the net increase when playing as instructed. It is good to do. For example, in a 3-game game, if the winning order bell where 9 medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer is won, the main control board 71 provides the player's operation mode and winnings on the condition that the correct answer pressing order is notified. Regardless of the result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, it is good also as a specification which seals such an adjustment method.

<Amusement with specifications that seal the adjustment method>
Next, a description will be given of the playability that can be realized in the specification that seals such an adjustment method.

(Bonus not installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is constituted only by the small combination and the replay without mounting the bonus combination, it is not necessary to ask the player for the above complex hitting method, and the gameability becomes easy to understand.
(Bonus with no increase or decrease)
In addition, as another example of a specification that suppresses the above-described batting method, the bonus may be a no-increase / decrease bonus that only wins a small role that is paid out in the same number as the number inserted during operation, and the bonus is inserted during operation The bonus may be a reduced bonus in which only a small role in which a smaller number of coins are paid out is won. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation, instead of the medal increase, and the bonus processing may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation. As long as a normal game is performed, the bonus control is hindered by the reel control, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The number of net increase during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Since there is no payout at the time of bonus winning on the premise of a game with three cards, the difference number in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus is completed in 3 games per game, the maximum number of winnings during the bonus operation is 6 or less. By doing this, the difference between the bonus operation time and the bonus end time does not become a positive value, so the value of the number counter is not increased by the bonus operation, and the complicated hitting as described above. The player does not have to do the law.

<Amusement with specifications that allow adjustment batting>
Next, a description will be given of the playability that can be realized with specifications that allow such an adjustment method.

(Removing a small role or reducing the number of bonuses during bonus operation)
In addition to the specifications that allow the above-mentioned batting method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the bonus earned number will be reduced and the bonus will be terminated. In some cases, it is most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the advantageous section. Therefore, it is assumed that during the bonus operation, a small combination can be missed at the timing and order of pressing or a combination with a small number of payouts can be won. In this case, it is desirable that the winning combination with a small number of payouts be less than the number of inserts during the bonus operation. Even if it provides a role that can be finely adjusted, such as being received, a certain effect can be obtained.

(The only normal roles other than the push order are replays or only those with less than the number of throws.)
For example, it is assumed that the bonus is not activated and 3 sheets are multiplied. The pushing order bell is nine, but other combinations such as so-called watermelons, cherries and bells without the concept of pushing order are configured as a re-playing combination or a combination of three or less payouts. By doing this, even when another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter is operated by the net increase of the remaining several sheets, the difficulty level of the strategy hitting method is lowered and the game is easy to play without the number limiter being operated.

(If the stop operation is different from the push order navigation, the player can intervene in the frequency of winning a specific number (1 to 2)
There is a specification that when a stop operation different from that of the push order navigation is performed, one piece is paid out or dropped. In this case, the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, so that it is difficult to calculate and the game may be confused. Compared to such a specification, when navigating is ignored, if the number of sheets is always fixed, such as one or two sheets are always aligned, the negative value when navigating in the state of the last number of navigators is fixed to minus 2, for example. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player misses the calculation and hits the place where the navigation should be ignored once as the navigation is performed and the batting order bell is taken is reduced.

  It should be noted that a certain degree of effect can be exhibited even if it is generally stabilized, such as when one sheet is paid out or is not always necessary, but is frequently dispensed. Further, the number of payouts may be stabilized by a pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when a navigating order navigation of “1, 2, 3” (left, middle, right is correct answer order) occurs, the single winning combination rate is given as “medium 1st”> “right 1st”, with 3 cards If the player wants to reduce the number, the player can select the first stop on the right and the player can select the middle first stop if the player wants to reduce two. In addition, if the second stop is missed after the correct answer for the first stop in the game, if it is stopped in the order of “1, 3, 2”, one winning combination will be won with a higher probability than the other navigation ignore order or without fail. It is preferable that the player can select how to reduce by the batting method.

(Navigation changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 performs the push order display in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72 Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).
(Change depending on the situation or direction to be ignored)
The main control board 71 or the sub-control board 72 may be made different in a situation in which navigation is performed according to a mode such as BGM, video, or lamp, and in a situation against navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be opposed to navigation when navigation occurs in the next game at a time before the occurrence of navigation.
(Lock and reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) or a stop button temporary operation reception invalidation period immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation is started. Thereby, a player can be alerted and the case where the advantageous section is ended accidentally can be prevented. In addition, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is also alerted by voice or video.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)>
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, based on the difference number (= paid-out number-inserted number), that is, a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. The limit process is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is referred to as a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform a limit process for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number (for example, 2400) of medals are paid out during the advantageous section.

  In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number, but in the paid-out number limiter, the payout number is directly referred to without subtracting the inserted number from the paid-out number, Limit processing is performed when the number of payouts reaches a specified value. In such a payout number limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a payout number counter at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, and updates the payout number counter each time a payout occurs due to a small role winning. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches a specified value for performing the limit process, the main control board 71 performs the limit process of ending the advantageous section and initializing various processes and values related to the advantageous section.

  Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when a winning combination relating to replay wins is arbitrary, and may be counted as three payouts, or counted as 0 payouts. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when a winning combination related to replay is won. In this way, for example, in a 3 BET game, a payout number counter is obtained when a winning combination of 3 (a winning combination of 3 medals when winning) and when a winning combination related to replay is won. The change in the value of can be different. In other words, the player can feel a sense of profit because the count of the payout number counter does not advance when the role related to replay wins, rather than when the winning combination of 3 plays. It is possible to make a difference between the value of the three-piece role as the value and the value related to the replay.

<Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation frequency limiter)>
In addition, as a type of limiter used for the limit process of the advantageous section, a navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers that a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) is notified (navigation) to the player during the advantageous section (ie, the number of times of navigation is a specified value). ), The limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, in the navigation performed for the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medal during the advantageous section, the medal is maintained during the advantageous section or the decrease of the medal is the normal section. There is a navigation to suppress compared to the inside. For example, in the case of the former navigation, when the correct answer is stopped in a 3BET game (for example, when the correct answer is pressed), the correct answer is given when the winning combination in which more than 3 medals (for example, 9) are paid out. The latter navigation is, for example, navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, or three in the case of a correct stop operation in a 3BET game, or Correct answer stop operation when winning a combination that pays out more medals than the case of incorrect answer stop operation (for example, when pressing order is incorrect) in the case of correct stop action This means that the mode is notified. Note that the role that is the target of the former navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART). In the pachi-slot, it is possible to arbitrarily design which of the plurality of combinations is to be increased from the viewpoint of game specifications.

  When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 sets the number of navigations performed when the winning combination is won as a target of counting the number of navigations that is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning the day may be excluded from the target of counting the number of times of navigation, and the number of navigations performed when winning the non-increasing role is also included in the target of counting the number of times of navigation. Also good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were made after the start of the advantageous section (ART). When there is not, it can prevent that an advantageous area is complete | finished by the event which is not related to the meaning of the limiter of suppressing excessive play, and does not give dissatisfaction to a player.

In such a navigation frequency limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation frequency counter (navigation frequency counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, and a navigation to be counted is generated. Every time it is done, the value of the navigation counter is updated. Then, when the value of the navigation counter reaches the prescribed value for performing the limit process, the main control board 71 performs the limit process of ending the advantageous section and initializing various processes and values related to the advantageous section. Note that the updating method of the counter in the various limiters described so far may be an addition method or a subtraction method.

<Another example of the limiter period>
In the above description, an example in which limiters such as a game number limiter, a number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter are used only in an advantageous section is described. However, such a limiter is not in an advantageous section. It can be employed for any period. For example, if you continue to hit the advantageous section accidentally, you can only pay out medals for the maximum number of times in one advantageous section at a time, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, Then, many medals may be paid out, and there is a risk that the gambling will be excessively beaten. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a predetermined value that indicates a value (for example, a payout rate or a difference number) indicating an increase in a period corresponding to the most recent predetermined number of games (for example, the most recent 6000 games). A special limiter that terminates the advantageous section when exceeding (for example, 170% or +10,000 as viewed from the player) may be provided. According to such a special limiter, when the special limiter activation condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number limiter are not activated at all. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

  In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, refer to the right regarding the advantageous section acquired at the present time (the number of AT games, the number of AT stocks, the number of obtainable difference etc.) and the payout rate. When there is a possibility that the limiter is activated, the main control board 71 reduces the possibility of activation of the special limiter, for example, by reducing the rate of occurrence of the addition before reaching the specified value, or when the special limiter is activated. It is good also as controlling so that the right of the increase area (ART) to delete may reduce.

  Further, the predetermined period used for the determination of the special limiter activation based on the value indicating the increase state of the medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number) may be based on a number other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10 Time), and a predetermined period for activating the special limiter, such as a predetermined inserted number (for example, 18000 inserted number), which can be used to determine that the player has played the game for a predetermined period. It is good.

A configuration of a pachislot using such a special limiter is shown below.
A gaming machine that can be played using the gaming value,
A right (pachislot) that makes the gaming state an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it may be an advantageous section or an increasing section (AT, ART) in a pachislot, or a probable change state or a short-time state in a pachinko). The right granting means (for example, the main control board 71) that can be granted the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc., or the right to shift to a probable change state or a short time state in pachinko) When,
Gaming state control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state until the termination condition is satisfied based on the right;
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is an AT stock number in the pachislot, etc. ) Or a continuation of the short-time state))),
Increase status storage means for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value up to the elapse of a predetermined period from a predetermined unit game (for example, the difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the triggering condition of the special limiter, Counter for monitoring the appearance rate)
A gaming machine comprising special ending means (special limiter) for ending the advantageous state even when the right is given when the value of the increase status storage means becomes a predetermined specified value.

  Moreover, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the most recent predetermined period, and may be a daily limiter, for example, or may be used in combination. In addition, the method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is out of power for a predetermined time or more (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power outage during business hours, such as 2 hours, 4 hours, etc., and can be inferred as a power outage during closing) Or a value indicating an increase in the number of medals from the starting point (that is, resetting the information for the previous day) when the power is turned on after a power interruption for a predetermined time or longer (starting point) The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the yield rate and the number of differences). In addition, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day (that is, resets the information for the previous day), when a predetermined time (such as one hour) or more has passed since the power is turned on, as the start of the day (start). ), A special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating an increase state of medals (for example, a payout rate or a difference number). In any case, the clocking method can be realized by mounting clocking means such as RTC on the main control board 71.

<Penalty at the time of navigation mistake>
Further, in the pachislot 1, the main control board 71 may give a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification made to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the state of waiting for the transition to the high RT as in the ART preparation, in the case of the specification for adding the lottery to the ART, the transition to the high RT is avoided, and the ART preparation is extended to avoid the transition to the high RT. A lot of lottery can be received. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such a lottery lottery when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the mistake is a coincidence or an intentional mistake, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. It is good.

[Other variations]
The management method of the duration of ART is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the number of differences. It is also possible to manage the duration based on the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during the ART (number of times of navigation), and to continue by determining whether to continue at any timing during ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the addition target is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the ART duration, such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of times of navigation, the number of differences, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described pachislot machine 1, the operation of the notification (ART) function is performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board 72). The alarm (ART) function may be activated by control on the) side.

  In the above description, a pachislot machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. Features other than the features peculiar to the pachislot machine 1 such as features relating to reel control and features relating to setting changes and confirmation according to the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine called “pachinko”, and similar effects can be obtained. For example, checksum generation and determination processing, various processing using an instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 93 (address designation processing using a Q register, soft timer update processing, 7 segment LED drive processing, communication data generation and storage processing, etc. ), Features such as various processes using the non-standard ROM area and the non-standard RAM area are also applicable to “pachinko”.

  Further, the set value may be only one stage. At this time, the setting change process may be left or eliminated. In the case of leaving the setting change process, it is only possible to re-set to the same setting, so that the process is substantially a process for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is only one level, a mode related to the lottery (first hit and / or extra) etc. of the advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times that a predetermined combination winning with a predetermined probability is counted However, when the number of times reaches a specified value, the mode can be changed by switching the mode.

  In this case, a value obtained by multiplying the denominator with a predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of the ball. If it is defined that the value is switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one stage, it can be made inferior to a plurality of gaming machines provided. For example, when the business hours of the day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 sec. Therefore, if the minimum time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9659 times. Since it is not realistic that no breaks (meals or toilets) are sandwiched, the number of games per day is considered to be approximately 8000 times. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball can be switched in approximately one day.

  In addition, if the number of times a given combination wins reaches the specified value, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is unfavorable are switched alternately, the profit will be stabilized in the two-day cycle, so that the game It can contribute to the sales of the store. In addition, although the case where a set value was made into 1 step | paragraph was demonstrated, it is not restricted to 1 step | paragraph and can be diverted. More specifically, if it is adopted without changing the number of set values, it is possible to make the waves of the balls more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Further, if the number of set values is reduced, it is possible to compensate for the monotonous state where the set values are reduced.

  If the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the six-stage setting value can be changed to one-stage setting value, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired payout ratio at each stage is also 1/6. Furthermore, only gaming machines that are suitable for testing are permitted to be used for business, and the time required for testing can be shortened.

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to this embodiment]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting a hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot, or the operation of the MAX bet button or the 1 bet button for a credited medal) When the game is started by the operation to be inserted and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device is driven and the medal is paid out from the medal payout exit or credited. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, the present invention is applied to all modes in which a game medium required for a game is inserted by a player, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is granted (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the game result. be able to. That is, not only a form in which a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action and the game medium is paid out, but also the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) itself is a game medium held by the player. The game may be managed electromagnetically to enable a game without medals. In addition, the game media management apparatus that manages the game media that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) may electromagnetically manage the game media held by the player. .

  In this case, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is bidirectionally communicated with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. The game medium lending operation (that is, the operation for providing the necessary game medium when the player performs the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role relating to the payout of the game medium ( A game medium payout operation (that is, an operation for acquiring a game medium necessary for paying out a game medium to the player) or a game medium to be used for a game when the combination is established) It may be possible to perform an electromagnetic recording operation. The game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachislot 1 based on the management result of the number of game media, for example. A number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the held game media number display device may be managed. In other words, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external device. It is desirable that the player has a performance that cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless it is via the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., a game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is ended, the game media management device transmits the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any of the return operation means. The medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game media handling device, but the game machine or the game media handling device transmits only the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged or stored in a portable terminal or the like. In addition, the game medium handling device may be able to insert a member recording medium in the game hall and store it in the member recording medium so that it can be replayed at a later date.

  In addition, in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the game medium or the valuable data communication with respect to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Also good. In this case, information that can only be known by the player, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be stored by an imaging means provided in the gaming machine or the game medium handling device.

  As described above, this game medium management device may be one that allows games only without medals, or a game medium is inserted (hanged) by a physical player's action, and the game medium May be a form that allows the game to be paid out, a form that allows a game without medals, or a form that allows a game to be played in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device can adopt a method of directly controlling the above-described selector and hopper device, and these are controlled by the main control board 71 and the control result is transmitted. Based on this, it is also possible to adopt a method that enables control that allows the player to record and display the total number of game media that can be used for gaming by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in the above description, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachislot 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-described game balls, the game medium management device is provided in the same manner, and the player It is also possible to manage the game media.

  Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors, hopper devices, and the like inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game. In addition to reducing manufacturing costs, it is also possible to prevent players from coming into direct contact with the game media, improving the gaming environment, reducing noise, and reducing the number of devices used for gaming machines. It will also reduce power. Also, it is possible to prevent illegal acts through game media and game media slot and payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

[Appendix 1]
The gaming machine of Appendix 1 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating the design related to so-called game play, a game machine is known in which the internal winning combination is repeatedly won so that the payout rate is less than 1 in some bonus states. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-202331). In addition, as a precursor effect whether or not the AT (assist time) that is advantageous for the player is won, there is also a game machine that has an elaborate appearance by a complicated effect mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player It is known (for example, see JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 is based on the premise that the player mainly plays in a bonus carryover state, and the pleasure of winning a game by winning a bonus has been lost. In addition, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 2 has a difficulty in grasping what kind of state is advantageous for the unskilled person because of its complicated production mode and specifications.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and it is easy to grasp a state advantageous to a player, and a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of freedom of ball design by a method different from the conventional one. The purpose is to provide.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, advantageous section) that can be notified by the operation mode notification means;
An advantageous state notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) that can be notified by the operation mode notifying means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an advantageous section transition lottery is won), A second advantageous state (for example, a state of “ART”) that is more likely to be notified by the operation mode notifying means than the one advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means; With a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB),
The state control means is a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the operation mode notification unit is notified, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the indications is derived,
In the first advantageous state, in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification suppression state in which notification by the operation mode notification unit is not performed (for example, a state where no bell navigation is generated), and the specific combination is A notification permissible state (for example, a state where a bell navigation can be generated) in which notification by the operation mode notification unit is allowed in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination,
From the start of the first advantageous state to the establishment of a specific condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined number of games (100G)), the notification suppression state is set.

  According to such a structure, the 1st advantageous state and the 2nd advantageous state from which the possibility of alerting | reporting differs are provided, and a 1st advantageous state is terminated as a alerting | reporting suppression state until specific conditions are fundamentally satisfied. Therefore, by appropriately setting such specific conditions, it is possible to suppress the notification of the operation mode and to balance the advantage between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state. While making it easier to grasp, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the design of the balls.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number of times is greater than the average number of unit games until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is more likely that a predetermined bonus combination will be determined and a determination result for ending the advantageous state before the specific condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus is obtained. Can be achieved appropriately.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while making it easy to grasp | ascertain an advantageous state for a player, the gaming machine which can raise the freedom degree of a ball design by the method different from the former can be provided.

[Appendix 2]
The gaming machines of Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication of whether or not the AT (assist time) that is in an advantageous state for the player is won, the preference is mainly given by a complicated presentation mode that assumes a highly skilled player. A sophisticated game machine is known (for example, see JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a difficulty in grasping what kind of state is advantageous for the unskilled person because the production mode and specifications are complicated. In addition, since the sign production ends without obtaining any profit, there is a concern that the interest of the game may decrease.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to a player and can enhance the interest of the game.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, advantageous section) that can be notified by the operation mode notification means;
An advantageous state notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) that can be notified by the operation mode notifying means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an advantageous section transition lottery is won), At least a second advantageous state (for example, an “ART” state) that can be shifted from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means than the first advantageous state;
Comprising mode control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of controlling the mode (for example, normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means; With a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB),
The state control means is a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the operation mode notification unit is notified, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the indications is derived,
As the mode in the first advantageous state, the first mode (for example, “low accuracy” in normal mode, “preparation for heaven”) and the second mode (for example, “heaven in normal mode”, “super heaven”, “special”) , “The next sign”),
The first mode and the second mode are different in the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of “ART”).

  According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different notification possibilities are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the first mode and the first advantageous state differing in the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state are provided. 2 modes are provided, so that the player can stay in any mode and play the game while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier to grasp the advantageous state for the player, The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, while making it easy to grasp | ascertain a favorable state for a player, the gaming machine which can raise the interest of a game can be provided.

[Appendix 3]
The gaming machines of Appendix 3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication of whether or not the AT (assist time) that is in an advantageous state for the player is won, the preference is mainly given by a complicated presentation mode that assumes a highly skilled player. A sophisticated game machine is known (for example, see JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a difficulty in grasping what kind of state is advantageous for the unskilled person because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the game is ended without noticing the present sign state in which the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player, and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
A variable control hand (for example, main control board 71) that displays the plurality of variable display means in a variable manner based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be performed and a general state (for example, normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be performed. Substrate 71),
An advantageous state notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) that can be notified by the operation mode notifying means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an advantageous section transition lottery is won), At least a second advantageous state (for example, an “ART” state) that can be shifted from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means than the first advantageous state;
Comprising mode control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of controlling the mode (for example, normal mode) in the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means; With a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB),
The state control means is a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the operation mode notification unit is notified, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the indications is derived,
As the mode in the first advantageous state, the first mode (for example, “low accuracy” in normal mode, “preparation for heaven”) and the second mode (for example, “heaven in normal mode”, “super heaven”, “special”) , “The next sign”),
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode,
The general state has a higher possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state than the first mode (for example, a winning probability of “ART”).

  According to such a configuration, a general state where notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state with different notification possibilities are provided, and the first advantageous state shifts to the second advantageous state. There are provided a first mode and a second mode that have different possibilities. And since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified. Even in a general state where it is not possible, a game can be performed while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier to grasp the advantageous state for the player and reducing the risk of the player overlooking so-called AT Various game states related to lottery can be made.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The gaming machine of appendix 4 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication of whether or not the AT (assist time) that is in an advantageous state for the player is won, the preference is mainly given by a complicated presentation mode that assumes a highly skilled player. A sophisticated game machine is known (for example, see JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a difficulty in grasping what kind of state is advantageous for the unskilled person because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the game is ended without noticing the present sign state in which the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player, and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be performed and a general state (for example, normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be performed. Substrate 71),
An advantageous state notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1),
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a “normally advantageous” state) that can be notified by the operation mode notifying means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an advantageous section transition lottery is won), At least a second advantageous state (for example, an “ART” state) that can be shifted from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notifying means than the first advantageous state;
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means; With a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB),
The state control means is a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the operation mode notification unit is notified, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the indications is derived,
When the end condition for the second advantageous state (for example, the number of games “ART” is 0) is satisfied, a determination is made as to whether to shift to the first advantageous state or the general state (for example, advantageous at the time of completion) A section end lottery) can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and the advantageous state is determined as an internal winning combination. Notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is derived, or after satisfying either one, there is a possibility of transition to a general state depending on the result of the end determination. At the end of the second advantageous state where the possibility is higher, it is possible to continue the advantageous state by shifting to the first advantageous state without shifting to the general state, so grasp the advantageous state for the player It is possible to make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various while making it easy to make the game easier and less likely to be missed by the player.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 5]
The gaming machine of appendix 5 is as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In this type of gaming machine, as an indication of whether or not the AT (assist time) that is in an advantageous state for the player is won, the preference is mainly given by a complicated presentation mode that assumes a highly skilled player. A sophisticated game machine is known (for example, see JP-A-2015-16085).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1 has a difficulty in grasping what kind of state is advantageous for the unskilled person because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the game is ended without noticing the present sign state in which the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player, and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that the player can stop corresponding to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71);
RT control means (for example, main control board 71) that can be controlled by any one of a plurality of RTs having different winning probabilities of at least one kind of re-playing role (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination;
Operation mode notification means (for example, the sub control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means that are advantageous to the player;
State control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, advantageous section) that can be notified by the operation mode notification means;
An advantageous state notification means (for example, a status indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state;
A gaming machine (for example, a pachislot machine 1),
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display can be derived on the plurality of variable display means; With a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB),
The state control means is a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the operation mode notification unit is notified, or a result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display units It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after at least one of the indications is derived,
The RT control means can be controlled to a specific RT (for example, RT0) at the time of setting change,
The advantageous state determined to be controlled by the specific RT may be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled by an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by being expensive.

  According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which a notification can be executed is provided, and the advantageous state indicates that a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is displayed. It may be terminated or may be terminated depending on the result of the termination determination after satisfying one of the conditions. On the other hand, if the setting is changed, the gaming state is controlled by a specific RT, which is advantageous. It is likely that the degree of advantage will be higher than that, so that it is easy to grasp the state advantageous to the player, and the game state related to the so-called AT lottery can be made diverse while reducing the possibility that the player will miss it. it can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to grasp a state advantageous to the player and reduces the possibility that the player misses, while making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 6]
The gaming machine of appendix 6 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Also, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39536, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) advantageous to a player, and based on the lottery result, There is known a gaming machine that can make a transition to a predecessor to make a transition to (1)) or a pre-gase state (a precursor in the case of not going to an advantageous state).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, while it is possible to perform an effect of encouraging the transition to the advantageous state during the precursor (the present precursor state or the pre-gase state), it is possible to improve the fun of the game, In the case of shifting, since it does not shift to an advantageous state, the medals are consumed as a result, and there is no benefit, so there is a possibility that the willingness to play may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in gaming motivation.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped, and a fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) that variably displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of the start condition. ), An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of winning combinations Based on the stop operation via the stop operation means, the stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving the result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means, and the player. Operation mode notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of advantageous stop operation means, and notification by the operation mode notification means. A game machine comprising state control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling an executable notification state (for example, an advantageous section), wherein the operation state notification is performed when a predetermined condition is established as the notification state. A first notification state that can be notified by the means (for example, “normally advantageous”), and a second state that can be shifted from the first notification state and that the notification by the operation mode notification means is higher than the first notification state. The internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means is at least a notification state (for example, “ART”). When a stop operation is performed in the operation mode, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived, and when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, the plurality of variable display units A special combination (for example, push order bell) from which a result display different from the advantageous result display is derived, and a predetermined bonus combination (for example, MB), and the state control means is in a non-notification state. When the specific condition is satisfied, the non-notification state can be shifted to the first notification state, and the operation mode notification means is notified in the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Or the notification state is terminated after satisfying at least one of the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination being derived in the plurality of variable display means. An end determination (for example, advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not is possible, and counting means (for example, a main control board) for counting the number of unit games performed during the first notification state 71) and privilege giving means (for example, main control board 71) for giving a privilege (for example, promotion of SCZ mode) according to the number of times counted by the counting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, a privilege is given according to the number of unit games counted during the first notification state. Here, since the first notification state is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift to the second notification state where there is a high probability that an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a second advantage that is more advantageous. A privilege can be granted when the user stays in the first notification state for a predetermined period without being able to shift to the notification state. As a result, in the non-notification state, even if the transition to the first notification state is made without being able to shift to the second notification state, not only the medals are consumed but also the provision of benefits can be expected. Reduction of game willingness can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention further includes a remaining period management unit (for example, a main control board 71) that manages a remaining continuation period in which the second notification state can be continued. When the sum of the number of unit games performed during the notification state and the number of unit games performed during the second notification state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1500 times), the remaining period management means manages The notification state may be terminated (for example, limit processing is performed) regardless of the remaining duration.

  According to such a gaming machine, although a privilege can be expected when staying in the first notification state for a predetermined period, the number of unit games performed during the first notification state and the second notification state When the sum reaches a predetermined number of times, the notification state is forcibly terminated. As a result, even if a large privilege is given as a result of staying in the first notification state for a long time, the notification state (the first notification state or the second notification state) does not continue more than necessary, and gambling is possible. It is possible to prevent it from being raised.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention corresponds to a plurality of variable display sections (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of variable display sections. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player, and a change control means (for example, main control) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display units based on the establishment of the start condition Board 71), internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, A stop control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display sections based on a stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, and a player for Operation mode notification means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub control board 72, display unit 100) capable of reporting operation modes for the plurality of stop operation means, and a normal state (for example, normal section) And a state control means for controlling a plurality of gaming states including at least an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state, wherein the operation state is defined as the advantageous state. A first advantageous state (for example, normal advantage or performance section) in which notification by the aspect notification means is suppressed and a second advantageous state (for example, ART or an increase section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed. Privilege providing means (e.g., main control board 71) capable of providing a privilege when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time, and at least during the advantageous state And ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the advantageous state when the number of broken unit games reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the game number limiter is activated). To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, since the privilege is granted when the first advantageous state continues for a predetermined period, similarly to the above-described gaming machine, the first advantageous state cannot be shifted to the second advantageous state. Even in the case of shifting to the 1 advantageous state, not only the medals are consumed but also a privilege can be expected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in game motivation. On the other hand, the advantageous state (the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state) ends when the number of unit games performed during the advantageous state reaches a predetermined number of times, and thus is advantageous in the first advantageous state. Even if a large privilege is granted as a result of staying for a period of time, the advantageous state (the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state) will not continue more than necessary, preventing the gambling feelings from being raised. it can.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in gaming motivation.

[Appendix 7]
The gaming machine of appendix 7 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  As such a gaming machine, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-086863 discloses a data counter or the like that identifies a gaming state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed during the advantageous state. A gaming machine that performs lively effects suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with other external devices is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game because the presentation is performed not only by the gaming machine but also in conjunction with other devices.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, there are problems that some players feel that the gambling is too high because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine in which a profit imparted to a player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of euphoria is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  When the gaming machine according to the present invention reaches a limit threshold (for example, 1500 times) when a numerical value counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) that can notify a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, A gaming machine that performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display portions, and the establishment of the start condition Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display sections, and internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control group) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition 71) and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation through the plurality of stop operation means, the result display is performed by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving and a notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub-control board 72, the display that can notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player) Unit 100) and state control means (for example, main control board 71) that controls the notification state that can be notified by the notification means, and the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determination means When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode with respect to the plurality of stop operation means, a specific result is displayed on the plurality of variable display units (for example, a single channel, a double channel, for example) When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display (for example, replay) that is different from the specific result display is displayed on the plurality of variable display units. ) Is derived (for example, “F_Single Chile Lip”, “F_2 Series Chile Lip”, “F_3 Series Chile Lip”), and the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. Accordingly, the privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege related to the notification state and the privilege granting means grant a privilege when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. A probability changing means (for example, main control board 71) for changing a benefit probability that is a probability to be obtained, wherein the probability changing means determines the benefit probability when the numerical value is less than a specific value. A probability of 1, when the numerical value is equal to or greater than the specific value, the privilege probability is set as a second probability lower than the first probability, and the informing means is configured when the numerical value is less than the specific value. When a specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the specific operation mode is notified to the player, and the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the numerical value is equal to or greater than the specific value. And an operation mode different from the specific operation mode is notified to the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, normally, it is possible to give a privilege related to the notification state at the time of winning the specific role, but after the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches a specific value, Even if a combination is determined, the probability of granting a privilege decreases. Thereby, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of euphoria can be achieved. In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when this numerical value reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated, so that the balance of gambling can also be achieved from this point. In the case of granting a privilege at the time of winning the specified role, a specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while in the case of not granting the privilege at the time of winning the specified role, the notification means is notified. A predetermined result display is derived accordingly. In the case of giving a privilege to the player according to the present invention, although it may be dissatisfied if it can be understood that the privilege is not granted even if the specific role is won, for the player Since the result display differs depending on whether or not it is given, it is not recognized from the result display that the specific combination is being won. Thereby, even if it is a case where a privilege is not provided at the time of winning a specific combination, the player is not dissatisfied, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, as the specific combination, when a stop operation is performed in the first operation mode, a first result display is derived, and the stop is performed in an operation mode different from the first operation mode. A first specific combination in which a second result display different from the first result display can be derived when an operation is performed, and a third result display is derived when a stop operation is performed in the second operation mode. And a second specific combination from which a fourth result display different from the third result display is derived when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the second operation mode, The privilege granting means can grant the privilege of the first size in response to the first specific combination being determined as the internal winning combination, and the second specific combination is the internal winning combination. A second greater than the first magnitude in response to being determined as The bonus can be granted, and the probability changing means is a first privilege probability that is a probability that the privilege granting means can grant a privilege when the first specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. And, when the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to change a second privilege probability that is a probability that the privilege grant means can grant a privilege, and the numerical value is the first specific When the value is less than a value, the first privilege probability is a predetermined probability, and when the numerical value is greater than or equal to the first specific value, the first privilege probability is a probability lower than the predetermined probability, and the numerical value is The second privilege probability is defined as a specific probability when it is less than a second specific value that is smaller than the first specific value, and the second privilege probability is defined as the specific probability when the numerical value is equal to or greater than the second specific value. And the notification means If the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when the numerical value is less than the first specific value, the first operation mode is notified to the player, and the numerical value is the first If the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when it is greater than or equal to a specific value, an operation mode different from the first operation mode is notified to the player, and the numerical value is the second specific mode. When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination when it is less than the value, the second operation mode is notified to the player, and the numerical value is equal to or greater than the second specific value. When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, an operation mode different from the second operation mode may be notified to the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the value of the specific value, which is a threshold value for changing the probability of granting a privilege, is changed according to the size of the privilege associated with each type of specific role, and the associated privilege When the second specific combination with a large value is won, the threshold value is made smaller than when the first specific combination is won. As a result, it is possible to adjust the period during which the privilege is easily given for each associated privilege size, and to achieve an appropriate balance of euphoria.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a profit imparted to a player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of euphoria is achieved.

[Appendix 8]
The gaming machine of appendix 8 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  As such a gaming machine, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-086863 discloses a data counter or the like that identifies a gaming state and transmits an external signal when a special role advantageous to the player is displayed during the advantageous state. A gaming machine that performs lively effects suggesting that a large number of medals can be obtained in conjunction with other external devices is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game because the presentation is performed not only by the gaming machine but also in conjunction with other devices.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, there are problems that some players feel that the gambling is too high because there are too many medals that can be obtained in a series of advantageous states.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and provides a gaming machine in which a profit imparted to a player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of euphoria is achieved. The purpose is to do.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  When the gaming machine according to the present invention reaches a limit threshold (for example, 1500 times) when a numerical value counted in relation to a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) that can notify a mode of a stop operation that is advantageous for the player, A gaming machine that performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and a plurality of variable display units (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4), a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display portions, and the establishment of the start condition Fluctuation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display sections, and internal winning combination determination means (for example, main control group) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition 71) and based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation through the plurality of stop operation means, the result display is performed by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display units. Stop control means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of deriving and a notification means (for example, the main control board 71, the notification lamp 147a, the sub-control board 72, the display that can notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player) Unit 100) and state control means (for example, main control board 71) that controls the notification state that can be notified by the notification means, and the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determination means When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode with respect to the plurality of stop operation means, a specific result is displayed on the plurality of variable display units (for example, a single channel, a double channel, for example) When a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode, a predetermined result display (for example, replay) that is different from the specific result display is displayed on the plurality of variable display units. ) Is derived (for example, “F_Single Chile Lip”, “F_2 Series Chile Lip”, “F_3 Series Chile Lip”), and a predetermined condition (for example, the stock of the specialization zone added up is a predetermined number or more during the notification state) ) Is satisfied, the specific control is set as the internal winning combination by the state control means (for example, the main control board 71) for setting a special state (for example, a special section) and the internal winning combination determination means. Accordingly, when the privilege granting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of granting a privilege related to the notification state and the specific winning combination are determined as the internal winning combination, Probability changing means (for example, the main control board 71) that changes a privilege probability that is a probability that a privilege can be granted is further provided, and the probability changing means sets the benefit probability to the first when the special state is not established. The probability is a second probability lower than the first probability in the special state, and the notifying means determines that the specific combination is the internal winning combination, and the privilege granting means is the privilege The specific operation mode is notified to the player, and when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the privilege granting unit does not grant the privilege, Is characterized by notifying the player of different operation modes.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a specific role is won during the notification state, the probability of granting a privilege differs depending on whether or not it is in a special state, and during the special state, the probability of granting a privilege is different. Go down. Thereby, the profit given to the player during the notification state does not become excessive, and an appropriate balance of euphoria can be achieved. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in relation to the notification state reaches the limit threshold value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. it can. In the case of granting a privilege at the time of winning the specified role, a specific result display is derived along with the notification of the notification means, while in the case of not granting the privilege at the time of winning the specified role, the notification means is notified. A predetermined result display is derived accordingly. In the case of giving a privilege to the player according to the present invention, although it may be dissatisfied if it can be understood that the privilege is not granted even if the specific role is won, for the player Since the result display differs depending on whether or not it is given, it is not recognized from the result display that the specific combination is being won. Thereby, even if it is a case where a privilege is not provided at the time of winning a specific combination, the player is not dissatisfied, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when a predetermined number or more of additional rights for extending the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued are held.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined number or more of additional rights are held, the specific combination is reduced, and the probability of granting a privilege is lowered. It is not excessive and can balance an appropriate amount of euphoria.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, Among them, a result display specific to the specific combination, the predetermined result derived when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode The display may be a result display that can be derived even when a combination other than the specific combination among the plurality of combinations is determined as the internal winning combination.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a privilege is granted when a specific combination is won, a result display unique to the specific combination is derived. The gameability of adding and displaying the result display (symbols) is preferable even from the player, so that the game interest can be improved by displaying the unique result display when the privilege is given. On the other hand, if a special feature is not awarded when a special combination is won, a result display that can be derived even when other combinations are won will be derived, so that the player knows that the specific combination is being won. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which a profit imparted to a player in a series of states is not excessive and an appropriate balance of euphoria is achieved.

[Appendix 9]
The gaming machine of appendix 9 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  Conventionally, there is also known a gaming machine that gives a privilege with reference to a history of past game results. For example, JP 2013-252212 A displays a winning history for five games according to a predetermined condition. In addition, a gaming machine that holds winning history data and performs an ART lottery based on the winning history being a winning history corresponding to the condition code data is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, control is performed in consideration of not only the current game but also the history of past games, so that a variety of gaming properties can be realized.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to continuously hold the winning history data for five games, or to prepare determination data referring to the winning history for five games, and increase the data capacity for processing. There is a problem that the development man-hours increase due to the complexity of the specifications.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a variety of gaming properties while suppressing data capacity and processing load.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. A game machine comprising game control means (for example, a main control board 71) for controlling the progress of a game using, and effect execution means (for example, a sub-control board 72) capable of executing effects related to the game, A display unit (for example, a history display window displayed on the display unit 100) having a predetermined number of display areas provided corresponding to each of the predetermined number of games from the current game to the previous game, and a predetermined role And a bonus granting means (for example, the main control board 71) that can grant a bonus according to the fact that the winning combination is determined as the winning combination. Depending on While displaying predetermined effect information (for example, history icon) in the display area corresponding to the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination among the predetermined number of display areas of the display unit, the privilege giving means When granting the privilege, it is possible to execute an effect associated with the privilege in at least one of the display unit and the predetermined effect information.

  According to such a gaming machine, a privilege can be granted when a predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Here, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, predetermined presentation information is displayed on the display unit, and when a privilege is given, the display unit or the predetermined presentation information is displayed. The effect related to privilege grant is executed using. From the standpoint of the player, an illusion that a privilege has been given as a result of winning a predetermined role from the stage of production can realize a variety of gaming characteristics as in a conventional gaming machine. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, unlike the conventional gaming machine, it is not necessary to hold past history data, and it is possible to realize a gaming property controlled by referring to the past history from the production side. As a result, the data capacity can be reduced and the man-hours for development can be reduced because the specifications are monotonous.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in response to the predetermined combination being determined as the winning combination from among the plurality of combinations, the second state (which is more advantageous with respect to granting the privilege than the first state) For example, there is provided a state control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of starting the history high accuracy and capable of ending the second state when the predetermined number of games have been performed in the predetermined state. Also good.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, after that, the game enters the second state over a predetermined number of games, and when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during the second state, Compared with the case where the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination during one state, the degree of advantage related to the provision of the privilege is higher. Thereby, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is not necessary to hold the past history data as in the conventional gaming machine, and it is as if the past history is only entered by entering the second state with the first predetermined role as a trigger. Since the gameability controlled by reference can be realized, the data capacity can be reduced, and the man-hours for development can be reduced because the specifications are monotonous.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing various gaming properties while suppressing the data capacity and processing load.

[Appendix 10]
The gaming machine of appendix 10 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. We want to increase the number of navigation games).

  Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since a privilege is given according to the internal winning combination (the number of AT games is increased), the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game. Although interest is improved, if a specific role that is easily noticed by players such as watermelon and cherry is determined as an internal winning role, and the frequency that the privilege is not granted is high, the player will be discouraged, There was a risk that the interest of the game would decline.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reporting a privilege grant to a player at an appropriate frequency when a specific role is won. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, a specific combination (for example, rare combination), and a bonus combination (for example, MB). A game machine comprising game control means (for example, main control board 71) for controlling the progress of a game using the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations, As the gaming state to be performed, the bonus includes a plurality of gaming states including a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, “ART”) different from the predetermined gaming state, and the bonus When a result display corresponding to the combination is derived and the bonus is activated, first addition determination means (for example, the number of additional games) for determining an additional amount (for example, the number of additional games) for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued ( For example, main control Board 71), and when the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, second addition determination means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an additional amount that extends a period during which the specific gaming state can be continued. An additional control means (for example, a main control board 71) for extending a period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by an amount of the additional amount determined by the first additional determination means or the second additional determination means. When the additional amount is determined by the notifying means (for example, the sub-control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of the additional amount and the operation of the bonus, the first additional determining unit determines the additional amount. And an additional latent means (for example, the secondary control board 72) that keeps the additional amount in an unreported state without notifying the additional amount, and the notification means determines that the specific combination is the winning combination Nevertheless, when the second addition determining means does not determine the additional amount, the unreported additional amount held by the additional latent means within the range of the additional amount that can be determined with the specific role as a trigger. It is characterized in that at least a part can be notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the amount of addition is determined in response to the operation of the bonus, this amount of addition is not notified without being notified, and the amount of addition is not determined when the specific combination is won. In this case, the added amount of unreported information that has been held is notified instead. As a result, when the specific combination is won, not only the extra processing triggered by the specific combination but also the extra processing triggered by the operation of the bonus (addition effect) can be performed, and the player can easily pay attention. When a specific role is won, the player can be notified of the grant of the privilege at an appropriate frequency.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the informing means may be configured so that when the second addition determining means does not determine the addition amount even though the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, When notifying at least a part of the unreported additional amount that is held, the same additional amount as the additional amount that can be determined by the second additional determining unit may be notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when notifying the additional amount of unreported information instead, in order to notify the additional amount that is the same as the additional amount that can be determined at the time of winning the specific combination, the player can be added based on the specific combination It is possible to make an illusion as if it was performed, and to give a bonus to the player at an appropriate frequency when a specific role that is easily noticed by the player is won.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific combination is a combination having the same probability of being determined as a winning combination in each of a plurality of setting values, and the bonus combination has a plurality of settings. Probability that can be determined as a winning combination in at least a part of the values has different setting differences, and the probability that the first addition determination means and the second addition determination means determine the addition amount is a plurality of setting values It is good also as being the same in each.

  According to such a gaming machine, an extra with a specific role as an opportunity is commonly performed for a plurality of set values, but an extra with an operation of a bonus is performed with a different probability for each set value. Become. As mentioned above, the extra action triggered by the bonus operation is kept unreported, and is notified in place of the subsequent winning of the specified role, so even if the specified role has no difference in the set value, The frequency with which notification is performed varies depending on the set value. As a result, for example, even if the setting difference of the lottery table related to the addition process is eliminated, the player can feel the setting difference of the addition, and the game property of setting estimation from the addition frequency is realized. can do.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to inform the player of giving a privilege at an appropriate frequency when a specific combination is won.

[Appendix 11]
The gaming machine of appendix 11 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. We want to increase the number of navigation games).

  Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since a privilege is given according to the internal winning combination (the number of AT games is increased), the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production related to the granting of privileges.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a request, and it aims at providing the game machine which can implement | achieve the production | presentation which an interest improves regarding alerting | reporting of privilege provision.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means (for example, , A main control board 71), and a gaming state in which a game is played, a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal section) and a specific gaming state (for example, different from the predetermined gaming state) "ART"), and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an extra amount (for example, the number of extra games) for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued can be determined. Determination means (for example, main control board 71), and addition control means (for example, main control board 71) for extending the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued by the amount of addition determined by the addition determination means. ,in front Addition latency means (for example, sub-control board 72) that can be kept unreported without notifying the amount of addition, and when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when “F_SP Lip A1” or the like is won), the addition latency The notification means (for example, the sub control board 72, the display unit 100) capable of notifying the player of at least a part of the unreported additional amount held by the means, and the additional latent means are held. Production stage determination means (for example, sub-control board 72) capable of determining one production stage from a plurality of production stages according to the unannounced amount of addition, further comprising the production means It is possible to notify the player of the unreported additional amount by an additional notification effect corresponding to the one effect stage determined by the stage determination means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the addition is performed internally, there is a case where it is held without notification without notification, and the additional amount held without notification is thereafter determined according to a specific condition. You will be notified if you meet. As a result, it is possible to increase the amount of additional information that can be notified at once, and to improve the interest of the game with the notification effect of granting the bonus, as compared with the case where the additional amount is notified every time a small amount of additional amount is determined. Can do. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an effect stage is determined according to the unannounced addition amount, and the unreported increase amount is notified by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage. For the player, it is possible to predict the amount of unannounced addition from the production stage. For example, when the player moves to the production stage determined when the amount of unannounced addition is large, expectation of the subsequent game is expected. Can have. In addition, in order to notify the amount of unreported addition by the notification effect corresponding to the effect stage, for example, a variety of effects such as performing a more lively effect at the effect stage determined when there is a large amount of unreported addition amount Control can be realized.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, Stop control means that can derive a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means according to the winning combination determined from the above and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means (for example, main control Control board 71), and when the stop operation is performed in the first operation mode with respect to the plurality of stop operation means, the plurality of roles include a first result display ( For example, when a replay is derived and a stop operation is performed in the second operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means, a second result display (for example, a red BAR lip) is derived on the plurality of variable display means. The plurality When a stop operation is performed in the third operation mode with respect to the stop operation means, a specific combination (for example, “F_SP Lip B1”) from which a third result display (for example, W uniform lip) is derived to the plurality of variable display means. ) And the first operation mode can be notified to the player when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is less than a predetermined value (for example, 100) When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is a predetermined value or more and less than a specific value (for example, 150), the player can be notified of the second operation mode. In the case where the additional amount that has not been notified is equal to or greater than a specific value, an operation mode notifying unit capable of notifying the player of the third operation mode when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. The notification means is the unreported top When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the amount of the bonus is less than a predetermined value, the specific combination is determined when the unreported additional amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined value without performing the additional notification effect. Is determined as the winning combination, the additional notification effect for notifying the additional amount for the predetermined value is performed, and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination when the unreported additional amount is greater than or equal to a specific value. Then, it is good also as being able to perform the said additional alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports the additional amount for the said specific value.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to associate an unreported additional amount to be notified with an operation mode to be notified for deriving a result display. Specifically, when the additional amount is not notified, the operation mode from which the first result display is derived is notified, and when the additional amount for the predetermined value is notified, the second result display is derived. When the operation mode is notified and the additional amount for the specific value is notified, the operation mode from which the third result display is derived is notified. The gameability of adding and displaying result displays (symbols) is preferable even from the player, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by encouraging the derivation of a specific result display when performing a notification effect. Can do.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect in which interest is improved with respect to notification of privilege grant.

[Appendix 12]
The gaming machine of appendix 12 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). According to the gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, the number of game media to be paid out to the player is controlled by controlling whether or not to perform navigation. We want to increase the number of navigation games).

  Ingenuity for increasing the number of AT games has been made from various viewpoints. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine that increases the number of AT games (adds the number of AT games) is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since a privilege is given according to the internal winning combination (the number of AT games is increased), the player pays attention to the result of the internal winning combination and plays a game. Although the interest was improved, there was room for further improvement in the production related to the granting of privileges.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a request, and it aims at providing the game machine which can implement | achieve the production | presentation which an interest improves regarding alerting | reporting of privilege provision.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means (for example, A main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , Counting means (for example, main control board 71) capable of counting a first numerical value (for example, the number of games that have been digested) relating to the specific gaming state, and a second period indicating a remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. When a numerical value (for example, the number of remaining games) reaches an end threshold (for example, 0), the specific gaming state is ended, and at least the first numerical value counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, the number of games). A specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the specific gaming state even when the value of the second numerical value does not reach the ending threshold value, Remaining period notifying means (for example, sub-control board 72, etc.) capable of notifying a predetermined second number (for example, the number of already-remained games) of the second numbers as the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. The display unit 100) and a specific second numerical value other than the predetermined second numerical value (for example, the number of remaining unreported games) of the second numerical values can be kept unreported without being reported as the remaining period. If the remaining period latent means (for example, the sub-control board 72) meets a specific condition, a part of the unreported specific second numerical value held by the remaining period latent means is notified as the remaining period. With An additional notification means (for example, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) for updating the predetermined second numerical value and the specific second numerical value in accordance with the notified value, and one effect stage is determined from a plurality of effect stages. A possible stage stage determination means (for example, the sub control board 72), and the first stage stage and the frequency at which the frequency of the notification by the additional notification section is a predetermined frequency as the plurality of stage stages. A second stage that is higher than the first stage, and a dedicated stage that can be determined only when the first numerical value is determined to satisfy the predetermined end condition later. In the state where the first numerical value satisfies the predetermined termination condition, the determining means is a sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value. In the first situation where the value is within the first threshold range, the dedicated stage can be determined as the one stage with a predetermined probability, and the sum of the first numerical value and the predetermined second numerical value is In the second situation that is within the range of the second threshold value that is a value larger than the first threshold value, the dedicated effect stage can be determined as the one effect stage with a probability higher than the predetermined probability, When the dedicated stage is not determined as one stage, the second stage can be determined as the first stage with a probability corresponding to the specific second numerical value.

  According to such a gaming machine, a part (predetermined second numerical value) is notified for the remaining period of the specific gaming state, and the remaining part (specific second numerical value) is kept unreported, This remaining unreported period is notified (that is, added) to the player at a frequency corresponding to the production stage. Thus, by controlling the notification (addition) of the remaining period according to the production stage, the production mode can be finely controlled and the interest of the game can be improved. That is, as the remaining period of unreported information is larger, the second effect stage that is frequently reported for the remaining period is determined. Therefore, when the player can move to the second effect stage, the notification effect is performed. You can have expectations about that.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the period (first numerical value) in which the specific gaming state is consumed satisfies the predetermined end condition, the specific gaming state is ended regardless of the remaining period (second numerical value). In a state where a predetermined end condition is determined in the future from the remaining period, the stage may be shifted to a dedicated stage. From the viewpoint of the player, it is possible to grasp that the specific game state continues until the first numerical value satisfies the end condition when the stage shifts to the dedicated effect stage, so that the subsequent game can be performed with peace of mind. At this time, the transition to the dedicated production stage is performed with a higher probability as the sum of the first numerical value (digested period) and the predetermined second numerical value (remaining notified period) is larger, and the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Even if the specific second numerical value (unreported remaining period) is large, for example, the state shifts to the second stage, for example, without moving to the dedicated stage. Production is performed. For a player, if a notification (addition) effect is performed, the interest is improved. Therefore, like the gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect of the game is controlled by controlling the effect mode according to the notification status of the remaining period. Can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to realize an effect in which interest is improved with respect to notification of privilege grant.

[Appendix 13]
The gaming machine of appendix 13 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-233721, an advantageous state (AT) is performed with a predetermined number of games as one set, and an advantageous state is obtained after the completion of one set of advantageous states. There is disclosed a gaming machine provided with an effect period that encourages the user to start again. According to such a gaming machine, regardless of the number of advantageous state sets possessed, it is expected that even if one advantageous state ends, the advantageous state of the next set may be started again. Can be given to the player, and the fun of the game is improved.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, even if there is no remaining set number, an effect is given to reiterate the advantageous state after the end of one set advantageous state, but the player has no remaining set number. If this is understood, this effect does not make sense, and on the contrary, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decrease in the interest of a game when a specific gaming state ends.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means (for example, A main control board 71), and a specific state starting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of starting a specific gaming state (for example, an advantageous section) when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The counting means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of counting a numerical value related to the specific gaming state, and when the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfies a specific condition (for example, reaches 1500 times), the specific The specific state ending means (for example, the main control board 71) for ending the specific gaming state regardless of the remaining period in which the gaming state can be continued, and the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued reaches an end threshold. And an end-time process determining means (for example, the main control board 71) that determines whether or not to perform a predetermined process (for example, last freeze), and the end-time process determining means determines to perform the predetermined process, End processing execution means (for example, the main control board 71) that allows the specific gaming state to continue until the numerical value counted by the counting means satisfies the specific condition, the specific state end means, When the end time process determining means determines not to perform the predetermined process, the specific gaming state is ended.

  According to such a gaming machine, if a numerical value counted in relation to a specific gaming state satisfies a specific condition, the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. Yes (limit processing). On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining period of the specific gaming state reaches the end threshold, it is determined whether or not to perform the predetermined process, and when it is determined to perform the predetermined process, Until the processing is performed (until the counted numerical value satisfies a specific condition), the continuation of a specific gaming state is permitted. As a result, when a predetermined process is performed, the specific gaming state that is supposed to end is continued until the limit processing is performed, so that the interest of the game decreases with the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the player is strongly interested at the end of a specific gaming state, and the interest is improved. When performing limit processing, the specific gaming state is forcibly terminated regardless of the remaining period, so that even if predetermined processing is performed, the gambling will not be increased. It is possible to achieve balanced game play. That is, even if a specific gaming state has already been continued for a long period of time when a predetermined process has been performed, on the contrary, if a specific gaming state has only continued for a short period of time, the specific gaming state is Since it continues only until a limit process is performed as a whole, an excessive profit is not given to a player.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the end time process execution means determines that the end time process determination means performs the predetermined process, at least the numerical value is in a remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. It is also possible to add a period required until the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to such a gaming machine, when it is determined that the predetermined process is to be performed at the end of the specific gaming state, a period required until the limit process is performed is added to the remaining period in which the specific gaming state can be continued. As a result, it is possible not only to prevent the interest of the game from deteriorating with the end of a specific gaming state, but on the contrary, the player will have a strong interest at the end of a specific gaming state. , Interest is improved.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which can suppress that the interest of a game falls at the time of completion | finish of a specific game state can be provided.

[Appendix 14]
The gaming machine of appendix 14 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, for example, in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-39536, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state) advantageous to the player, and the sign state (advantageous) is determined based on the lottery result. There is known a gaming machine that can make a transition to a predecessor to shift to a state) or a pre-gase state (a precursor when the state does not shift to an advantageous state).

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, while it is possible to perform an effect of encouraging the transition to the advantageous state during the precursor (the present precursor state or the pre-gase state), it is possible to improve the fun of the game, In the case of shifting, since it does not shift to an advantageous state, the medals are consumed as a result, and there is no benefit, so there is a possibility that the willingness to play may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in gaming motivation.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means (for example, And a main control board 71), and a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) that can notify the mode of the stop operation can be shifted from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. At least a second notification state (for example, “ART”) that has a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in association with the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ), The gaming machine performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and the first start condition is satisfied in a non-notification state (for example, a normal section). And said 1st state control means (for example, main control board 71) which can start 1 reporting state, and 2nd state control which can start the 2nd reporting state when the 2nd starting condition is satisfied in the 1st reporting state Depending on the period required from the time when the second state control means starts the second notification state after the means (for example, the main control board 71) and the first state control means start the first notification state. And a period determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining a period during which the second notification state can be continued, wherein the period determination means starts the first notification state after the start of the first notification state. A longer period can be determined as the period in which the second notification state can be continued as the period required to start the second notification state is longer.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the second notification state is started. The second notification state started at this time is changed from the first notification state to the second notification state. The period is determined according to the period required to shift to the state, and the longer the period is, the longer the period is determined. Thereby, even if it is a case where it cannot stay to the 2nd information state and has stayed in the 1st information state for a long period of time, it will not only consume a medal, but the 2nd information state after that will continue for a long time. Since it can have an expectation about continuing, the reduction of game willingness can be suppressed. Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in association with the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. Thereby, even if it is a case where it stays in a 1st alerting state for a long time and a long period is determined as a period of the 2nd alerting | reporting state, an alerting state (a 1st alerting state and a 2nd alerting state) continues more than necessary. It is possible to prevent the euphoria from being raised.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when an end condition is satisfied in the first notification state, third state control means (for example, a main control board) capable of ending the first notification state and starting the non-notification state. 71), and the average unit game count until the first start condition is satisfied in the non-notification state is smaller than the average unit game count until the second start condition is satisfied in the first notification state. It is good as well.

  According to such a gaming machine, the transition frequency of the former is higher in the transition from the non-notification state to the first notification state and the transition from the first notification state to the second notification state. As described above, in the first notification state, the longer the stay period, the longer the period of the second notification state. Therefore, for the player, the first stage chance (first notification state) is felt closer and the game continues. It becomes. On the other hand, if the end condition is satisfied before the second start condition is satisfied, the state shifts to the non-notification state. Since it does not necessarily shift to the second notification state but may shift to the non-notification state, it is possible to achieve a balanced game without increasing the happiness.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a reduction in gaming motivation.

[Appendix 15]
The gaming machine of appendix 15 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine having such an AT function, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099 discloses that an interval indicator (AT winning notification lamp) managed by a main control unit is turned on when an advantageous interval such as AT is entered. Thus, a gaming machine for notifying that it is in an advantageous section is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, the main control side manages the advantageous section, so that the playability becomes clear, but whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (AT) is determined only by whether or not the section indicator lights. Since it can be perceived, the player concentrates only on the section display, and there is a possibility that the interest in effects such as video and audio will fade.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and it is intended to provide a gaming machine in which the player does not lose interest in the production while reliably informing whether or not the transition to the advantageous state has occurred. Objective.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a variable display portion (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information. After the variable display portion is variably displayed, the player can perform a stop operation. A game control unit (for example, a main control board) that controls the progress of the game in a gaming machine that can derive the display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit based on the display result and can give a privilege according to the display result. 71), an effect control unit (for example, sub-control board 72) that controls the effect, stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player, and transition of the game state A state in which the gaming state can be controlled into possible transition determining means (for example, the main control board 71), at least a normal state (for example, a normal section), and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) more advantageous than the normal state Control means For example, a main control board 71) and instruction means (for example, main control board 71, notification lamp 147a, sub-control board 72, display unit 100) capable of instructing a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player, The advantageous state includes a first state (for example, an effect section) in which the payout rate is lower than 1, and a second state (for example, an increased section) in which the instruction means generates more frequently than the first state. In the normal state, the transition determining means includes at least a first pattern that transitions to the first state (for example, a pattern that transitions from the normal section to the effect section), and after the transition to the first state. It is possible to determine a second pattern that shifts to the second state (for example, a pattern that shifts from the normal interval to the increase interval via the effect interval), and the gaming state is the second state That the game state is determined to be shifted to the second state by the notification means (for example, the status indicator 147b) controlled by the game control unit and the transition determination means. A notification effect executing means (for example, the display unit 100) controlled by the effect control unit, wherein the notification state is informed that the gaming state is the second state. In the unit game in the first state before being performed, the specific effect can be executed by the notification effect executing means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the gaming state is the second state, the notification means notifies the fact. Here, since the notifying means is controlled by the game control unit that controls the progress of the game, the main (game control unit) side is surely notified of whether or not the transition to the second state is advantageous to the player. Can do. In addition, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the transition is made from the normal state to the advantageous state, the transition is made once to the first state regardless of whether the transition is in the first pattern or the second pattern. However, the specific effect is executed in the notification effect executing means controlled on the sub (effect control unit) side during the first state. At this time, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, in the unit game before the notification on the main (game control unit) side, the effect is executed on the sub (effect control unit) side. The player has no way of knowing whether or not he / she has won the transition to the second state, and does not lose interest in the performance.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the state control means determines that the length of the period for controlling to the first state based on the determination of the first pattern and the determination of the second pattern. The length of the period controlled to the first state may be set to the same length.

  According to such a gaming machine, the length of the period to be controlled to the first state is the same regardless of whether the transition is in the first pattern or the second pattern. From the length of the period of the 1 state, it is not possible to grasp whether or not to shift to the 2nd state thereafter. For the player, since the subsequent development cannot be predicted during the first state, the game is played without losing interest until the end, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player does not lose interest in the production while surely notifying the success or failure of the transition to the advantageous state.

[Appendix 16]
The gaming machine of appendix 16 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724, if an AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), the AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine that performs limit processing is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the state advantageous to the player from continuing indefinitely, and thus it is possible to suppress the gambling of the game from increasing.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when a state advantageous to the player is ended (regardless of whether the end is due to the limit process or the remaining number of games is exhausted), all the information regarding the state to be ended is reset (initialized), and thereafter There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can widen the range of subsequent gaming while resetting related information.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and the plurality of winning combinations determined from a plurality of winning combinations. And a stop control means (for example, main control board 71) capable of deriving the result display by stopping the variable display of the variable display means, and the result display includes a specific state (for example, , At the end of ART), a specific result display (for example, right-down replay) is included, and predetermined reset control (for example, initialization of information related to ART) is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived. If performed, state control means (for example, main state) for setting the specific state (for example, at the end of ART) based on the specific result display derived after returning from the reset control. And further comprising a control board 71).

  Thus, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific result display is linked to a specific state, and after a predetermined reset control is performed (after returning), the specific result display is specified from the specific result display derived at that time. Read the status of. That is, when predetermined reset control is performed in a state where the specific result display is derived, the related information is initialized along with the reset control, but the specific result is displayed based on the derived specific result display. Can be set. Thereby, even after resetting the related information, it is possible to widen the range of playability by using the specific state recognized after the return.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, an end means (for example, main control board 71) for ending a predetermined gaming state (for example, ART) in response to the specific result display being derived, and the end means And an initialization means (for example, a main control board 71) that resets information relating to the predetermined gaming state when the predetermined gaming state is terminated, and the state control means includes the information by the initialization means. After the resetting, the end of the predetermined gaming state may be set based on the derived specific result display.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the specific result display is derived, the ending unit ends the predetermined gaming state, and the initialization unit resets information regarding the predetermined gaming state. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, after the resetting by the initialization means, it is set that the predetermined gaming state is ended from the derived specific result display. Thus, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, the gaming machine side can only grasp that it is “not in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state)” with the reset by the initialization means. In the gaming machine according to the above, it is possible to grasp that the normal gaming state is “immediately after the predetermined gaming state ends”. As a result, for example, by changing the transition from the normal gaming state to the predetermined gaming state between immediately after the end of the predetermined gaming state and the other, the transition to the predetermined gaming state after the end of the predetermined gaming state It is possible to provide a game such that the retraction is easily performed.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of subsequent gaming while resetting related information.

[Appendix 17]
The gaming machine of appendix 17 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724, if an AT continues for a long period of time (for example, 1500 times), the AT is forcibly terminated regardless of the number of remaining games. A gaming machine that performs limit processing is disclosed. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the state advantageous to the player from continuing indefinitely, and thus it is possible to suppress the gambling of the game from increasing.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, when a state advantageous to the player is ended (regardless of whether the end is due to the limit process or the remaining number of games is exhausted), all the information regarding the state to be ended is reset (initialized), and thereafter There was a risk that the game would become monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of widening the range of game play after a predetermined gaming state is finished.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means for controlling the progress of the game using the variable display means (for example, And a main control board 71), and a notification state (for example, a normal section) that can notify the mode of the stop operation can be shifted from the first notification state (for example, normal advantageous) and the first notification state. At least a second notification state (for example, “ART”) that has a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in association with the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ), The gaming machine performs limit processing to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued, and starts the second notification state when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, The predetermined termination condition is If it is done, state control means (for example, main control board 71) which ends the 2nd information state, and operation reception means (for example, which can receive reset operation at the time of the end of the 2nd information state by the state control means) Main control board 71), and when the operation receiving unit receives the reset operation, the state control unit starts a non-notification state after the second notification state ends, and the operation reception unit If the reset operation is not accepted, the first notification state is started after the end of the second notification state.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to accept a reset operation at the end of the second notification state, and when the player performs a reset operation, transition to the non-notification state after the end of the second notification state, When the reset operation is not performed, the state is shifted to the first notification state after the second notification state is finished. Since the first notification state is a notification state in which the mode of the stop operation is notified and is a gaming state that can be shifted to the second notification state, when the transition to the first notification state is performed without performing the reset operation. Therefore, it is possible to have an expectation for the transition (retraction) to the finished second notification state. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the numerical value counted in association with the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated (limit processing). ). Here, when the reset operation is not performed, since the notification state (first notification state) is maintained even after the end of the second notification state, the numerical value regarding the notification state continues to be counted, and then the limit process is performed. It becomes easy. Therefore, when the reset operation is not performed, although expectation can be expected in pulling back, there is a demerit that limit processing is easily performed. From the player's point of view, since the selection of whether or not to perform the reset operation is made in consideration of the advantages and disadvantages, the selection after the second notification state has ended can be made strategic. , Can expand the range of playability.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first notification state may have a higher probability of satisfying the predetermined start condition than the non-notification state.

  According to such a gaming machine, since it is easier to shift to the second notification state when the transition to the first notification state is performed without performing the reset operation, the strategy after the second notification state has ended is strategic. Can be provided, and the range of playability can be expanded.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to widen the range of game play after a predetermined game state ends.

[Appendix 18]
The gaming machine of appendix 18 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-057332, when a specific combination such as watermelon or cherry is determined as an internal winning combination, the number of AT games is increased (the number of AT games is increased). A gaming machine is disclosed.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine equipped with the AT function, since the gaming state is advantageous for the player during the AT period in which the navigation is performed, the player only plays the game aiming at the AT period. Was monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a demand, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties.

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and the variable display means according to a winning combination determined from a plurality of combinations. Game control means (for example, the main control board 71) for controlling the progress of the game using the first, which is counted in relation to the notification state (for example, advantageous section) that can notify the mode of the stop operation When the numerical value reaches a specific value (for example, 1500 times), a game that performs a limit process that ends the notification state and starts a non-notification state (for example, a normal section) regardless of the remaining period during which the notification state can be continued. A predetermined result display (for example, 7-piece replay) is derived for the plurality of roles when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, and a predetermined operation different from the specific operation mode. Stop operation was performed in the mode A specific combination (for example, “F_choice number rep”) from which a predetermined result display (for example, replay) different from the specific result display is derived, and a replay combination related to the operation of replay are included. When the specific result display is derived, RT state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that starts a high RT state with a high probability that the replay combination is determined as a winning combination, State start means (for example, main control board 71) that starts the notification state when a start condition is satisfied, and counting means (for example, a second numerical value related to the notification state when the state start means starts the notification state) , When the specific result display (for example, 7-piece replay) is derived in the notification state, the end of the state in which the notification state is ended and the non-notification state is started. When the specific combination (for example, “F_selection number rep”) is determined as the winning combination during the notification state, for example, the specific operation mode (for example, 7 complete replays) Display means (for example, a main control board 71, a notification lamp 147a, a sub control board 72, and a display unit 100) capable of notifying the stop operation necessary for display, and the notification means counts the notification means. Until the second numerical value reaches a predetermined value, even if the specific combination is determined as a winning combination, the second numerical value reaches the predetermined value without notifying the specific operation mode. When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the specific operation mode is notified.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a specific result display is derived, although the notification state is ended and the state is shifted to the non-notification state, the high RT state with a high probability that the replay combination is determined as the winning combination is started. The That is, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the high RT state starts when the notification state ends and shifts to the non-notification state. Thereby, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, contrary to the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to realize the gameability aiming at the transition from the notification state to the non-notification state (high RT), and the interest is improved. I can expect. Here, the specific result display is derived when a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode when the specific combination is won, and when the specific combination is won during the notification state, the specific operation mode is notified. Sometimes. Specifically, the specific stop mode is not notified until the second numerical value counted during the notification state reaches a predetermined value, but the specific stop mode is notified after reaching the predetermined value. Thereby, when staying in the notification state for a certain period of time, since the transition to high RT can be expected thereafter (a specific stop mode is notified), according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period during the notification state Can be set as the ceiling period to high RT, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the state start unit starts the notification state, a predetermined value setting unit (for example, main control) that determines one numerical value from a plurality of numerical values and sets the predetermined value as the predetermined value. A substrate 71) may be further provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, since a period until a specific stop mode is notified can be arbitrarily set, the ceiling period to the high RT changes each time, and the interest of the game is improved.

[The invention's effect]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties.

[Appendix 19]
The gaming machine of appendix 19 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. In addition, notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (notifying), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time).

  As a gaming machine having such an AT function, for example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-153724, if the notification period (AT) continues for a long time (for example, 1500 times), it is compulsory regardless of the number of remaining games. Discloses a gaming machine that performs a limit process for ending the notification period. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the state advantageous to the player from continuing indefinitely, and thus it is possible to suppress the gambling of the game from increasing.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
By the way, in such a gaming machine, the probability cannot be made different as in the high probability / low probability with respect to the transition from the non-notification period to the notification period, so the notification period is divided into the first section and the second section. In addition, the second section is set to be in the AT of the conventional gaming machine, and the probability of transition to the AT (second section) is set by making a difference in the transition probability to the second section during the first section. It is said. However, since the first section is included in the notification period, in such control, when the first section continues for a long period of time and then shifts to the second section (AT section), the notification period is set to the upper limit (1500 times). It becomes easy to reach, and there is a risk of detracting from the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that does not impair the interest of the player while suppressing the increase in gambling. .

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays, and game control means (for example, control of the progress of the game using the variable display means). And a main control board 71), and a notification state (for example, an advantageous section) that can notify the mode of the stop operation can be shifted from the first notification state (for example, normal advantage) and the first notification state. At least a second notification state (for example, “ART”) that has a higher possibility of notification than the first notification state, and a numerical value counted in association with the notification state is a specific value (for example, 1500 times). ), A gaming machine that performs a limit process to end the notification state regardless of the remaining period in which the notification state can be continued, and when the first condition is satisfied in a non-notification state (for example, a normal section), Before playing state When the first notification state is entered and the second condition is satisfied in the non-notification state, the gaming state is shifted to the second notification state, and when the third condition is satisfied in the first notification state, the gaming state is changed to the non-notification state. The system further includes state control means for shifting the gaming state to the second notification state when the fourth condition is satisfied in the first notification state by transitioning to the notification state, and transitioning to the second notification state in the non-notification state. The probability of satisfying the second condition serving as a trigger is higher than the probability of satisfying the third condition serving as a trigger for transition to the second report state in the first notification state.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the numerical value counted in association with the notification state (the first notification state and the second notification state) reaches a specific value, the notification state is forcibly terminated. The first notification state and the second notification state) are not continued more than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the euphoria from being increased. Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the transition to the second notification state, which is more advantageous for the player, may be performed from the first notification state or the non-notification state. It is easier to shift from the non-notification state to the second notification state than to shift from the notification state. As a result, the second notification state is not shifted from the non-notification state via the first notification state, but is mainly routed from the first notification state to the second notification state via the non-notification state. It is possible to realize the playability as a simple transition route. By doing in this way, when it transfers to a 2nd alerting | reporting state, the game state immediately before that is a non-notifying state in many cases, and as a result, the numerical value counted for a limit process also changes to a 2nd alerting | reporting state. It is reset once just before the transition. As a result, according to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the numerical value used for the limit process can be obtained from the start of the second notification state while preventing the euphoria from being increased by performing the limit process. There is no wasteful counting, and the player's interest is not impaired.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the gaming machine which does not impair a player's interest can be provided, suppressing increasing gambling.

[Appendix 20]
The gaming machine of appendix 20 is as follows.

[Background technology]

  Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or coin (hereinafter referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively displayed. When the rotation of a plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the sheet starts and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as “stop operation”), the rotation of the plurality of reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is displayed. There is known a so-called pachislot machine that is given a privilege depending on the game machine.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected by a start switch, a random number is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of the lottery is referred to as an “internal winning combination”), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. If the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels based on the internal winning combination.

  In addition, in recent years, a gaming machine for notifying a player of information advantageous to a player, such as information for establishing an internal winning combination, is known so as not to miss the determined role as an internal winning combination. It has been. It should be noted that notifying such information that would be advantageous to the player is generally referred to as navigating (navigating), and the period during which navigation is performed is referred to as AT (assist time). As a gaming machine equipped with such an AT function, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-104425 discloses a gaming machine having a plurality of modes for determining the probability of transition to an AT.

[Summary of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
According to such a gaming machine, since there is a difference in the transition probability for each mode, the transition expectation to the AT will change according to the current mode, and the interest of the game will improve, but the transition to the AT In a situation where a mode with a low probability is suggested, there is a risk that the willingness to play will be lost and the interest of the game will be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation when staying in an unfavorable state for a player. And

[Means for solving problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  In the gaming machine according to the present invention, a plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information, and a player can perform a stop operation corresponding to the plurality of variable display means. A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R), a variation control means (for example, main control board 71) for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of the start condition, An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, an internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the plurality of stop operation means. A stop control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of deriving a result display by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the stop operation via , The game state in which the technique is performed has a normal state (for example, a normal section) and an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state, and can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means. As the internal winning combination, a bonus winning combination and a specific winning combination are determined as an internal winning combination (for example, “F_BB2 + special combination”), and at least the bonus winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination. And a second winning combination (for example, “F_BB2”) that is different from the first winning combination, and the internal winning combination determining means includes the first winning combination or the One of the second winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of a plurality of setting values, and the other is different in at least a part of the plurality of setting values. If the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, the first privilege (e.g., common bonus) is determined regardless of the type of the internal winning combination determined as the internal winning combination. A common processing means (for example, the main control board 71) capable of giving a privilege based on the processing, and a role having no setting difference (for example, “F_BB2 +” between the first winning combination and the second winning combination in the normal state) And a special processing means (for example, main control board 71) capable of giving a second privilege (for example, a privilege based on special processing) A 2nd privilege is a big privilege compared with the said 1st privilege, It is characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to such a gaming machine, the privilege given according to the gaming state when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination is different. Specifically, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the advantageous state, the first privilege is granted regardless of the type of bonus combination determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus combination is displayed during the normal state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, the second privilege is granted only when the determined combination is a combination having no setting difference. At this time, since the 2nd privilege is a big privilege compared with the 1st privilege, according to the gaming machine concerning the present invention, during a relatively unfavorable normal state, a larger 2nd privilege is received. Can do. As a result, even if the player is staying in a normal state that is not advantageous to the player, there is a chance of a large privilege (second privilege) that cannot be received during the advantageous state, so the willingness to play during the normal state Can be suppressed. Note that the second privilege that can be granted during the normal state is given when the combination with no setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the setting is low (easily staying in the normal state). Since it is possible to receive the second privilege without changing, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming motivation from the setting situation.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the stop control means includes a case where a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the second winning combination. In the game where the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the plurality of variable display means stop changing. .

  According to such a gaming machine, when the stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the first winning combination is won and when the second winning combination is won. In the advantageous state, even if a combination having no setting difference between the first winning combination and the second winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination having a setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. It is possible to make it impossible to determine whether a combination having no setting difference is determined as an internal winning combination. As described above, a role having no setting difference has a greater privilege given to a player who is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal state than in an advantageous state. Therefore, by controlling like the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling down and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

[The invention's effect]
ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, when staying in the state which is not advantageous for a player, it can suppress that a game willingness falls.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub-control board, 100 ... Display unit, 147b ... Status indicator

Claims (2)

A plurality of variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of identification information;
A plurality of stop operation means capable of being operated by the player in response to the plurality of variable display means;
Fluctuation control means for variably displaying the plurality of variable display means based on establishment of a start condition;
An internal winning combination determining means capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition;
Based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stop operation via the plurality of stop operation means, the result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means. Stop control means;
A gaming machine equipped with
As a gaming state for playing a game, there are a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state,
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a first winning combination in which a bonus combination and a specific combination are determined as an internal winning combination, and at least the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination. And having a second winning combination whose type of winning combination is different from the first winning combination,
The internal winning combination determining means determines the internal winning combination with the same probability in each of a plurality of set values for either the first winning combination or the second winning combination, and for the other Determined as the internal winning combination with a different probability in at least a part of the set value of
When the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous state, common processing means capable of giving a first privilege regardless of the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination;
When a combination with no setting difference is determined as the internal winning combination of the first winning combination or the second winning combination in the normal state, an individual processing means capable of giving a second privilege;
Further comprising
The second privilege is a larger privilege than the first privilege.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The stop control means includes a case where a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode in the game in which the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In the game, when the stop operation is performed in the specific operation mode, the same result display is derived when the plurality of variable display means is stopped from changing.
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images